diff options
Diffstat (limited to '13720-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 13720-0.txt | 11386 |
1 files changed, 11386 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/13720-0.txt b/13720-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f9d169 --- /dev/null +++ b/13720-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11386 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 13720 *** + +MARDI: +AND A VOYAGE THITHER + +By Herman Melville + +In Two Volumes + +Vol. I + +1864 + + + + +DEDICATED +TO +My Brother, +ALLAN MELVILLE. + + + + +CONTENTS + + PREFACE + MARDI + CHAPTER I — Foot in Stirrup + CHAPTER II — A Calm + CHAPTER III — A King for a Comrade + CHAPTER IV — A Chat in the Clouds + CHAPTER V — Seats secured and Portmanteaus packed + CHAPTER VI — Eight Bells + CHAPTER VII — A Pause + CHAPTER VIII — They push off, Velis et Remis + CHAPTER IX — The Watery World is all before Them + CHAPTER X — They arrange their Canopies And Lounges, and try to Make Things comfortable + CHAPTER XI — Jarl afflicted with the Lockjaw + CHAPTER XII — More about being in an open Boat + CHAPTER XIII — Of the Chondropterygii, and other uncouth Hordes infesting the South Seas + CHAPTER XIV — Jarl’s Misgivings + CHAPTER XV — A Stitch in time saves Nine + CHAPTER XVI — They are Becalmed + CHAPTER XVII — In high Spirits, they push on for the Terra Incognita + CHAPTER XVIII — My Lord Shark and his Pages + CHAPTER XIX — Who goes there? + CHAPTER XX — Noises and Portents + CHAPTER XXI — Man ho! + CHAPTER XXII — What befel the Brigantine at the Pearl Shell Islands + CHAPTER XXIII — Sailing from the Island they pillage the Cabin + CHAPTER XXIV — Dedicated to the College of Physicians and Surgeons + CHAPTER XXV — Peril A Peace-Maker + CHAPTER XXVI — Containing a Pennyweight Of Philosophy + CHAPTER XXVII — In which the past History of the Parki is concluded + CHAPTER XXVIII — Suspicions laid, and something about the Calmuc + CHAPTER XXIX — What they lighted upon in further searching the Craft, and the Resolution they came to + CHAPTER XXX — Hints for a full length of Samoa + CHAPTER XXXI — Rovings Alow and Aloft + CHAPTER XXXII — Xiphius Platypterus + CHAPTER XXXIII — Otard + CHAPTER XXXIV — How they steered on their Way + CHAPTER XXXV — Ah, Annatoo! + CHAPTER XXXVI — The Parki gives up the Ghost + CHAPTER XXXVII — Once more they take to the Chamois + CHAPTER XXXVIII — The Sea on Fire + CHAPTER XXXIX — They fall in with Strangers + CHAPTER XL — Sire and Sons + CHAPTER XLI — A Fray + CHAPTER XLII — Remorse + CHAPTER XLIII — The Tent entered + CHAPTER XLIV — Away! + CHAPTER XLV — Reminiscences + CHAPTER XLVI — The Chamois with a roving Commission + CHAPTER XLVII — Yillah, Jarl, and Samoa + CHAPTER XLVIII — Something under the Surface + CHAPTER XLIX — Yillah + CHAPTER L — Yillah in Ardair + CHAPTER LI — The Dream begins to fade + CHAPTER LII — World ho! + CHAPTER LIII — The Chamois Ashore + CHAPTER LIV — A Gentleman from the Sun + CHAPTER LV — Tiffin in a Temple + CHAPTER LVI — King Media a Host + CHAPTER LVII — Taji takes Counsel with himself + CHAPTER LVIII — Mardi by Night and Yillah by Day + CHAPTER LIX — Their Morning Meal + CHAPTER LX — Belshazzar on the Bench + CHAPTER LXI — An Incognito + CHAPTER LXII — Taji retires from the World + CHAPTER LXIII — Odo and its Lord + CHAPTER LXIV — Yillah a Phantom + CHAPTER LXV — Taji makes three Acquaintances + CHAPTER LXVI — With a fair Wind, at Sunrise they sail + CHAPTER LXVII — Little King Peepi + CHAPTER LXVIII — How Teeth were regarded in Valapee + CHAPTER LXIX — The Company discourse, and Braid-Beard rehearses a Legend + CHAPTER LXX — The Minstrel leads off with a Paddle-Song; and a Message is received from Abroad + CHAPTER LXXI — They land upon the Island of Juam + CHAPTER LXXII — A Book from the Chronicles of Mohi + CHAPTER LXXIII — Something more of the Prince + CHAPTER LXXIV — Advancing deeper into the Vale, they encounter Donjalolo + CHAPTER LXXV — Time and Temples + CHAPTER LXXVI — A pleasant Place for a Lounge + CHAPTER LXXVII — The House of the Afternoon + CHAPTER LXXVIII — Babbalanja solus + CHAPTER LXXIX — The Center of many Circumferences + CHAPTER LXXX — Donjalolo in the Bosom of his Family + CHAPTER LXXXI — Wherein Babbalanja relates the Adventure of one Karkeke in the Land of Shades + CHAPTER LXXXII — How Donjalolo, sent Agents to the Surrounding Isles; with the Result + CHAPTER LXXXIII — They visit the Tributary Islets + CHAPTER LXXXIV — Taji sits down to Dinner with five-And-Twenty Kings, and a royal Time they have + CHAPTER LXXXV — After Dinner + CHAPTER LXXXVI — Of those Scamps the Plujii + CHAPTER LXXXVII — Nora-Bamma + CHAPTER LXXXVIII — In a Calm, Hautia’s Heralds approach + CHAPTER LXXXIX — Braid-Beard rehearses the Origin of the Isle of Rogues + CHAPTER XC — Rare Sport at Ohonoo + CHAPTER XCI — Of King Uhia and his Subjects + CHAPTER XCII — The God Keevi and the Precipice of Mondo + CHAPTER XCIII — Babbalanja steps in between Mohi and Yoomy; and Yoomy relates a Legend + CHAPTER XCIV — Of that jolly old Lord, Borabolla; and that jolly Island of his, Mondoldo; and of the Fish-Ponds, and the Hereafters of Fish + CHAPTER XCV — That jolly old Lord Borabolla laughs on both Sides of his Face + CHAPTER XCVI — Samoa a Surgeon + CHAPTER XCVII — Faith and Knowledge + CHAPTER XCVIII — The Tale of a Traveler + CHAPTER XCIX — “Marnee Ora, Ora Marnee” + CHAPTER C — The Pursuer himself is pursued + CHAPTER CI — The Iris + CHAPTER CII — They depart from Mondoldo + CHAPTER CIII — As they sail + CHAPTER CIV — Wherein Babbalanja broaches a diabolical Theory, and in his Own Person proves it + + + + +PREFACE + + +Not long ago, having published two narratives of voyages in the +Pacific, which, in many quarters, were received with incredulity, the +thought occurred to me, of indeed writing a romance of Polynesian +adventure, and publishing it as such; to see whether, the fiction might +not, possibly, be received for a verity: in some degree the reverse of +my previous experience. + +This thought was the germ of others, which have resulted in Mardi. New +York, January, 1849. + + + + +MARDI + + + + +CHAPTER I. +Foot In Stirrup + + +We are off! The courses and topsails are set: the coral-hung anchor +swings from the bow: and together, the three royals are given to the +breeze, that follows us out to sea like the baying of a hound. Out +spreads the canvas—alow, aloft-boom-stretched, on both sides, with many +a stun’ sail; till like a hawk, with pinions poised, we shadow the sea +with our sails, and reelingly cleave the brine. + +But whence, and whither wend ye, mariners? + +We sail from Ravavai, an isle in the sea, not very far northward from +the tropic of Capricorn, nor very far westward from Pitcairn’s island, +where the mutineers of the Bounty settled. At Ravavai I had stepped +ashore some few months previous; and now was embarked on a cruise for +the whale, whose brain enlightens the world. + +And from Ravavai we sail for the Gallipagos, otherwise called the +Enchanted Islands, by reason of the many wild currents and eddies there +met. + +Now, round about those isles, which Dampier once trod, where the +Spanish bucaniers once hived their gold moidores, the Cachalot, or +sperm whale, at certain seasons abounds. + +But thither, from Ravavai, your craft may not fly, as flies the +sea-gull, straight to her nest. For, owing to the prevalence of the +trade winds, ships bound to the northeast from the vicinity of Ravavai +are fain to take something of a circuit; a few thousand miles or so. +First, in pursuit of the variable winds, they make all haste to the +south; and there, at length picking up a stray breeze, they stand for +the main: then, making their easting, up helm, and away down the coast, +toward the Line. + +This round-about way did the Arcturion take; and in all conscience a +weary one it was. Never before had the ocean appeared so monotonous; +thank fate, never since. + +But bravo! in two weeks’ time, an event. Out of the gray of the +morning, and right ahead, as we sailed along, a dark object rose out of +the sea; standing dimly before us, mists wreathing and curling aloft, +and creamy breakers frothing round its base.—We turned aside, and, at +length, when day dawned, passed Massafuero. With a glass, we spied two +or three hermit goats winding down to the sea, in a ravine; and +presently, a signal: a tattered flag upon a summit beyond. Well +knowing, however, that there was nobody on the island but two or three +noose-fulls of runaway convicts from Chili, our captain had no mind to +comply with their invitation to land. Though, haply, he may have erred +in not sending a boat off with his card. + +A few days more and we “took the trades.” Like favors snappishly +conferred, they came to us, as is often the case, in a very sharp +squall; the shock of which carried away one of our spars; also our fat +old cook off his legs; depositing him plump in the scuppers to leeward. + +In good time making the desired longitude upon the equator, a few +leagues west of the Gallipagos, we spent several weeks chassezing +across the Line, to and fro, in unavailing search for our prey. For +some of their hunters believe, that whales, like the silver ore in +Peru, run in veins through the ocean. So, day after day, daily; and +week after week, weekly, we traversed the self-same longitudinal +intersection of the self-same Line; till we were almost ready to swear +that we felt the ship strike every time her keel crossed that imaginary +locality. + +At length, dead before the equatorial breeze, we threaded our way +straight along the very Line itself. Westward sailing; peering right, +and peering left, but seeing naught. + +It was during this weary time, that I experienced the first symptoms of +that bitter impatience of our monotonous craft, which ultimately led to +the adventures herein recounted. + +But hold you! Not a word against that rare old ship, nor its crew. The +sailors were good fellows all, the half, score of pagans we had shipped +at the islands included. Nevertheless, they were not precisely to my +mind. There was no soul a magnet to mine; none with whom to mingle +sympathies; save in deploring the calms with which we were now and then +overtaken; or in hailing the breeze when it came. Under other and +livelier auspices the tarry knaves might have developed qualities more +attractive. Had we sprung a leak, been “stove” by a whale, or been +blessed with some despot of a captain against whom to stir up some +spirited revolt, these shipmates of mine might have proved limber lads, +and men of mettle. But as it was, there was naught to strike fire from +their steel. + +There were other things, also, tending to make my lot on ship-board +very hard to be borne. True, the skipper himself was a trump; stood +upon no quarter-deck dignity; and had a tongue for a sailor. Let me do +him justice, furthermore: he took a sort of fancy for me in particular; +was sociable, nay, loquacious, when I happened to stand at the helm. +But what of that? Could he talk sentiment or philosophy? Not a bit. His +library was eight inches by four: Bowditch, and Hamilton Moore. + +And what to me, thus pining for some one who could page me a quotation +from Burton on Blue Devils; what to me, indeed, were flat repetitions +of long-drawn yarns, and the everlasting stanzas of Black-eyed Susan +sung by our full forecastle choir? Staler than stale ale. + +Ay, ay, Arcturion! I say it in no malice, but thou wast exceedingly +dull. Not only at sailing: hard though it was, that I could have borne; +but in every other respect. The days went slowly round and round, +endless and uneventful as cycles in space. Time, and time- pieces; How +many centuries did my hammock tell, as pendulum-like it swung to the +ship’s dull roll, and ticked the hours and ages. Sacred forever be the +Arcturion’s fore-hatch—alas! sea-moss is over it now—and rusty forever +the bolts that held together that old sea hearth-stone, about which we +so often lounged. Nevertheless, ye lost and leaden hours, I will rail +at ye while life lasts. + +Well: weeks, chronologically speaking, went by. Bill Marvel’s stories +were told over and over again, till the beginning and end dovetailed +into each other, and were united for aye. Ned Ballad’s songs were sung +till the echoes lurked in the very tops, and nested in the bunts of the +sails. My poor patience was clean gone. + +But, at last after some time sailing due westward we quitted the Line +in high disgust; having seen there, no sign of a whale. + +But whither now? To the broiling coast of Papua? That region of +sun-strokes, typhoons, and bitter pulls after whales unattainable. Far +worse. We were going, it seemed, to illustrate the Whistonian theory +concerning the damned and the comets;—hurried from equinoctial heats to +arctic frosts. To be short, with the true fickleness of his tribe, our +skipper had abandoned all thought of the Cachalot. In desperation, he +was bent upon bobbing for the Right whale on the Nor’-West Coast and in +the Bay of Kamschatska. + +To the uninitiated in the business of whaling, my feelings at this +juncture may perhaps be hard to understand. But this much let me say: +that Right whaling on the Nor’-West Coast, in chill and dismal fogs, +the sullen inert monsters rafting the sea all round like Hartz forest +logs on the Rhine, and submitting to the harpoon like half-stunned +bullocks to the knife; this horrid and indecent Right whaling, I say, +compared to a spirited hunt for the gentlemanly Cachalot in southern +and more genial seas, is as the butchery of white bears upon blank +Greenland icebergs to zebra hunting in Caffraria, where the lively +quarry bounds before you through leafy glades. + +Now, this most unforeseen determination on the part of my captain to +measure the arctic circle was nothing more nor less than a tacit +contravention of the agreement between us. That agreement needs not to +be detailed. And having shipped but for a single cruise, I had embarked +aboard his craft as one might put foot in stirrup for a day’s following +of the hounds. And here, Heaven help me, he was going to carry me off +to the Pole! And on such a vile errand too! For there was something +degrading in it. Your true whaleman glories in keeping his harpoon +unspotted by blood of aught but Cachalot. By my halidome, it touched +the knighthood of a tar. Sperm and spermaceti! It was unendurable. + +“Captain,” said I, touching my sombrero to him as I stood at the wheel +one day, “It’s very hard to carry me off this way to purgatory. I +shipped to go elsewhere.” + +“Yes, and so did I,” was his reply. “But it can’t be helped. Sperm +whales are not to be had. We’ve been out now three years, and something +or other must be got; for the ship is hungry for oil, and her hold a +gulf to look into. But cheer up my boy; once in the Bay of Kamschatka, +and we’ll be all afloat with what we want, though it be none of the +best.” + +Worse and worse! The oleaginous prospect extended into an immensity of +Macassar. “Sir,” said I, “I did not ship for it; put me ashore +somewhere, I beseech.” He stared, but no answer vouchsafed; and for a +moment I thought I had roused the domineering spirit of the +sea-captain, to the prejudice of the more kindly nature of the man. + +But not so. Taking three turns on the deck, he placed his hand on the +wheel, and said, “Right or wrong, my lad, go with us you must. Putting +you ashore is now out of the question. I make no port till this ship is +full to the combings of her hatchways. However, you may leave her if +you can.” And so saying he entered his cabin, like Julius Caesar into +his tent. + +He may have meant little by it, but that last sentence rung in my ear +like a bravado. It savored of the turnkey’s compliments to the prisoner +in Newgate, when he shoots to the bolt on him. + +“Leave the ship if I can!” Leave the ship when neither sail nor shore +was in sight! Ay, my fine captain, stranger things have been done. For +on board that very craft, the old Arcturion, were four tall fellows, +whom two years previous our skipper himself had picked up in an open +boat, far from the farthest shoal. To be sure, they spun a long yarn +about being the only survivors of an Indiaman burnt down to the water’s +edge. But who credited their tale? Like many others, they were keepers +of a secret: had doubtless contracted a disgust for some ugly craft +still afloat and hearty, and stolen away from her, off soundings. Among +seamen in the Pacific such adventures not seldom occur. Nor are they +accounted great wonders. They are but incidents, not events, in the +career of the brethren of the order of South Sea rovers. For what +matters it, though hundreds of miles from land, if a good whale-boat be +under foot, the Trades behind, and mild, warm seas before? And herein +lies the difference between the Atlantic and Pacific:—that once within +the Tropics, the bold sailor who has a mind to quit his ship round Cape +Horn, waits not for port. He regards that ocean as one mighty harbor. + +Nevertheless, the enterprise hinted at was no light one; and I resolved +to weigh well the chances. It’s worth noticing, this way we all have of +pondering for ourselves the enterprise, which, for others, we hold a +bagatelle. + +My first thoughts were of the boat to be obtained, and the right or +wrong of abstracting it, under the circumstances. But to split no hairs +on this point, let me say, that were I placed in the same situation +again, I would repeat the thing I did then. The captain well knew that +he was going to detain me unlawfully: against our agreement; and it was +he himself who threw out the very hint, which I merely adopted, with +many thanks to him. + +In some such willful mood as this, I went aloft one day, to stand my +allotted two hours at the mast-head. It was toward the close of a day, +serene and beautiful. There I stood, high upon the mast, and away, +away, illimitably rolled the ocean beneath. Where we then were was +perhaps the most unfrequented and least known portion of these seas. +Westward, however, lay numerous groups of islands, loosely laid down +upon the charts, and invested with all the charms of dream-land. But +soon these regions would be past; the mild equatorial breeze exchanged +for cold, fierce squalls, and all the horrors of northern voyaging. + +I cast my eyes downward to the brown planks of the dull, plodding ship, +silent from stem to stern; then abroad. + +In the distance what visions were spread! The entire western horizon +high piled with gold and crimson clouds; airy arches, domes, and +minarets; as if the yellow, Moorish sun were setting behind some vast +Alhambra. Vistas seemed leading to worlds beyond. To and fro, and all +over the towers of this Nineveh in the sky, flew troops of birds. +Watching them long, one crossed my sight, flew through a low arch, and +was lost to view. My spirit must have sailed in with it; for directly, +as in a trance, came upon me the cadence of mild billows laving a beach +of shells, the waving of boughs, and the voices of maidens, and the +lulled beatings of my own dissolved heart, all blended together. + +Now, all this, to be plain, was but one of the many visions one has up +aloft. But coming upon me at this time, it wrought upon me so, that +thenceforth my desire to quit the Arcturion became little short of a +frenzy. + + + + +CHAPTER II. +A Calm + + +Next day there was a calm, which added not a little to my impatience of +the ship. And, furthermore, by certain nameless associations revived in +me my old impressions upon first witnessing as a landsman this +phenomenon of the sea. Those impressions may merit a page. + +To a landsman a calm is no joke. It not only revolutionizes his +abdomen, but unsettles his mind; tempts him to recant his belief in the +eternal fitness of things; in short, almost makes an infidel of him. + +At first he is taken by surprise, never having dreamt of a state of +existence where existence itself seems suspended. He shakes himself in +his coat, to see whether it be empty or no. He closes his eyes, to test +the reality of the glassy expanse. He fetches a deep breath, by way of +experiment, and for the sake of witnessing the effect. If a reader of +books, Priestley on Necessity occurs to him; and he believes in that +old Sir Anthony Absolute to the very last chapter. His faith in Malte +Brun, however, begins to fail; for the geography, which from boyhood he +had implicitly confided in, always assured him, that though expatiating +all over the globe, the sea was at least margined by land. That over +against America, for example, was Asia. But it is a calm, and he grows +madly skeptical. + +To his alarmed fancy, parallels and meridians become emphatically what +they are merely designated as being: imaginary lines drawn round the +earth’s surface. + +The log assures him that he is in such a place; but the log is a liar; +for no place, nor any thing possessed of a local angularity, is to be +lighted upon in the watery waste. + +At length horrible doubts overtake him as to the captain’s competency +to navigate his ship. The ignoramus must have lost his way, and drifted +into the outer confines of creation, the region of the everlasting +lull, introductory to a positive vacuity. + +Thoughts of eternity thicken. He begins to feel anxious concerning his +soul. + +The stillness of the calm is awful. His voice begins to grow strange +and portentous. He feels it in him like something swallowed too big for +the esophagus. It keeps up a sort of involuntary interior humming in +him, like a live beetle. His cranium is a dome full of reverberations. +The hollows of his very bones are as whispering galleries. He is afraid +to speak loud, lest he be stunned; like the man in the bass drum. + +But more than all else is the consciousness of his utter helplessness. +Succor or sympathy there is none. Penitence for embarking avails not. +The final satisfaction of despairing may not be his with a relish. Vain +the idea of idling out the calm. He may sleep if he can, or purposely +delude himself into a crazy fancy, that he is merely at leisure. All +this he may compass; but he may not lounge; for to lounge is to be +idle; to be idle implies an absence of any thing to do; whereas there +is a calm to be endured: enough to attend to, Heaven knows. + +His physical organization, obviously intended for locomotion, becomes a +fixture; for where the calm leaves him, there he remains. Even his +undoubted vested rights, comprised in his glorious liberty of volition, +become as naught. For of what use? He wills to go: to get away from the +calm: as ashore he would avoid the plague. But he can not; and how +foolish to revolve expedients. It is more hopeless than a bad marriage +in a land where there is no Doctors’ Commons. He has taken the ship to +wife, for better or for worse, for calm or for gale; and she is not to +be shuffled off. With yards akimbo, she says unto him scornfully, as +the old beldam said to the little dwarf:—“Help yourself” + +And all this, and more than this, is a calm. + + + + +CHAPTER III. +A King For A Comrade + + +At the time I now write of, we must have been something more than sixty +degrees to the west of the Gallipagos. And having attained a desirable +longitude, we were standing northward for our arctic destination: +around us one wide sea. + +But due west, though distant a thousand miles, stretched north and +south an almost endless Archipelago, here and there inhabited, but +little known; and mostly unfrequented, even by whalemen, who go almost +every where. Beginning at the southerly termination of this great +chain, it comprises the islands loosely known as Ellice’s group; then, +the Kingsmill isles; then, the Radack and Mulgrave clusters. These +islands had been represented to me as mostly of coral formation, low +and fertile, and abounding in a variety of fruits. The language of the +people was said to be very similar to that or the Navigator’s islands, +from which, their ancestors are supposed to have emigrated. + +And thus much being said, all has been related that I then knew of the +islands in question. Enough, however, that they existed at all; and +that our path thereto lay over a pleasant sea, and before a reliable +Trade-wind. The distance, though great, was merely an extension of +water; so much blankness to be sailed over; and in a craft, too, that +properly managed has been known to outlive great ships in a gale. For +this much is true of a whale-boat, the cunningest thing in its way ever +fabricated by man. + +Upon one of the Kingsmill islands, then, I determined to plant my foot, +come what come would. And I was equally determined that one of the +ship’s boats should float me thither. But I had no idea of being +without a companion. It would be a weary watch to keep all by myself, +with naught but the horizon in sight. + +Now, among the crew was a fine old seaman, one Jarl; how old, no one +could tell, not even himself. Forecastle chronology is ever vague and +defective. “Man and boy,” said honest Jarl, “I have lived ever since I +can remember.” And truly, who may call to mind when he was not? To +ourselves, we all seem coeval with creation. Whence it comes, that it +is so hard to die, ere the world itself is departed. + +Jarl hailed from the isle of Skye, one of the constellated Hebrides. +Hence, they often called him the Skyeman. And though he was far from +being piratical of soul, he was yet an old Norseman to behold. His +hands were brawny as the paws of a bear; his voice hoarse as a storm +roaring round the old peak of Mull; and his long yellow hair waved +round his head like a sunset. My life for it, Jarl, thy ancestors were +Vikings, who many a time sailed over the salt German sea and the +Baltic; who wedded their Brynhildas in Jutland; and are now quaffing +mead in the halls of Valhalla, and beating time with their cans to the +hymns of the Scalds. Ah! how the old Sagas run through me! + +Yet Jarl, the descendant of heroes and kings, was a lone, friendless +mariner on the main, only true to his origin in the sea-life that he +led. But so it has been, and forever will be. What yeoman shall swear +that he is not descended from Alfred? what dunce, that he is not sprung +of old Homer? King Noah, God bless him! fathered us all. Then hold up +your heads, oh ye Helots, blood potential flows through your veins. All +of us have monarchs and sages for kinsmen; nay, angels and archangels +for cousins; since in antediluvian days, the sons of God did verily wed +with our mothers, the irresistible daughters of Eve. Thus all +generations are blended: and heaven and earth of one kin: the +hierarchies of seraphs in the uttermost skies; the thrones and +principalities in the zodiac; the shades that roam throughout space; +the nations and families, flocks and folds of the earth; one and all, +brothers in essence—oh, be we then brothers indeed! All things form but +one whole; the universe a Judea, and God Jehovah its head. Then no more +let us start with affright. In a theocracy, what is to fear? Let us +compose ourselves to death as fagged horsemen sleep in the saddle. Let +us welcome even ghosts when they rise. Away with our stares and +grimaces. The New Zealander’s tattooing is not a prodigy; nor the +Chinaman’s ways an enigma. No custom is strange; no creed is absurd; no +foe, but who will in the end prove a friend. In heaven, at last, our +good, old, white-haired father Adam will greet all alike, and sociality +forever prevail. Christian shall join hands between Gentile and Jew; +grim Dante forget his Infernos, and shake sides with fat Rabelais; and +monk Luther, over a flagon of old nectar, talk over old times with Pope +Leo. Then, shall we sit by the sages, who of yore gave laws to the +Medes and Persians in the sun; by the cavalry captains in Perseus, who +cried, “To horse!” when waked by their Last Trump sounding to the +charge; by the old hunters, who eternities ago, hunted the moose in +Orion; by the minstrels, who sang in the Milky Way when Jesus our +Saviour was born. Then shall we list to no shallow gossip of Magellans +and Drakes; but give ear to the voyagers who have circumnavigated the +Ecliptic; who rounded the Polar Star as Cape Horn. Then shall the +Stagirite and Kant be forgotten, and another folio than theirs be +turned over for wisdom; even the folio now spread with horoscopes as +yet undeciphered, the heaven of heavens on high. + +Now, in old Jarl’s lingo there was never an idiom. Your aboriginal tar +is too much of a cosmopolitan for that. Long companionship with seamen +of all tribes: Manilla-men, Anglo-Saxons, Cholos, Lascars, and Danes, +wear away in good time all mother-tongue stammerings. You sink your +clan; down goes your nation; you speak a world’s language, jovially +jabbering in the Lingua-Franca of the forecastle. + +True to his calling, the Skyeman was very illiterate; witless of +Salamanca, Heidelberg, or Brazen-Nose; in Delhi, had never turned over +the books of the Brahmins. For geography, in which sailors should be +adepts, since they are forever turning over and over the great globe of +globes, poor Jarl was deplorably lacking. According to his view of the +matter, this terraqueous world had been formed in the manner of a tart; +the land being a mere marginal crust, within which rolled the watery +world proper. Such seemed my good Viking’s theory of cosmography. As +for other worlds, he weened not of them; yet full as much as +Chrysostom. + +Ah, Jarl! an honest, earnest Wight; so true and simple, that the secret +operations of thy soul were more inscrutable than the subtle workings +of Spinoza’s. + +Thus much be said of the Skyeman; for he was exceedingly taciturn, and +but seldom will speak for himself. + +Now, higher sympathies apart, for Jarl I had a wonderful liking; for he +loved me; from the first had cleaved to me. + +It is sometimes the case, that an old mariner like him will conceive a +very strong attachment for some young sailor, his shipmate; an +attachment so devoted, as to be wholly inexplicable, unless originating +in that heart-loneliness which overtakes most seamen as they grow aged; +impelling them to fasten upon some chance object of regard. But however +it was, my Viking, thy unbidden affection was the noblest homage ever +paid me. And frankly, I am more inclined to think well of myself, as in +some way deserving thy devotion, than from the rounded compliments of +more cultivated minds. + +Now, at sea, and in the fellowship of sailors, all men appear as they +are. No school like a ship for studying human nature. The contact of +one man with another is too near and constant to favor deceit. You wear +your character as loosely as your flowing trowsers. Vain all endeavors +to assume qualities not yours; or to conceal those you possess. +Incognitos, however desirable, are out of the question. And thus aboard +of all ships in which I have sailed, I have invariably been known by a +sort of thawing-room title. Not,—let me hurry to say,—that I put hand +in tar bucket with a squeamish air, or ascended the rigging with a +Chesterfieldian mince. No, no, I was never better than my vocation; and +mine have been many. I showed as brown a chest, and as hard a hand, as +the tarriest tar of them all. And never did shipmate of mine upbraid me +with a genteel disinclination to duty, though it carried me to truck of +main-mast, or jib-boom-end, in the most wolfish blast that ever howled. + +Whence then, this annoying appellation? for annoying it most assuredly +was. It was because of something in me that could not be hidden; +stealing out in an occasional polysyllable; an otherwise +incomprehensible deliberation in dining; remote, unguarded allusions to +Belles-Lettres affairs; and other trifles superfluous to mention. + +But suffice it to say, that it had gone abroad among the Arcturion’s +crew, that at some indefinite period of my career, I had been a “nob.” +But Jarl seemed to go further. He must have taken me for one of the +House of Hanover in disguise; or, haply, for bonneted Charles Edward +the Pretender, who, like the Wandering Jew, may yet be a vagrant. At +any rate, his loyalty was extreme. Unsolicited, he was my laundress and +tailor; a most expert one, too; and when at meal-times my turn came +round to look out at the mast-head, or stand at the wheel, he catered +for me among the “kids” in the forecastle with unwearied assiduity. +Many’s the good lump of “duff” for which I was indebted to my good +Viking’s good care of me. And like Sesostris I was served by a monarch. +Yet in some degree the obligation was mutual. For be it known that, in +sea-parlance, we were _chummies._ + +Now this _chummying_ among sailors is like the brotherhood subsisting +between a brace of collegians (chums) rooming together. It is a +Fidus-Achates-ship, a league of offense and defense, a copartnership of +chests and toilets, a bond of love and good feeling, and a mutual +championship of the absent one. True, my nautical reminiscenses remind +me of sundry lazy, ne’er-do-well, unprofitable, and abominable +chummies; chummies, who at meal times were last at the “kids,” when +their unfortunate partners were high upon the spars; chummies, who +affected awkwardness at the needle, and conscientious scruples about +dabbling in the suds; so that chummy the simple was made to do all the +work of the firm, while chummy the cunning played the sleeping partner +in his hammock. Out upon such chummies! + +But I appeal to thee, honest Jarl, if I was ever chummy the cunning. +Never mind if thou didst fabricate my tarpaulins; and with Samaritan +charity bind up the rents, and pour needle and thread into the +frightful gashes that agonized my hapless nether integuments, which +thou calledst “ducks;”—Didst thou not expressly declare, that all these +things, and more, thou wouldst do for me, despite my own quaint +thimble, fashioned from the ivory tusk of a whale? Nay; could I even +wrest from thy willful hands my very shirt, when once thou hadst it +steaming in an unsavory pickle in thy capacious vat, a decapitated +cask? Full well thou knowest, Jarl, that these things are true; and I +am bound to say it, to disclaim any lurking desire to reap advantage +from thy great good nature. + +Now my Viking for me, thought I, when I cast about for a comrade; and +my Viking alone. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. +A Chat In The Clouds + + +The Skyeman seemed so earnest and upright a seaman, that to tell the +plain truth, in spite of his love for me, I had many misgivings as to +his readiness to unite in an undertaking which apparently savored of a +moral dereliction. But all things considered, I deemed my own +resolution quite venial; and as for inducing another to join me, it +seemed a precaution so indispensable, as to outweigh all other +considerations. + +Therefore I resolved freely to open my heart to him; for that special +purpose paying him a visit, when, like some old albatross in the air, +he happened to be perched at the foremast-head, all by himself, on the +lookout for whales never seen. + +Now this standing upon a bit of stick 100 feet aloft for hours at a +time, swiftly sailing over the sea, is very much like crossing the +Channel in a balloon. Manfred-like, you talk to the clouds: you have a +fellow feeling for the sun. And when Jarl and I got conversing up +there, smoking our dwarfish “dudeens,” any sea-gull passing by might +have taken us for Messrs. Blanchard and Jeffries, socially puffing +their after-dinner Bagdads, bound to Calais, via Heaven, from Dover. +Honest Jarl, I acquainted with all: my conversation with the captain, +the hint implied in his last words, my firm resolve to quit the ship in +one of her boats, and the facility with which I thought the thing could +be done. Then I threw out many inducements, in the shape of pleasant +anticipations of bearing right down before the wind upon the sunny +isles under our lee. + +He listened attentively; but so long remained silent that I almost +fancied there was something in Jarl which would prove too much for me +and my eloquence. + +At last he very bluntly declared that the scheme was a crazy one; he +had never known of such a thing but thrice before; and in every case +the runaways had never afterwards been heard of. He entreated me to +renounce my determination, not be a boy, pause and reflect, stick to +the ship, and go home in her like a man. Verily, my Viking talked to me +like my uncle. + +But to all this I turned a deaf ear; affirming that my mind was made +up; and that as he refused to accompany me, and I fancied no one else +for a comrade, I would go stark alone rather than not at all. Upon +this, seeing my resolution immovable, he bluntly swore that he would +follow me through thick and thin. + +Thanks, Jarl! thou wert one of those devoted fellows who will wrestle +hard to convince one loved of error; but failing, forthwith change +their wrestling to a sympathetic hug. + +But now his elderly prudence came into play. Casting his eye over the +boundless expanse below, he inquired how far off were the islands in +question. + +“A thousand miles and no less.” + +“With a fair trade breeze, then, and a boat sail, that is a good twelve +days’ passage, but calms and currents may make it a month, perhaps +more.” So saying, he shook his old head, and his yellow hair streamed. + +But trying my best to chase away these misgivings, he at last gave them +over. He assured me I might count upon him to his uttermost keel. + +My Viking secured, I felt more at ease; and thoughtfully considered how +the enterprise might best be accomplished. + +There was no time to be lost. Every hour was carrying us farther and +farther from the parallel most desirable for us to follow in our route +to the westward. So, with all possible dispatch, I matured my plans, +and communicated them to Jarl, who gave several old hints—having +ulterior probabilities in view—which were not neglected. + +Strange to relate, it was not till my Viking, with a rueful face, +reminded me of the fact, that I bethought me of a circumstance somewhat +alarming at the first blush. We must push off without chart or +quadrant; though, as will shortly be seen, a compass was by no means +out of the question. The chart, to be sure, I did not so much lay to +heart; but a quadrant was more than desirable. Still, it was by no +means indispensable. For this reason. When we started, our latitude +would be exactly known; and whether, on our voyage westward, we drifted +north or south therefrom, we could not, by any possibility, get so far +out of our reckoning, as to fail in striking some one of a long chain +of islands, which, for many degrees, on both sides of the equator, +stretched right across our track. + +For much the same reason, it mattered little, whether on our passage we +daily knew our longitude; for no known land lay between us and the +place we desired to reach. So what could be plainer than this: that if +westward we patiently held on our way, we must eventually achieve our +destination? + +As for intervening shoals or reefs, if any there were, they intimidated +us not. In a boat that drew but a few inches of water, but an +indifferent look-out would preclude all danger on that score. At all +events, the thing seemed feasible enough, notwithstanding old Jarl’s +superstitious reverence for nautical instruments, and the philosophical +objections which might have been urged by a pedantic disciple of +Mercator. + +Very often, as the old maxim goes, the simplest things are the most +startling, and that, too, from their very simplicity. So cherish no +alarms, if thus we addressed the setting sun—“Be thou, old pilot, our +guide!” + + + + +CHAPTER V. +Seats Secured And Portmanteaus Packed + + +But thoughts of sextants and quadrants were the least of our cares. + +Right from under the very arches of the eyebrows of thirty men—captain, +mates, and crew—a boat was to be abstracted; they knowing nothing of +the event, until all knowledge would prove unavailing. + +Hark ye: + +At sea, the boats of a South Sea-man (generally four in number, spare +ones omitted,) are suspended by tackles, hooked above, to curved +timbers called “davits,” vertically fixed to the ship’s sides. + +Now, no fair one with golden locks is more assiduously waited upon, or +more delicately handled by her tire-women, than the slender whale- boat +by her crew. And out of its element, it seems fragile enough to justify +the utmost solicitude. For truly, like a fine lady, the fine whale-boat +is most delicate when idle, though little coy at a pinch. + +Besides the “davits,” the following supports are provided Two small +cranes are swung under the keel, on which the latter rests, preventing +the settling of the boat’s middle, while hanging suspended by the bow +and stern. A broad, braided, hempen band, usually worked in a tasteful +pattern, is also passed round both gunwales; and secured to the ship’s +bulwarks, firmly lashes the craft to its place. Being elevated above +the ship’s rail, the boats are in plain sight from all parts of the +deck. + +Now, one of these boats was to be made way with. No facile matter, +truly. Harder than for any dashing young Janizary to run off with a +sultana from the Grand Turk’s seraglio. Still, the thing could be done, +for, by Jove, it had been. + +What say you to slyly loosing every thing by day; and when night comes, +cast off the band and swing in the cranes? But how lower the tackles, +even in the darkest night, without a creaking more fearful than the +death rattle? Easily avoided. Anoint the ropes, and they will travel +deftly through the subtle windings of the blocks. + +But though I had heard of this plan being pursued, there was a degree +of risk in it, after all, which I was far from fancying. Another plan +was hit upon; still bolder; and hence more safe. What it was, in the +right place will be seen. + +In selecting my craft for this good voyage, I would fain have traversed +the deck, and eyed the boats like a cornet choosing his steed from out +a goodly stud. But this was denied me. And the “bow boat” was, +perforce, singled out, as the most remote from the quarter-deck, that +region of sharp eyes and relentless purposes. + +Then, our larder was to be thought of; also, an abundant supply of +water; concerning which last I determined to take good heed. There were +but two to be taken care of; but I resolved to lay in sufficient store +of both meat and drink for four; at the same time that the supplemental +twain thus provided for were but imaginary. And if it came to the last +dead pinch, of which we had no fear, however, I was food for no man but +Jarl. + +Little time was lost in catering for our mess. Biscuit and salt beef +were our sole resource; and, thanks to the generosity of the +Arcturion’s owners, our ship’s company had a plentiful supply. Casks of +both, with heads knocked out, were at the service of all. In bags which +we made for the purpose, a sufficiency of the biscuit was readily +stored away, and secreted in a corner of easy access. The salt beef was +more difficult to obtain; but, little by little, we managed to smuggle +out of the cask enough to answer our purpose. + +As for water, most luckily a day or two previous several “breakers” of +it had been hoisted from below for the present use of the ship’s +company. + +These “breakers” are casks, long and slender, but very strong. Of +various diameters, they are made on purpose to stow into spaces +intervening between the immense butts in a ship’s hold. + +The largest we could find was selected, first carefully examining it to +detect any leak. On some pretense or other, we then rolled them all +over to that side of the vessel where our boat was suspended, the +selected breaker being placed in their middle. + +Our compendious wardrobes were snugly packed into bundles and laid +aside for the present. And at last, by due caution, we had every thing +arranged preliminary to the final start. Let me say, though, perhaps to +the credit of Jarl, that whenever the most strategy was necessary, he +seemed ill at ease, and for the most part left the matter to me. It was +well that he did; for as it was, by his untimely straight-forwardness, +he once or twice came near spoiling every thing. Indeed, on one +occasion he was so unseasonably blunt, that curiously enough, I had +almost suspected him of taking that odd sort of interest in one’s +welfare, which leads a philanthropist, all other methods failing, to +frustrate a project deemed bad; by pretending clumsily to favor it. But +no inuendoes; Jarl was a Viking, frank as his fathers; though not so +much of a bucanier. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. +Eight Bells + + +The moon must be monstrous coy, or some things fall out opportunely, or +else almanacs are consulted by nocturnal adventurers; but so it is, +that when Cynthia shows a round and chubby disk, few daring deeds are +done. Though true it may be, that of moonlight nights, jewelers’ +caskets and maidens’ hearts have been burglariously broken into—and +rifled, for aught Copernicus can tell. + +The gentle planet was in her final quarter, and upon her slender horn I +hung my hopes of withdrawing from the ship undetected. + +Now, making a tranquil passage across the ocean, we kept at this time +what are called among whalemen “boatscrew-watches.” That is, instead of +the sailors being divided at night into two bands, alternately on deck +every four hours, there were four watches, each composed of a boat’s +crew, the “headsman” (always one of the mates) excepted. To the +officers, this plan gives uninterrupted repose—“all-night-in,” as they +call it, and of course greatly lightens the duties of the crew. + +The harpooneers head the boats’ crews, and are responsible for the ship +during the continuance of their watches. + +Now, my Viking being a stalwart seaman, pulled the midship oar of the +boat of which I was bowsman. Hence, we were in the same watch; to +which, also, three others belonged, including Mark, the harpooner. One +of these seamen, however, being an invalid, there were only two left +for us to manage. + +Voyaging in these seas, you may glide along for weeks without starting +tack or sheet, hardly moving the helm a spoke, so mild and constant are +the Trades. At night, the watch seldom trouble themselves with keeping +much of a look-out; especially, as a strange sail is almost a prodigy +in these lonely waters. In some ships, for weeks in and weeks out, you +are puzzled to tell when your nightly turn on deck really comes round; +so little heed is given to the standing of watches, where in the +license of presumed safety, nearly every one nods without fear. + +But remiss as you may be in the boats-crew-watch of a heedless +whaleman, the man who heads it is bound to maintain his post on the +quarter-deck until regularly relieved. Yet drowsiness being incidental +to all natures, even to Napoleon, beside his own sentry napping in the +snowy bivouac; so, often, in snowy moonlight, or ebon eclipse, dozed +Mark, our harpooneer. Lethe be his portion this blessed night, thought +I, as during the morning which preceded our enterprise, I eyed the man +who might possibly cross my plans. + +But let me come closer to this part of my story. During what are called +at sea the “dog-watches” (between four o’clock and eight in the +evening), sailors are quite lively and frolicsome; their spirits even +flow far into the first of the long “night-watches;” but upon its +expiration at “eight bells” (midnight), silence begins to reign; if you +hear a voice it is no cherub’s: all exclamations are oaths. + +At eight bells, the mariners on deck, now relieved from their cares, +crawl out from their sleepy retreats in old monkey jackets, or coils of +rigging, and hie to their hammocks, almost without interrupting their +dreams: while the sluggards below lazily drag themselves up the ladder +to resume their slumbers in the open air. + +For these reasons then, the moonless sea midnight was just the time to +escape. Hence, we suffered a whole day to pass unemployed; waiting for +the night, when the star board-quarter-boats’-watch, to which we +belonged, would be summoned on deck at the eventful eight of the bell. + +But twenty-four hours soon glide away; and “Starboleens ahoy; eight +bells there below;” at last started me from a troubled doze. + +I sprang from my hammock, and would have lighted my pipe. But the +forecastle lamp had gone out. An old sea-dog was talking about sharks +in his sleep. Jarl and our solitary watch-mate were groping their way +into their trowsers. And little was heard but the humming of the still +sails aloft; the dash of the waves against the bow; and the deep +breathing of the dreaming sailors around. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. +A Pause + + +Good old Arcturion! Maternal craft; that rocked me so often in thy +heart of oak, I grieve to tell how I deserted thee on the broad deep. +So far from home, with such a motley crew, so many islanders, whose +heathen babble echoing through thy Christian hull, must have grated +harshly on every carline. + +Old ship! where sails thy lone ghost now? For of the stout Arcturion no +word was ever heard, from the dark hour we pushed from her fated +planks. In what time of tempest, to what seagull’s scream, the drowning +eddies did their work, knows no mortal man. Sunk she silently, +helplessly, into the calm depths of that summer sea, assassinated by +the ruthless blade of the swordfish? Such things have been. Or was hers +a better fate? Stricken down while gallantly battling with the blast; +her storm-sails set; helm manned; and every sailor at his post; as sunk +the Hornet, her men at quarters, in some distant gale. + +But surmises are idle. A very old craft, she may have foundered; or +laid her bones upon some treacherous reef; but as with many a far +rover, her fate is a mystery. + +Pray Heaven, the spirit of that lost vessel roaming abroad through the +troubled mists of midnight gales—as old mariners believe of missing +ships—may never haunt my future path upon the waves. Peacefully may she +rest at the bottom of the sea; and sweetly sleep my shipmates in the +lowest watery zone, where prowling sharks come not, nor billows roll. + +By quitting the Arcturion when we did, Jarl and I unconsciously eluded +a sailor’s grave. We hear of providential deliverances. Was this one? +But life is sweet to all, death comes as hard. And for myself I am +almost tempted to hang my head, that I escaped the fate of my +shipmates; something like him who blushed to have escaped the fell +carnage at Thermopylae. + +Though I can not repress a shudder when I think of that old ship’s end, +it is impossible for me so much as to imagine, that our deserting her +could have been in any way instrumental in her loss. Nevertheless, I +would to heaven the Arcturion still floated; that it was given me once +more to tread her familiar decks. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. +They Push Off, Velis Et Remis + + +And now to tell how, tempted by devil or good angel, and a thousand +miles from land, we embarked upon this western voyage. + +It was midnight, mark you, when our watch began; and my turn at the +helm now coming on was of course to be avoided. On some plausible +pretense, I induced our solitary watchmate to assume it; thus leaving +myself untrammeled, and at the same time satisfactorily disposing of +him. For being a rather fat fellow, an enormous consumer of “duff,” and +with good reason supposed to be the son of a farmer, I made no doubt, +he would pursue his old course and fall to nodding over the wheel. As +for the leader of the watch—our harpooner—he fell heir to the nest of +old jackets, under the lee of the mizzen-mast, left nice and warm by +his predecessor. + +The night was even blacker than we had anticipated; there was no trace +of a moon; and the dark purple haze, sometimes encountered at night +near the Line, half shrouded the stars from view. + +Waiting about twenty minutes after the last man of the previous watch +had gone below, I motioned to Jarl, and we slipped our shoes from our +feet. He then descended into the forecastle, and I sauntered aft toward +the quarter-deck. All was still. Thrice did I pass my hand full before +the face of the slumbering lubber at the helm, and right between him +and the light of the binnacle. + +Mark, the harpooneer, was not so easily sounded. I feared to approach +him. He lay quietly, though; but asleep or awake, no more delay. Risks +must be run, when time presses. And our ears were a pointer’s to catch +a sound. + +To work we went, without hurry, but swiftly and silently. Our various +stores were dragged from their lurking-places, and placed in the boat, +which hung from the ship’s lee side, the side depressed in the water, +an indispensable requisite to an attempt at escape. And though at +sundown the boat was to windward, yet, as we had foreseen, the vessel +having been tacked during the first watch, brought it to leeward. + +Endeavoring to manhandle our clumsy breaker, and lift it into the boat, +we found, that by reason of the intervention of the shrouds, it could +not be done without, risking a jar; besides straining the craft in +lowering. An expedient, however, though at the eleventh hour, was hit +upon. Fastening a long rope to the breaker, which was perfectly tight, +we cautiously dropped it overboard; paying out enough line, to insure +its towing astern of the ship, so as not to strike against the copper. +The other end of the line we then secured to the boat’s stern. + +Fortunately, this was the last thing to be done; for the breaker, +acting as a clog to the vessel’s way in the water, so affected her +steering as to fling her perceptibly into the wind. And by causing the +helm to work, this must soon rouse the lubber there stationed, if not +already awake. But our dropping overboard the breaker greatly aided us +in this respect: it diminished the ship’s headway; which owing to the +light breeze had not been very great at any time during the night. Had +it been so, all hope of escaping without first arresting the vessel’s +progress, would have been little short of madness. As it was, the sole +daring of the deed that night achieved, consisted in our lowering away +while the ship yet clove the brine, though but moderately. + +All was now ready: the cranes swung in, the lashings adrift, and the +boat fairly suspended; when, seizing the ends of the tackle ropes, we +silently stepped into it, one at each end. The dead weight of the +breaker astern now dragged the craft horizontally through the air, so +that her tackle ropes strained hard. She quivered like a dolphin. +Nevertheless, had we not feared her loud splash upon striking the wave, +we might have quitted the ship almost as silently as the breath the +body. But this was out of the question, and our plans were laid +accordingly. + +“All ready, Jarl?” + +“Ready.” + +“A man overboard!” I shouted at the top of my compass; and like +lightning the cords slid through our blistering hands, and with a +tremendous shock the boat bounded on the sea’s back. One mad sheer and +plunge, one terrible strain on the tackles as we sunk in the trough of +the waves, tugged upon by the towing breaker, and our knives severed +the tackle ropes—we hazarded not unhooking the blocks—our oars were +out, and the good boat headed round, with prow to leeward. + +“Man overboard!” was now shouted from stem to stern. And directly we +heard the confused tramping and shouting of the sailors, as they rushed +from their dreams into the almost inscrutable darkness. + +“Man overboard! Man overboard!” My heart smote me as the human cry of +horror came out of the black vaulted night. + +“Down helm!” was soon heard from the chief mate. “Back the main-yard! +Quick to the boats! How’s this? One down already? Well done! Hold on, +then, those other boats!” + +Meanwhile several seamen were shouting as they strained at the braces. + +“Cut! cut all! Lower away! lower away!” impatiently cried the sailors, +who already had leaped into the boats. + +“Heave the ship to, and hold fast every thing,” cried the captain, +apparently just springing to the deck. “One boat’s enough. Steward; +show a light there from the mizzen-top. Boat ahoy!—Have you got that +man?” + +No reply. The voice came out of a cloud; the ship dimly showing like a +ghost. We had desisted from rowing, and hand over hand were now hauling +in upon the rope attached to the breaker, which we soon lifted into the +boat, instantly resuming our oars. + +“Pull! pull, men! and save him!” again shouted the captain. + +“Ay, ay, sir,” answered Jarl instinctively, “pulling as hard as ever we +can, sir.” + +And pull we did, till nothing could be heard from the ship but a +confused tumult; and, ever and anon, the hoarse shout of the captain, +too distant to be understood. + +We now set our sail to a light air; and right into the darkness, and +dead to leeward, we rowed and sailed till morning dawned. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. +The Watery World Is All Before Them + + +At sea in an open boat, and a thousand miles from land! + +Shortly after the break of day, in the gray transparent light, a speck +to windward broke the even line of the horizon. It was the ship wending +her way north-eastward. + +Had I not known the final indifference of sailors to such disasters as +that which the Arcturion’s crew must have imputed to the night past +(did not the skipper suspect the truth) I would have regarded that +little speck with many compunctions of conscience. Nor, as it was, did +I feel in any very serene humor. For the consciousness of being deemed +dead, is next to the presumable unpleasantness of being so in reality. +One feels like his own ghost unlawfully tenanting a defunct carcass. +Even Jarl’s glance seemed so queer, that I begged him to look another +way. + +Secure now from all efforts of the captain to recover those whom he +most probably supposed lost; and equally cut off from all hope of +returning to the ship even had we felt so inclined; the resolution that +had thus far nerved me, began to succumb in a measure to the awful +loneliness of the scene. Ere this, I had regarded the ocean as a slave, +the steed that bore me whither I listed, and whose vicious +propensities, mighty though they were, often proved harmless, when +opposed to the genius of man. But now, how changed! In our frail boat, +I would fain have built an altar to Neptune. + +What a mere toy we were to the billows, that jeeringly shouldered us +from crest to crest, as from hand to hand lost souls may be tossed +along by the chain of shades which enfilade the route to Tartarus. + +But drown or swim, here’s overboard with care! Cheer up, Jarl! Ha! Ha! +how merrily, yet terribly, we sail! Up, up—slowly up—toiling up the +long, calm wave; then balanced on its summit a while, like a plank on a +rail; and down, we plunge headlong into the seething abyss, till +arrested, we glide upward again. And thus did we go. Now buried in +watery hollows—our sail idly flapping; then lifted aloft—canvas +bellying; and beholding the furthest horizon. + +Had not our familiarity with the business of whaling divested our +craft’s wild motions of its first novel horrors, we had been but a +rueful pair. But day-long pulls after whales, the ship left miles +astern; and entire dark nights passed moored to the monsters, killed +too late to be towed to the ship far to leeward:—all this, and much +more, accustoms one to strange things. Death, to be sure, has a mouth +as black as a wolf’s, and to be thrust into his jaws is a serious +thing. But true it most certainly is—and I speak from no hearsay—that +to sailors, as a class, the grisly king seems not half so hideous as he +appears to those who have only regarded him on shore, and at a +deferential distance. Like many ugly mortals, his features grow less +frightful upon acquaintance; and met over often and sociably, the old +adage holds true, about familiarity breeding contempt. Thus too with +soldiers. Of the quaking recruit, three pitched battles make a grim +grenadier; and he who shrank from the muzzle of a cannon, is now ready +to yield his mustache for a sponge. + +And truly, since death is the last enemy of all, valiant souls will +taunt him while they may. Yet rather, should the wise regard him as the +inflexible friend, who, even against our own wills, from life’s evils +triumphantly relieves us. + +And there is but little difference in the manner of dying. To die, is +all. And death has been gallantly encountered by those who never beheld +blood that was red, only its light azure seen through the veins. And to +yield the ghost proudly, and march out of your fortress with all the +honors of war, is not a thing of sinew and bone. Though in prison, +Geoffry Hudson, the dwarf, died more bravely than Goliah, the giant; +and the last end of a butterfly shames us all. Some women have lived +nobler lives, and died nobler deaths, than men. Threatened with the +stake, mitred Cranmer recanted; but through her fortitude, the lorn +widow of Edessa stayed the tide of Valens’ persecutions. ’Tis no great +valor to perish sword in hand, and bravado on lip; cased all in panoply +complete. For even the alligator dies in his mail, and the swordfish +never surrenders. To expire, mild-eyed, in one’s bed, transcends the +death of Epaminondas. + + + + +CHAPTER X. +They Arrange Their Canopies And Lounges, And Try To Make Things +Comfortable + + +Our little craft was soon in good order. From the spare rigging brought +along, we made shrouds to the mast, and converted the boat- hook into a +handy boom for the jib. Going large before the wind, we set this sail +wing-and-wing with the main-sail. The latter, in accordance with the +customary rig of whale-boats, was worked with a sprit and sheet. It +could be furled or set in an instant. The bags of bread we stowed away +in the covered space about the loggerhead, a useless appurtenance now, +and therefore removed. At night, Jarl used it for a pillow; saying, +that when the boat rolled it gave easy play to his head. The precious +breaker we lashed firmly amidships; thereby much improving our sailing. + +Now, previous to leaving the ship, we had seen to it well, that our +craft was supplied with all those equipments, with which, by the +regulations of the fishery, a whale-boat is constantly provided: night +and day, afloat or suspended. Hanging along our gunwales inside, were +six harpoons, three lances, and a blubber-spade; all keen as razors, +and sheathed with leather. Besides these, we had three waifs, a couple +of two-gallon water-kegs, several bailers, the boat-hatchet for cutting +the whale-line, two auxiliary knives for the like purpose, and several +minor articles, also employed in hunting the leviathan. The line and +line-tub, however, were on ship-board. + +And here it may be mentioned, that to prevent the strain upon the boat +when suspended to the ship’s side, the heavy whale-line, over two +hundred fathoms in length, and something more than an inch in diameter, +when not in use is kept on ship-board, coiled away like an endless +snake in its tub. But this tub is always in readiness to be launched +into the boat. Now, having no use for the line belonging to our craft, +we had purposely left it behind. + +But well had we marked that by far the most important item of a +whale-boat’s furniture was snugly secured in its place. This was the +water-tight keg, at both ends firmly headed, containing a small +compass, tinder-box and flint, candles, and a score or two of biscuit. +This keg is an invariable precaution against what so frequently occurs +in pursuing the sperm whale—prolonged absence from the ship, losing +sight of her, or never seeing her more, till years after you reach home +again. In this same keg of ours seemed coopered up life and death, at +least so seemed it to honest Jarl. No sooner had we got clear from the +Arcturion, than dropping his oar for an instant, he clutched at it in +the dark. + +And when day at last came, we knocked out the head of the keg with the +little hammer and chisel, always attached to it for that purpose, and +removed the compass, that glistened to us like a human eye. Then +filling up the vacancy with biscuit, we again made all tight, driving +down the hoops till they would budge no more. + +At first we were puzzled to fix our compass. But at last the Skyeman +out knife, and cutting a round hole in the after-most thwart, or seat +of the boat, there inserted the little brass case containing the +needle. + +Over the stern of the boat, with some old canvas which my Viking’s +forethought had provided, we spread a rude sort of awning, or rather +counterpane. This, however, proved but little or no protection from the +glare of the sun; for the management of the main-sail forbade any +considerable elevation of the shelter. And when the breeze was fresh, +we were fain to strike it altogether; for the wind being from aft, and +getting underneath the canvas, almost lifted the light boat’s stem into +the air, vexing the counterpane as if it were a petticoat turning a +gusty corner. But when a mere breath rippled the sea, and the sun was +fiery hot, it was most pleasant to lounge in this shady asylum. It was +like being transferred from the roast to cool in the cupboard. And +Jarl, much the toughest fowl of the two, out of an abundant kindness +for his comrade, during the day voluntarily remained exposed at the +helm, almost two hours to my one. No lady-like scruples had he, the old +Viking, about marring his complexion, which already was more than +bronzed. Over the ordinary tanning of the sailor, he seemed masked by a +visor of japanning, dotted all over with freckles, so intensely yellow, +and symmetrically circular, that they seemed scorched there by a +burning glass. + +In the tragico-comico moods which at times overtook me, I used to look +upon the brown Skyeman with humorous complacency. If we fall in with +cannibals, thought I, then, ready-roasted Norseman that thou art, shall +I survive to mourn thee; at least, during the period I revolve upon the +spit. + +But of such a fate, it needs hardly be said, we had no apprehension. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. +Jarl Afflicted With The Lockjaw + + +If ever again I launch whale-boat from sheer-plank of ship at sea, I +shall take good heed, that my comrade be a sprightly fellow, with a +rattle-box head. Be he never so silly, his very silliness, so long as +he be lively at it, shall be its own excuse. + +Upon occasion, who likes not a lively loon, one of your giggling, +gamesome oafs, whose mouth is a grin? Are not such, well-ordered +dispensations of Providence? filling up vacuums, in intervals of social +stagnation relieving the tedium of existing? besides keeping up, here +and there, in very many quarters indeed, sundry people’s good opinion +of themselves? What, if at times their speech is insipid as water after +wine? What, if to ungenial and irascible souls, their very “mug” is an +exasperation to behold, their clack an inducement to suicide? Let us +not be hard upon them for this; but let them live on for the good they +may do. + +But Jarl, dear, dumb Jarl, thou wert none of these. Thou didst carry a +phiz like an excommunicated deacon’s. And no matter what happened, it +was ever the same. Quietly, in thyself, thou didst revolve upon thine +own sober axis, like a wheel in a machine which forever goes round, +whether you look at it or no. Ay, Jarl! wast thou not forever intent +upon minding that which so many neglect—thine own especial business? +Wast thou not forever at it, too, with no likelihood of ever winding up +thy moody affairs, and striking a balance sheet? + +But at times how wearisome to me these everlasting reveries in my one +solitary companion. I longed for something enlivening; a burst of +words; human vivacity of one kind or other. After in vain essaying to +get something of this sort out of Jarl, I tried it all by myself; +playing upon my body as upon an instrument; singing, halloing, and +making empty gestures, till my Viking stared hard; and I myself paused +to consider whether I had run crazy or no. + +But how account for the Skyeman’s gravity? Surely, it was based upon no +philosophic taciturnity; he was nothing of an idealist; an aerial +architect; a constructor of flying buttresses. It was inconceivable, +that his reveries were Manfred-like and exalted, reminiscent of +unutterable deeds, too mysterious even to be indicated by the remotest +of hints. Suppositions all out of the question. + +His ruminations were a riddle. I asked him anxiously, whether, in any +part of the world, Savannah, Surat, or Archangel, he had ever a wife to +think of; or children, that he carried so lengthy a phiz. Nowhere +neither. Therefore, as by his own confession he had nothing to think of +but himself, and there was little but honesty in him (having which, by +the way, he may be thought full to the brim), what could I fall back +upon but my original theory: namely, that in repose, his intellects +stepped out, and left his body to itself. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. +More About Being In An Open Boat + + +On the third morning, at break of day, I sat at the steering oar, an +hour or two previous having relieved Jarl, now fast asleep. Somehow, +and suddenly, a sense of peril so intense, came over me, that it could +hardly have been aggravated by the completest solitude. + +On a ship’s deck, the mere feeling of elevation above the water, and +the reach of prospect you command, impart a degree of confidence which +disposes you to exult in your fancied security. But in an open boat, +brought down to the very plane of the sea, this feeling almost wholly +deserts you. Unless the waves, in their gambols, toss you and your chip +upon one of their lordly crests, your sphere of vision is little larger +than it would be at the bottom of a well. At best, your most extended +view in any one direction, at least, is in a high, slow-rolling sea; +when you descend into the dark, misty spaces, between long and uniform +swells. Then, for the moment, it is like looking up and down in a +twilight glade, interminable; where two dawns, one on each hand, seem +struggling through the semi-transparent tops of the fluid mountains. + +But, lingering not long in those silent vales, from watery cliff to +cliff, a sea-chamois, sprang our solitary craft,—a goat among the Alps! + +How undulated the horizon; like a vast serpent with ten thousand folds +coiled all round the globe; yet so nigh, apparently, that it seemed as +if one’s hand might touch it. + +What loneliness; when the sun rose, and spurred up the heavens, we +hailed him as a wayfarer in Sahara the sight of a distant horseman. +Save ourselves, the sun and the Chamois seemed all that was left of +life in the universe. We yearned toward its jocund disk, as in strange +lands the traveler joyfully greets a face from home, which there had +passed unheeded. And was not the sun a fellow-voyager? were we not both +wending westward? But how soon he daily overtook and passed us; +hurrying to his journey’s end. + +When a week had gone by, sailing steadily on, by day and by night, and +nothing in sight but this self-same sea, what wonder if disquieting +thoughts at last entered our hearts? If unknowingly we should pass the +spot where, according to our reckoning, our islands lay, upon what +shoreless sea would we launch? At times, these forebodings bewildered +my idea of the positions of the groups beyond. All became vague and +confused; so that westward of the Kingsmil isles and the Radack chain, +I fancied there could be naught but an endless sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. +Of The Chondropterygii, And Other Uncouth Hordes Infesting The South +Seas + + +At intervals in our lonely voyage, there were sights which diversified +the scene; especially when the constellation Pisces was in the +ascendant. + +It’s famous botanizing, they say, in Arkansas’ boundless prairies; I +commend the student of Ichthyology to an open boat, and the ocean moors +of the Pacific. As your craft glides along, what strange monsters float +by. Elsewhere, was never seen their like. And nowhere are they found in +the books of the naturalists. + +Though America be discovered, the Cathays of the deep are unknown. And +whoso crosses the Pacific might have read lessons to Buffon. The +sea-serpent is not a fable; and in the sea, that snake is but a garden +worm. There are more wonders than the wonders rejected, and more sights +unrevealed than you or I ever ever dreamt of. Moles and bats alone +should be skeptics; and the only true infidelity is for a live man to +vote himself dead. Be Sir Thomas Brown our ensample; who, while +exploding “Vulgar Errors,” heartily hugged all the mysteries in the +Pentateuch. + +But look! fathoms down in the sea; where ever saw you a phantom like +that? An enormous crescent with antlers like a reindeer, and a Delta of +mouths. Slowly it sinks, and is seen no more. + +Doctor Faust saw the devil; but you have seen the “Devil Fish.” + +Look again! Here comes another. Jarl calls it a Bone Shark. Full as +large as a whale, it is spotted like a leopard; and tusk-like teeth +overlap its jaws like those of the walrus. To seamen, nothing strikes +more terror than the near vicinity of a creature like this. Great ships +steer out of its path. And well they may; since the good craft Essex, +and others, have been sunk by sea-monsters, as the alligator thrusts +his horny snout through a Carribean canoe. + +Ever present to us, was the apprehension of some sudden disaster from +the extraordinary zoological specimens we almost hourly passed. + +For the sharks, we saw them, not by units, nor by tens, nor by +hundreds; but by thousands and by myriads. Trust me, there are more +sharks in the sea than mortals on land. + +And of these prolific fish there are full as many species as of dogs. +But by the German naturalists Muller and Henle, who, in christening the +sharks, have bestowed upon them the most heathenish names, they are +classed under one family; which family, according to Muller, +king-at-arms, is an undoubted branch of the ancient and famous tribe of +the Chondropterygii. + +To begin. There is the ordinary Brown Shark, or sea attorney, so called +by sailors; a grasping, rapacious varlet, that in spite of the hard +knocks received from it, often snapped viciously at our steering oar. +At times, these gentry swim in herds; especially about the remains of a +slaughtered whale. They are the vultures of the deep. + +Then we often encountered the dandy Blue Shark, a long, taper and +mighty genteel looking fellow, with a slender waist, like a Bond- +street beau, and the whitest tiers of teeth imaginable. This dainty +spark invariably lounged by with a careless fin and an indolent tail. +But he looked infernally heartless. + +How his cold-blooded, gentlemanly air, contrasted with the rude, savage +swagger of the Tiger Shark; a round, portly gourmand; with distended +mouth and collapsed conscience, swimming about seeking whom he might +devour. These gluttons are the scavengers of navies, following ships in +the South Seas, picking up odds and ends of garbage, and sometimes a +tit-bit, a stray sailor. No wonder, then, that sailors denounce them. +In substance, Jarl once assured me, that under any temporary +misfortune, it was one of his sweetest consolations to remember, that +in his day, he had murdered, not killed, shoals of Tiger Sharks. + +Yet this is all wrong. As well hate a seraph, as a shark. Both were +made by the same hand. And that sharks are lovable, witness their +domestic endearments. No Fury so ferocious, as not to have some amiable +side. In the wild wilderness, a leopard-mother caresses her cub, as +Hagar did Ishmael; or a queen of France the dauphin. We know not what +we do when we hate. And I have the word of my gentlemanly friend +Stanhope, for it; that he who declared he loved a good hater was but a +respectable sort of Hottentot, at best. No very genteel epithet this, +though coming from the genteelest of men. But when the digger of +dictionaries said that saying of his, he was assuredly not much of a +Christian. However, it is hard for one given up to constitutional hypos +like him; to be filled with the milk and meekness of the gospels. Yet, +with deference, I deny that my old uncle Johnson really believed in the +sentiment ascribed to him. Love a hater, indeed! Who smacks his lips +over gall? Now hate is a thankless thing. So, let us only hate hatred; +and once give love play, we will fall in love with a unicorn. Ah! the +easiest way is the best; and to hate, a man must work hard. Love is a +delight; but hate a torment. And haters are thumbscrews, Scotch boots, +and Spanish inquisitions to themselves. In five words—would they were a +Siamese diphthong—he who hates is a fool. + +For several days our Chamois was followed by two of these aforesaid +Tiger Sharks. A brace of confidential inseparables, jogging along in +our wake, side by side, like a couple of highwaymen, biding their time +till you come to the cross-roads. But giving it up at last, for a +bootless errand, they dropped farther and farther astern, until +completely out of sight. Much to the Skyeman’s chagrin; who long stood +in the stern, lance poised for a dart. + +But of all sharks, save me from the ghastly White Shark. For though we +should hate naught, yet some dislikes are spontaneous; and disliking is +not hating. And never yet could I bring myself to be loving, or even +sociable, with a White Shark. He is not the sort of creature to enlist +young affections. + +This ghost of a fish is not often encountered, and shows plainer by +night than by day. Timon-like, he always swims by himself; gliding +along just under the surface, revealing a long, vague shape, of a milky +hue; with glimpses now and then of his bottomless white pit of teeth. +No need of a dentist hath he. Seen at night, stealing along like a +spirit in the water, with horrific serenity of aspect, the White Shark +sent many a thrill to us twain in the Chamois. + +By day, and in the profoundest calms, oft were we startled by the +ponderous sigh of the grampus, as lazily rising to the surface, he +fetched a long breath after napping below. + +And time and again we watched the darting albicore, the fish with the +chain-plate armor and golden scales; the Nimrod of the seas, to whom so +many flying fish fall a prey. Flying from their pursuers, many of them +flew into our boat. But invariably they died from the shock. No nursing +could restore them. One of their wings I removed, spreading it out to +dry under a weight. In two days’ time the thin membrane, all over +tracings like those of a leaf, was transparent as isinglass, and tinted +with brilliant hues, like those of a changing silk. + +Almost every day, we spied Black Fish; coal-black and glossy. They +seemed to swim by revolving round and round in the water, like a wheel; +their dorsal fins, every now and then shooting into view, like spokes. + +Of a somewhat similar species, but smaller, and clipper-built about the +nose, were the Algerines; so called, probably, from their corsair +propensities; waylaying peaceful fish on the high seas, and plundering +them of body and soul at a gulp. Atrocious Turks! a crusade should be +preached against them. + +Besides all these, we encountered Killers and Thrashers, by far the +most spirited and “spunky” of the finny tribes. Though little larger +than a porpoise, a band of them think nothing of assailing leviathan +himself. They bait the monster, as dogs a bull. The Killers seizing the +Right whale by his immense, sulky lower lip, and the Thrashers +fastening on to his back, and beating him with their sinewy tails. +Often they come off conquerors, worrying the enemy to death. Though, +sooth to say, if leviathan gets but one sweep al them with his terrible +tail, they go flying into the air, as if tossed from Taurus’ horn. + +This sight we beheld. Had old Wouvermans, who once painted a bull bait, +been along with us, a rare chance, that, for his pencil. And Gudin or +Isabey might have thrown the blue rolling sea into the picture. Lastly, +one of Claude’s setting summer suns would have glorified the whole. Oh, +believe me, God’s creatures fighting, fin for fin, a thousand miles +from land, and with the round horizon for an arena; is no ignoble +subject for a masterpiece. + +Such are a few of the sights of the great South Sea. But there is no +telling all. The Pacific is populous as China. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. +Jarl’s Misgivings + + +About this time an event took place. My good Viking opened his mouth, +and spoke. The prodigy occurred, as, jacknife in hand, he was bending +over the midship oar; on the loom, or handle, of which he kept our +almanac; making a notch for every set sun. For some forty-eight hours +past, the wind had been light and variable. It was more than suspected +that a current was sweeping us northward. + +Now, marking these things, Jarl threw out the thought, that the more +wind, and the less current, the better; and if a long calm came on, of +which there was some prospect, we had better take to our oars. + +Take to our oars! as if we were crossing a ferry, and no ocean leagues +to traverse. The idea indirectly suggested all possible horrors. To be +rid of them forthwith, I proceeded to dole out our morning meal. For to +make away with such things, there is nothing better than bolting +something down on top of them; albeit, oft repeated, the plan is very +apt to beget dyspepsia; and the dyspepsia the blues. + +But what of our store of provisions? So far as enough to eat was +concerned, we felt not the slightest apprehension; our supplies proving +more abundant than we had anticipated. But, curious to tell, we felt +but little inclination for food. It was water, bright water, cool, +sparkling water, alone, that we craved. And of this, also, our store at +first seemed ample. But as our voyage lengthened, and breezes blew +faint, and calms fell fast, the idea of being deprived of the precious +fluid grew into something little short of a mono- mania; especially +with Jarl. + +Every hour or two with the hammer and chisel belonging to the tinder +box keg, he tinkered away at the invaluable breaker; driving down the +hoops, till in his over solicitude, I thought he would burst them +outright. + +Now the breaker lay on its bilge, in the middle of the boat, where more +or less sea-water always collected. And ever and anon, dipping his +finger therein, my Viking was troubled with the thought, that this +sea-water tasted less brackish than that alongside. Of course the +breaker must be leaking. So, he would turn it over, till its wet side +came uppermost; when it would quickly become dry as a bone. But now, +with his knife, he would gently probe the joints of the staves; shake +his head; look up; look down; taste of the water in the bottom of the +boat; then that of the sea; then lift one end of the breaker; going +through with every test of leakage he could dream of. Nor was he ever +fully satisfied, that the breaker was in all respects sound. But in +reality it was tight as the drum-heads that beat at Cerro- Gordo. Oh! +Jarl, Jarl: to me in the boat’s quiet stern, steering and +philosophizing at one time and the same, thou and thy breaker were a +study. + +Besides the breaker, we had, full of water, the two boat-kegs, +previously alluded to. These were first used. We drank from them by +their leaden spouts; so many swallows three times in the day; having no +other means of measuring an allowance. But when we came to the breaker, +which had only a bung-hole, though a very large one, dog- like, it was +so many laps apiece; jealously counted by the observer. This plan, +however, was only good for a single day; the water then getting beyond +the reach of the tongue. We therefore daily poured from the breaker +into one of the kegs; and drank from its spout. But to obviate the +absorption inseparable from decanting, we at last hit upon something +better,—my comrade’s shoe, which, deprived of its quarters, narrowed at +the heel, and diligently rinsed out in the sea, was converted into a +handy but rather limber ladle. This we kept suspended in the bung-hole +of the breaker, that it might never twice absorb the water. + +Now pewter imparts flavor to ale; a Meerschaum bowl, the same to the +tobacco of Smyrna; and goggle green glasses are deemed indispensable to +the bibbing of Hock. What then shall be said of a leathern goblet for +water? Try it, ye mariners who list. + +One morning, taking his wonted draught, Jarl fished up in his ladle a +deceased insect; something like a Daddy-long-legs, only more corpulent. +Its fate? A sea-toss? Believe it not; with all those precious drops +clinging to its lengthy legs. It was held over the ladle till the last +globule dribbled; and even then, being moist, honest Jarl was but loth +to drop it overboard. + +For our larder, we could not endure the salt beef; it was raw as a live +Abyssinian steak, and salt as Cracow. Besides, the Feegee simile would +not have held good with respect to it. It was far from being “tender as +a dead man.” The biscuit only could we eat; not to be wondered at; for +even on shipboard, seamen in the tropics are but sparing feeders. + +And here let not, a suggestion be omitted, most valuable to any future +castaway or sailaway as the case may be. Eat not your biscuit dry; but +dip it in the sea: which makes it more bulky and palatable. During meal +times it was soak and sip with Jarl and me: one on each side of the +Chamois dipping our biscuit in the brine. This plan obviated +finger-glasses at the conclusion of our repast. Upon the whole, +dwelling upon the water is not so bad after all. The Chinese are no +fools. In the operation of making your toilet, how handy to float in +your ewer! + + + + +CHAPTER XV. +A Stitch In Time Saves Nine + + +Like most silent earnest sort of people, my good Viking was a pattern +of industry. When in the boats after whales, I have known him carry +along a roll of sinnate to stitch into a hat. And the boats lying +motionless for half an hour or so, waiting the rising of the chase, his +fingers would be plying at their task, like an old lady knitting. Like +an experienced old-wife too, his digits had become so expert and +conscientious, that his eyes left them alone; deeming optic supervision +unnecessary. And on this trip of ours, when not otherwise engaged, he +was quite as busy with his fingers as ever: unraveling old Cape Horn +hose, for yarn wherewith to darn our woolen frocks; with great patches +from the skirts of a condemned reefing jacket, panneling the seats of +our “ducks;” in short, veneering our broken garments with all manner of +choice old broadcloths. + +With the true forethought of an old tar, he had brought along with him +nearly the whole contents of his chest. His precious “Ditty Bag,” +containing his sewing utensils, had been carefully packed away in the +bottom of one of his bundles; of which he had as many as an old maid on +her travels. In truth, an old salt is very much of an old maid, though, +strictly speaking, far from deserving that misdeemed appellative. +Better be an old maid, a woman with herself for a husband, than the +wife of a fool; and Solomon more than hints that all men are fools; and +every wise man knows himself to be one. When playing the sempstress, +Jarl’s favorite perch was the triangular little platform in the bow; +which being the driest and most elevated part of the boat, was best +adapted to his purpose. Here for hours and hours together the honest +old tailor would sit darning and sewing away, heedless of the wide +ocean around; while forever, his slouched Guayaquil hat kept bobbing up +and down against the horizon before us. + +It was a most solemn avocation with him. Silently he nodded like the +still statue in the opera of Don Juan. Indeed he never spoke, unless to +give pithy utterance to the wisdom of keeping one’s wardrobe in repair. +But herein my Viking at times waxed oracular. And many’s the hour we +glided along, myself deeply pondering in the stem, hand upon helm; +while crosslegged at the other end of the boat Jarl laid down patch +upon patch, and at long intervals precept upon precept; here several +saws, and there innumerable stitches. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. +They Are Becalmed + + +On the eighth day there was a calm. + +It came on by night: so that waking at daybreak, and folding my arms +over the gunwale, I looked out upon a scene very hard to describe. The +sun was still beneath the horizon; perhaps not yet out of sight from +the plains of Paraguay. But the dawn was too strong for the stars; +which, one by one, had gone out, like waning lamps after a ball. + +Now, as the face of a mirror is a blank, only borrowing character from +what it reflects; so in a calm in the Tropics, a colorless sky +overhead, the ocean, upon its surface, hardly presents a sign of +existence. The deep blue is gone; and the glassy element lies tranced; +almost viewless as the air. + +But that morning, the two gray firmaments of sky and water seemed +collapsed into a vague ellipsis. And alike, the Chamois seemed drifting +in the atmosphere as in the sea. Every thing was fused into the calm: +sky, air, water, and all. Not a fish was to be seen. The silence was +that of a vacuum. No vitality lurked in the air. And this inert +blending and brooding of all things seemed gray chaos in conception. + +This calm lasted four days and four nights; during which, but a few +cat’s-paws of wind varied the scene. They were faint as the breath of +one dying. + +At times the heat was intense. The heavens, at midday, glowing like an +ignited coal mine. Our skin curled up like lint; our vision became dim; +the brain dizzy. + +To our consternation, the water in the breaker became lukewarm, +brackish, and slightly putrescent; notwithstanding we kept our spare +clothing piled upon the breaker, to shield it from the sun. At last, +Jarl enlarged the vent, carefully keeping it exposed. To this +precaution, doubtless, we owed more than we then thought. It was now +deemed wise to reduce our allowance of water to the smallest modicum +consistent with the present preservation of life; strangling all desire +for more. + +Nor was this all. The upper planking of the boat began to warp; here +and there, cracking and splintering. But though we kept it moistened +with brine, one of the plank-ends started from its place; and the +sharp, sudden sound, breaking the scorching silence, caused us both to +spring to our feet. Instantly the sea burst in; but we made shift to +secure the rebellious plank with a cord, not having a nail; we then +bailed out the boat, nearly half full of water. + +On the second day of the calm, we unshipped the mast, to prevent its +being pitched out by the occasional rolling of the vast smooth swells +now overtaking us. Leagues and leagues away, after its fierce raging, +some tempest must have been sending to us its last dying waves. For as +a pebble dropped into a pond ruffles it to its marge; so, on all sides, +a sea-gale operates as if an asteroid had fallen into the brine; making +ringed mountain billows, interminably expanding, instead of ripples. + +The great September waves breaking at the base of the Neversink +Highlands, far in advance of the swiftest pilot-boat, carry tidings. +And full often, they know the last secret of many a stout ship, never +heard of from the day she left port. Every wave in my eyes seems a +soul. + +As there was no steering to be done, Jarl and I sheltered ourselves as +well as we could under the awning. And for the first two days, one at a +time, and every three or four hours, we dropped overboard for a bath, +clinging to the gun-wale; a sharp look-out being kept for prowling +sharks. A foot or two below the surface, the water felt cool and +refreshing. + +On the third day a change came over us. We relinquished bathing, the +exertion taxing us too much. Sullenly we laid ourselves down; turned +our backs to each other; and were impatient of the slightest casual +touch of our persons. What sort of expression my own countenance wore, +I know not; but I hated to look at Jarl’s. When I did it was a glare, +not a glance. I became more taciturn than he. I can not tell what it +was that came over me, but I wished I was alone. I felt that so long as +the calm lasted, we were without help; that neither could assist the +other; and above all, that for one, the water would hold out longer +than for two. I felt no remorse, not the slightest, for these thoughts. +It was instinct. Like a desperado giving up the ghost, I desired to +gasp by myself. + +From being cast away with a brother, good God deliver me! + +The four days passed. And on the morning of the fifth, thanks be to +Heaven, there came a breeze. Dancingly, mincingly it came, just +rippling the sea, until it struck our sails, previously set at the very +first token of its advance. At length it slightly freshened; and our +poor Chamois seemed raised from the dead. + +Beyond expression delightful! Once more we heard the low humming of the +sea under our bow, as our boat, like a bird, went singing on its way. + +How changed the scene! Overhead, a sweet blue haze, distilling sunlight +in drops. And flung abroad over the visible creation was the +sun-spangled, azure, rustling robe of the ocean, ermined with wave +crests; all else, infinitely blue. Such a cadence of musical sounds! +Waves chasing each other, and sporting and frothing in frolicsome foam: +painted fish rippling past; and anon the noise of wings as sea- fowls +flew by. + +Oh, Ocean, when thou choosest to smile, more beautiful thou art than +flowery mead or plain! + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. +In High Spirits, They Push On For The Terra Incognita + + +There were now fourteen notches on the loom of the Skyeman’s oar:—So +many days since we had pushed from the fore-chains of the Arcturion. +But as yet, no floating bough, no tern, noddy, nor reef-bird, to denote +our proximity to land. In that long calm, whither might not the +currents have swept us? + +Where we were precisely, we knew not; but according to our reckoning, +the loose estimation of the knots run every hour, we must have sailed +due west but little more than one hundred and fifty leagues; for the +most part having encountered but light winds, and frequent intermitting +calms, besides that prolonged one described. But spite of past calms +and currents, land there must be to the westward. Sun, compass, stout +hearts, and steady breezes, pointed our prow thereto. So courage! my +Viking, and never say drown! + +At this time, our hearts were much lightened by discovering that our +water was improving in taste. It seemed to have been undergoing anew +that sort of fermentation, or working, occasionally incident to ship +water shortly after being taken on board. Sometimes, for a period, it +is more or less offensive to taste and smell; again, however, becoming +comparatively limpid. + +But as our water improved, we grew more and more miserly of so +priceless a treasure. + +And here it may be well to make mention of another little circumstance, +however unsentimental. Thorough-paced tar that he was, my Viking was an +inordinate consumer of the Indian weed. From the Arcturion, he had +brought along with him a small half-keg, at bottom impacted with a +solitary layer of sable Negrohead, fossil- marked, like the primary +stratum of the geologists. It was the last tier of his abundant supply +for the long whaling voyage upon which he had embarked upwards of three +years previous. Now during the calm, and for some days after, poor +Jarl’s accustomed quid was no longer agreeable company. To pun: he +eschewed his chew. I asked him wherefore. He replied that it puckered +up his mouth, above all provoked thirst, and had somehow grown every +way distasteful. I was sorry; for the absence of his before ever +present wad impaired what little fullness there was left in his cheek; +though, sooth to say, I no longer called upon him as of yore to shift +over the enormous morsel to starboard or larboard, and so trim our +craft. + +The calm gone by, once again my sea-tailor plied needle and thread; or +turning laundress, hung our raiment to dry on oars peaked obliquely in +the thole-pins. All of which tattered pennons, the wind being astern, +helped us gayly on our way; as jolly poor devils, with rags flying in +the breeze, sail blithely through life; and are merry although they are +poor! + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. +My Lord Shark And His Pages + + +There is a fish in the sea that evermore, like a surly lord, only goes +abroad attended by his suite. It is the Shovel-nosed Shark. A clumsy +lethargic monster, unshapely as his name, and the last species of his +kind, one would think, to be so bravely waited upon, as he is. His +suite is composed of those dainty little creatures called Pilot fish by +sailors. But by night his retinue is frequently increased by the +presence of several small luminous fish, running in advance, and +flourishing their flambeaux like link-boys lighting the monster’s way. +Pity there were no ray-fish in rear, page-like, to carry his caudal +train. + +Now the relation subsisting between the Pilot fish above mentioned and +their huge ungainly lord, seems one of the most inscrutable things in +nature. At any rate, it poses poor me to comprehend. That a monster so +ferocious, should suffer five or six little sparks, hardly fourteen +inches long, to gambol about his grim hull with the utmost impunity, is +of itself something strange. But when it is considered, that by a +reciprocal understanding, the Pilot fish seem to act as scouts to the +shark, warning him of danger, and apprising him of the vicinity of +prey; and moreover, in case of his being killed, evincing their anguish +by certain agitations, otherwise inexplicable; the whole thing becomes +a mystery unfathomable. Truly marvels abound. It needs no dead man to +be raised, to convince us of some things. Even my Viking marveled full +as much at those Pilot fish as he would have marveled at the Pentecost. + +But perhaps a little incident, occurring about this period, will best +illustrate the matter in hand. + +We were gliding along, hardly three knots an hour, when my comrade, who +had been dozing over the gunwale, suddenly started to his feet, and +pointed out an immense Shovel-nosed Shark, less than a boat’s length +distant, and about half a fathom beneath the surface. A lance was at +once snatched from its place; and true to his calling, Jarl was about +to dart it at the fish, when, interested by the sight of its radiant +little scouts, I begged him to desist. + +One of them was right under the shark, nibbling at his ventral fin; +another above, hovering about his dorsal appurtenance; one on each +flank; and a frisking fifth pranking about his nose, seemingly having +something to say of a confidential nature. They were of a bright, +steel-blue color, alternated with jet black stripes; with glistening +bellies of a silver-white. Clinging to the back of the shark, were four +or five Remoras, or sucking-fish; snaky parasites, impossible to remove +from whatever they adhere to, without destroying their lives. The +Remora has little power in swimming; hence its sole locomotion is on +the backs of larger fish. Leech-like, it sticketh closer than a false +brother in prosperity; closer than a beggar to the benevolent; closer +than Webster to the Constitution. But it feeds upon what it clings to; +its feelers having a direct communication with the esophagus. + +The shark swam sluggishly; creating no sign of a ripple, but ever and, +anon shaking his Medusa locks, writhing and curling with horrible life. +Now and then, the nimble Pilot fish darted from his side—this way and +that—mostly toward our boat; but previous to taking a fresh start ever +returning to their liege lord to report progress. + +A thought struck me. Baiting a rope’s end with a morsel of our almost +useless salt beef, I suffered it to trail in the sea. Instantly the +foremost scout swam toward it; hesitated; paused; but at last +advancing, briskly snuffed at the line, and taking one finical little +nibble, retreated toward the shark. Another moment, and the great +Tamerlane himself turned heavily about; pointing his black, cannon-like +nose directly toward our broadside. Meanwhile, the little Pilot fish +darted hither and thither; keeping up a mighty fidgeting, like men of +small minds in a state of nervous agitation. + +Presently, Tamerlane swam nearer and nearer, all the while lazily +eyeing the Chamois, as a wild boar a kid. Suddenly making a rush for +it, in the foam he made away with the bait. But the next instant, the +uplifted lance sped at his skull; and thrashing his requiem with his +sinewy tail, he sunk slowly, through his own blood, out of sight. Down +with him swam the terrified Pilot fish; but soon after, three of them +were observed close to the boat, gliding along at a uniform pace; one +an each side, and one in advance; even as they had attended their lord. +Doubtless, one was under our keel. + +“A good omen,” said Jarl; “no harm will befall us so long as they +stay.” + +But however that might be, follow us they did, for many days after: +until an event occurred, which necessitated their withdrawal. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. +Who Goes There? + + +Jarl’s oar showed sixteen notches on the loom, when one evening, as the +expanded sun touched the horizon’s rim, a ship’s uppermost spars were +observed, traced like a spider’s web against its crimson disk. It +looked like a far-off craft on fire. + +In bright weather at sea, a sail, invisible in the full flood of noon, +becomes perceptible toward sunset. It is the reverse in the morning. In +sight at gray dawn, the distant vessel, though in reality approaching, +recedes from view, as the sun rises higher and higher. This holds true, +till its vicinity makes it readily fall within the ordinary scope of +vision. And thus, too, here and there, with other distant things: the +more light you throw on them, the more you obscure. Some revelations +show best in a twilight. + +The sight of the stranger not a little surprised us. But brightening +up, as if the encounter were welcome, Jarl looked happy and expectant. +He quickly changed his demeanor, however, upon perceiving that I was +bent upon shunning a meeting. + +Instantly our sails were struck; and calling upon Jarl, who was +somewhat backward to obey, I shipped the oars; and, both rowing, we +stood away obliquely from our former course. + +I divined that the vessel was a whaler; and hence, that by help of the +glass, with which her look-outs must be momentarily sweeping the +horizon, they might possibly have descried us; especially, as we were +due east from the ship; a direction, which at sunset is the one most +favorable for perceiving a far-off object at sea. Furthermore, our +canvas was snow-white and conspicuous. To be sure, we could not be +certain what kind of a vessel it was; but whatever it might be, I, for +one, had no mind to risk an encounter; for it was quite plain, that if +the stranger came within hailing distance, there would be no resource +but to link our fortunes with hers; whereas I desired to pursue none +but the Chamois’. As for the Skyeman, he kept looking wistfully over +his shoulder; doubtless, praying Heaven, that we might not escape what +I sought to avoid. + +Now, upon a closer scrutiny, being pretty well convinced that the +stranger, after all, was steering a nearly westerly course—right away +from us—we reset our sail; and as night fell, my Viking’s entreaties, +seconded by my own curiosity, induced me to resume our original course; +and so follow after the vessel, with a view of obtaining a nearer +glimpse, without danger of detection. So, boldly we steered for the +sail. + +But not gaining much upon her, spite of the lightness of the breeze (a +circumstance in our favor: the chase being a ship, and we but a boat), +at my comrade’s instigation, we added oars to sails, readily guiding +our way by the former, though the helm was left to itself. + +As we came nearer, it was plain that the vessel was no whaler; but a +small, two-masted craft; in short, a brigantine. Her sails were in a +state of unaccountable disarray, only the foresail, mainsail, and jib +being set. The first was much tattered; and the jib was hoisted but +half way up the stay, where it idly flapped, the breeze coming from +over the taffrail. She continually yawed in her course; now almost +presenting her broadside, then showing her stern. + +Striking our sails once more, we lay on our oars, and watched her in +the starlight. Still she swung from side to side, and still sailed on. + +Not a little terrified at the sight, superstitious Jarl more than +insinuated that the craft must be a gold-huntress, haunted. But I told +him, that if such were the case, we must board her, come gold or +goblins. In reality, however, I began to think that she must have been +abandoned by her crew; or else, that from sickness, those on board were +incapable of managing her. + +After a long and anxious reconnoiter, we came still nearer, using our +oars, but very reluctantly on Jarl’s part; who, while rowing, kept his +eyes over his shoulder, as if about to beach the little Chamois on the +back of a whale as of yore. Indeed, he seemed full as impatient to quit +the vicinity of the vessel, as before he had been anxiously courting +it. + +Now, as the silent brigantine again swung round her broadside, I hailed +her loudly. No return. Again. But all was silent. With a few vigorous +strokes, we closed with her, giving yet another unanswered hail; when, +laying the Chamois right alongside, I clutched at the main-chains. +Instantly we felt her dragging us along. Securing our craft by its +painter, I sprang over the rail, followed by Jarl, who had snatched his +harpoon, his favorite arms. Long used with that weapon to overcome the +monsters of the deep, he doubted not it would prove equally serviceable +in any other encounter. + +The deck was a complete litter. Tossed about were pearl oyster shells, +husks of cocoa-nuts, empty casks, and cases. The deserted tiller was +lashed; which accounted for the vessel’s yawing. But we could not +conceive, how going large before the wind; the craft could, for any +considerable time, at least, have guided herself without the help of a +hand. Still, the breeze was light and steady. + +Now, seeing the helm thus lashed, I could not but distrust the silence +that prevailed. It conjured up the idea of miscreants concealed below, +and meditating treachery; unscrupulous mutineers—Lascars, or +Manilla-men; who, having murdered the Europeans of the crew, might not +be willing to let strangers depart unmolested. Or yet worse, the entire +ship’s company might have been swept away by a fever, its infection +still lurking in the poisoned hull. And though the first conceit, as +the last, was a mere surmise, it was nevertheless deemed prudent to +secure the hatches, which for the present we accordingly barred down +with the oars of our boat. This done, we went about the deck in search +of water. And finding some in a clumsy cask, drank long and freely, and +to our thirsty souls’ content. + +The wind now freshening, and the rent sails like to blow from the +yards, we brought the brigantine to the wind, and brailed up the +canvas. This left us at liberty to examine the craft, though, +unfortunately, the night was growing hazy. + +All this while our boat was still towing alongside; and I was about to +drop it astern, when Jarl, ever cautious, declared it safer where it +was; since, if there were people on board, they would most likely be +down in the cabin, from the dead-lights of which, mischief might be +done to the Chamois. + +It was then, that my comrade observed, that the brigantine had no +boats, a circumstance most unusual in any sort of a vessel at sea. But +marking this, I was exceedingly gratified. It seemed to indicate, as I +had opined, that from some cause or other, she must have been abandoned +of her crew. And in a good measure this dispelled my fears of foul +play, and the apprehension of contagion. Encouraged by these +reflections, I now resolved to descend, and explore the cabin, though +sorely against Jarl’s counsel. To be sure, as he earnestly said, this +step might have been deferred till daylight; but it seemed too +wearisome to wait. So bethinking me of our tinder-box and candles, I +sent him into the boat for them. Presently, two candles were lit; one +of which the Skyeman tied up and down the barbed end of his harpoon; so +that upon going below, the keen steel might not be far off, should the +light be blown out by a dastard. + +Unfastening the cabin scuttle, we stepped downward into the smallest +and murkiest den in the world. The altar-like transom, surmounted by +the closed dead-lights in the stem, together with the dim little sky- +light overhead, and the somber aspect of every thing around, gave the +place the air of some subterranean oratory, say a Prayer Room of Peter +the Hermit. But coils of rigging, bolts of canvas, articles of +clothing, and disorderly heaps of rubbish, harmonized not with this +impression. Two doors, one on each side, led into wee little state- +rooms, the berths of which also were littered. Among other things, was +a large box, sheathed with iron and stoutly clamped, containing a keg +partly filled with powder, the half of an old cutlass, a pouch of +bullets, and a case for a sextant—a brass plate on the lid, with the +maker’s name. London. The broken blade of the cutlass was very rusty +and stained; and the iron hilt bent in. It looked so tragical that I +thrust it out of sight. + +Removing a small trap-door, opening into the space beneath, called the +“run,” we lighted upon sundry cutlasses and muskets, lying together at +sixes and sevens, as if pitched down in a hurry. + +Casting round a hasty glance, and satisfying ourselves, that through +the bulkhead of the cabin, there was no passage to the forward part of +the hold, we caught up the muskets and cutlasses, the powder keg and +the pouch of bullets, and bundling them on deck, prepared to visit the +other end of the vessel. Previous to so doing, however, I loaded a +musket, and belted a cutlass to my side. But my Viking preferred his +harpoon. + +In the forecastle reigned similar confusion. But there was a snug +little lair, cleared away in one corner, and furnished with a grass mat +and bolster, like those used among the Islanders of these seas. This +little lair looked to us as if some leopard had crouched there. And as +it turned out, we were not far from right. Forming one side of this +retreat, was a sailor’s chest, stoutly secured by a lock, and monstrous +heavy withal. Regardless of Jarl’s entreaties, I managed to burst the +lid; thereby revealing a motley assemblage of millinery, and outlandish +knick-knacks of all sorts; together with sundry rude Calico +contrivances, which though of unaccountable cut, nevertheless possessed +a certain petticoatish air, and latitude of skirt, betokening them the +habiliments of some feminine creature; most probably of the human +species. + +In this strong box, also, was a canvas bag, jingling with rusty old +bell-buttons, gangrened copper bolts, and sheathing nails; damp, +greenish Carolus dollars (true coin all), besides divers iron screws, +and battered, chisels, and belaying-pins. Sounded on the chest lid, the +dollars rang clear as convent bells. These were put aside by Jarl the +sight of substantial dollars doing away, for the nonce, with his +superstitious Misgivings. True to his kingship, he loved true coin; +though abroad on the sea, and no land but dollarless dominions ground, +all this silver was worthless as charcoal or diamonds. Nearly one and +the same thing, say the chemists; but tell that to the marines, say the +illiterate Jews and the jewelers. Go, buy a house, or a ship, if you +can, with your charcoal! Yea, all the woods in Canada charred down to +cinders would not be worth the one famed Brazilian diamond, though no +bigger than the egg of a carrier pigeon. Ah! but these chemists are +liars, and Sir Humphrey Davy a cheat. Many’s the poor devil they’ve +deluded into the charcoal business, who otherwise might have made his +fortune with a mattock. + +Groping again into the chest, we brought to light a queer little hair +trunk, very bald and rickety. At every corner was a mighty clamp, the +weight of which had no doubt debilitated the box. It was jealously +secured with a padlock, almost as big as itself; so that it was almost +a question, which was meant to be security to the other. Prying at it +hard, we at length effected an entrance; but saw no golden moidores, no +ruddy doubloons; nothing under heaven but three pewter mugs, such as +are used in a ship’s cabin, several brass screws, and brass plates, +which must have belonged to a quadrant; together with a famous lot of +glass beads, and brass rings; while, pasted on the inside of the cover, +was a little colored print, representing the harlots, the shameless +hussies, having a fine time with the Prodigal Son. + +It should have been mentioned ere now, that while we were busy in the +forecastle, we were several times startled by strange sounds aloft. And +just after, crashing into the little hair trunk, down came a great +top-block, right through the scuttle, narrowly missing my Viking’s +crown; a much stronger article, by the way, than your goldsmiths turn +out in these days. This startled us much; particularly Jarl, as one +might suppose; but accustomed to the strange creakings and wheezings of +the masts and yards of old vessels at sea, and having many a time +dodged stray blocks accidentally falling from aloft, I thought little +more of the matter; though my comrade seemed to think the noises +somewhat different from any thing of that kind he had even heard +before. + +After a little more turning over of the rubbish in the forecastle, and +much marveling thereat, we ascended to the deck; where we found every +thing so silent, that, as we moved toward the taffrail, the Skyeman +unconsciously addressed me in a whisper. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. +Noises And Portents + + +I longed for day. For however now inclined to believe that the +brigantine was untenanted, I desired the light of the sun to place that +fact beyond a misgiving. + +Now, having observed, previous to boarding the vessel, that she lay +rather low in the water, I thought proper to sound the well. But there +being no line-and-sinker at hand, I sent Jarl to hunt them up in the +arm-chest on the quarter-deck, where doubtless they must be kept. +Meanwhile I searched for the “breaks,” or pump-handles, which, as it +turned out, could not have been very recently used; for they were found +lashed up and down to the main-mast. + +Suddenly Jarl came running toward me, whispering that all doubt was +dispelled;—there were spirits on board, to a dead certainty. He had +overheard a supernatural sneeze. But by this time I was all but +convinced, that we were alone in the brigantine. Since, if otherwise, I +could assign no earthly reason for the crew’s hiding away from a couple +of sailors, whom, were they so minded, they might easily have mastered. +And furthermore, this alleged disturbance of the atmosphere aloft by a +sneeze, Jarl averred to have taken place in the main-top; directly +underneath which I was all this time standing, and had heard nothing. +So complimenting my good Viking upon the exceeding delicacy of his +auriculars, I bade him trouble himself no more with his piratical +ghosts and goblins, which existed nowhere but in his own imagination. + +Not finding the line-and-sinker, with the spare end of a bowline we +rigged a substitute; and sounding the well, found nothing to excite our +alarm. Under certain circumstances, however, this sounding a ship’s +well is a nervous sort of business enough. ’Tis like feeling your own +pulse in the last stage of a fever. + +At the Skyeman’s suggestion, we now proceeded to throw round the +brigantine’s head on the other tack. For until daylight we desired to +alter the vessel’s position as little as possible, fearful of coming +unawares upon reefs. + +And here be it said, that for all his superstitious misgivings about +the brigantine; his imputing to her something equivalent to a purely +phantom-like nature, honest Jarl was nevertheless exceedingly downright +and practical in all hints and proceedings concerning her. Wherein, he +resembled my Right Reverend friend, Bishop Berkeley—truly, one of your +lords spiritual—who, metaphysically speaking, holding all objects to be +mere optical delusions, was, notwith- standing, extremely +matter-of-fact in all matters touching matter itself. Besides being +pervious to the points of pins, and possessing a palate capable of +appreciating plum-puddings:—which sentence reads off like a pattering +of hailstones. + +Now, while we were employed bracing round the yards, whispering Jarl +must needs pester me again with his confounded suspicions of goblins on +board. He swore by the main-mast, that when the fore-yard swung round, +he had heard a half-stifled groan from that quarter; as if one of his +bugbears had been getting its aerial legs jammed. I laughed:—hinting +that goblins were incorporeal. Whereupon he besought me to ascend the +fore-rigging and test the matter for myself But here my mature judgment +got the better of my first crude opinion. I civilly declined. For +assuredly, there was still a possibility, that the fore-top might be +tenanted, and that too by living miscreants; and a pretty hap would be +mine, if, with hands full of rigging, and legs dangling in air, while +surmounting the oblique futtock- shrouds, some unseen arm should all at +once tumble me overboard. Therefore I held my peace; while Jarl went on +to declare, that with regard to the character of the brigantine, his +mind was now pretty fully made up;—she was an arrant impostor, a shade +of a ship, full of sailors’ ghosts, and before we knew where we were, +would dissolve in a supernatural squall, and leave us twain in the +water. In short, Jarl, the descendant of the superstitious old +Norsemen, was full of old Norse conceits, and all manner of Valhalla +marvels concerning the land of goblins and goblets. No wonder then, +that with this catastrophe in prospect, he again entreated me to quit +the ill-starred craft, carrying off nothing from her ghostly hull. But +I refused. + +One can not relate every thing at once. While in the cabin, we came +across a “barge” of biscuit, and finding its contents of a quality much +superior to our own, we had filled our pockets and occasionally regaled +ourselves in the intervals of rummaging. Now this sea cake- basket we +had brought on deck. And for the first time since bidding adieu to the +Arcturion having fully quenched our thirst, our appetite returned with +a rush; and having nothing better to do till day dawned, we planted the +bread-barge in the middle of the quarter-deck; and crossing our legs +before it, laid close seige thereto, like the Grand Turk and his Vizier +Mustapha sitting down before Vienna. + +Our castle, the Bread-Barge was of the common sort; an oblong oaken +box, much battered and bruised, and like the Elgin Marbles, all over +inscriptions and carving:—foul anchors, skewered hearts, almanacs, +Burton-blocks, love verses, links of cable, Kings of Clubs; and divers +mystic diagrams in chalk, drawn by old Finnish mariners; in casting +horoscopes and prophecies. Your old tars are all Daniels. There was a +round hole in one side, through which, in getting at the bread, invited +guests thrust their hands. + +And mighty was the thrusting of hands that night; also, many and +earnest the glances of Mustapha at every sudden creaking of the spars +or rigging. Like Belshazzar, my royal Viking ate with great fear and +trembling; ever and anon pausing to watch the wild shadows flitting +along the bulwarks. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. +Man Ho! + + +Slowly, fitfully, broke the morning in the East, showing the desolate +brig forging heavily through the water, which sluggishly thumped under +her bows. While leaping from sea to sea, our faithful Chamois, like a +faithful dog, still gamboled alongside, confined to the main- chains by +its painter. At times, it would long lag behind; then, pushed by a wave +like lightning dash forward; till bridled by its leash, it again fell +in rear. + +As the gray light came on, anxiously we scrutinized the features of the +craft, as one by one they became more plainly revealed. Every thing +seemed stranger now, than when partially visible in the dingy night. +The stanchions, or posts of the bulwarks, were of rough stakes, still +incased in the bark. The unpainted sides were of a dark-colored, +heathenish looking wood. The tiller was a wry-necked, elbowed bough, +thrusting itself through the deck, as if the tree itself was fast +rooted in the hold. The binnacle, containing the compass, was defended +at the sides by yellow matting. The rigging—shrouds, halyards and +all—was of “Kaiar,” or cocoa-nut fibres; and here and there the sails +were patched with plaited rushes. + +But this was not all. Whoso will pry, must needs light upon matters for +suspicion. Glancing over the side, in the wake of every scupper- hole, +we beheld a faded, crimson stain, which Jarl averred to be blood. +Though now he betrayed not the slightest trepidation; for what he saw +pertained not to ghosts; and all his fears hitherto had been of the +super-natural. + +Indeed, plucking up a heart, with the dawn of the day my Viking looked +bold as a lion; and soon, with the instinct of an old seaman cast his +eyes up aloft. + +Directly, he touched my arm,—“Look: what stirs in the main-top?” + +Sure enough, something alive was there. + +Fingering our arms, we watched it; till as the day came on, a crouching +stranger was beheld. + +Presenting my piece, I hailed him to descend or be shot. There was +silence for a space, when the black barrel of a musket was thrust +forth, leveled at my head. Instantly, Jarl’s harpoon was presented at a +dart;—two to one;—and my hail was repeated. But no reply. + +“Who are you?” + +“Samoa,” at length said a clear, firm voice. + +“Come down from the rigging. We are friends.” + +Another pause; when, rising to his feet, the stranger slowly descended, +holding on by one hand to the rigging, for but one did he have; his +musket partly slung from his back, and partly griped under the stump of +his mutilated arm. + +He alighted about six paces from where we stood; and balancing his +weapon, eyed us bravely as the Cid. + +He was a tall, dark Islander, a very devil to behold, theatrically +arrayed in kilt and turban; the kilt of a gay calico print, the turban +of a red China silk. His neck was jingling with strings of beads. + +“Who else is on board?” I asked; while Jarl, thus far covering the +stranger with his weapon, now dropped it to the deck. + +“Look there:—Annatoo!” was his reply in broken English, pointing aloft +to the fore-top. And lo! a woman, also an Islander; and barring her +skirts, dressed very much like Samoa, was beheld descending. + +“Any more?” + +“No more.” + +“Who are _you_ then; and what craft is this?” + +“Ah, ah—you are no ghost;—but are you my friend?” he cried, advancing +nearer as he spoke; while the woman having gained the deck, also +approached, eagerly glancing. + +We said we were friends; that we meant no harm; but desired to know +what craft this was; and what disaster had befallen her; for that +something untoward had occurred, we were certain. + +Whereto, Samoa made answer, that it was true that something dreadful +had happened; and that he would gladly tell us all, and tell us the +truth. And about it he went. + +Now, this story of his was related in the mixed phraseology of a +Polynesian sailor. With a few random reflections, in substance, it will +be found in the six following chapters. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. +What Befel The Brigantine At The Pearl Shell Islands + + +The vessel was the Parki, of Lahina, a village and harbor on the coast +of Mowee, one of the Hawaian isles, where she had been miserably +cobbled together with planks of native wood, and fragments of a wreck, +there drifted ashore. + +Her appellative had been bestowed in honor of a high chief, the tallest +and goodliest looking gentleman in all the Sandwich Islands. With a +mixed European and native crew, about thirty in number (but only four +whites in all, captain included), the Parki, some four months previous, +had sailed from her port on a voyage southward, in quest of pearls, and +pearl oyster shells, sea-slugs, and other matters of that sort. + +Samoa, a native of the Navigator Islands, had long followed the sea, +and was well versed in the business of oyster diving and its submarine +mysteries. The native Lahineese on board were immediately subordinate +to him; the captain having bargained with Samoa for their services as +divers. + +The woman, Annatoo, was a native of a far-off, anonymous island to the +westward: whence, when quite young, she had been carried by the +commander of a ship, touching there on a passage from Macao to +Valparaiso. At Valparaiso her protector put her ashore; most probably, +as I afterward had reason to think, for a nuisance. + +By chance it came to pass that when Annatoo’s first virgin bloom had +departed, leaving nothing but a lusty frame and a lustier soul, Samoa, +the Navigator, had fallen desperately in love with her. And thinking +the lady to his mind, being brave like himself, and doubtless well +adapted to the vicissitudes of matrimony at sea, he meditated suicide—I +would have said, wedlock—and the twain became one. And some time after, +in capacity of wife, Annatoo the dame, accompanied in the brigantine, +Samoa her lord. Now, as Antony flew to the refuse embraces of Caesar, +so Samoa solaced himself in the arms of this discarded fair one. And +the sequel was the same. For not harder the life Cleopatra led my fine +frank friend, poor Mark, than Queen Annatoo did lead this captive of +her bow and her spear. But all in good time. + +They left their port; and crossing the Tropic and the Line, fell in +with a cluster of islands, where the shells they sought were found in +round numbers. And here—not at all strange to tell besides the natives, +they encountered a couple of Cholos, or half-breed Spaniards, from the +Main; one half Spanish, the other half quartered between the wild +Indian and the devil; a race, that from Baldivia to Panama are +notorious for their unscrupulous villainy. + +Now, the half-breeds having long since deserted a ship at these +islands, had risen to high authority among the natives. This hearing, +the Parki’s captain was much gratified; he, poor ignorant, never before +having fallen in with any of their treacherous race. And, no doubt, he +imagined that their influence over the Islanders would tend to his +advantage. At all events, he made presents to the Cholos; who, in turn, +provided him with additional divers from among the natives. Very +kindly, also, they pointed out the best places for seeking the oysters. +In a word, they were exceedingly friendly; often coming off to the +brigantine, and sociably dining with the captain in the cabin; placing +the salt between them and him. + +All things went on very pleasantly until, one morning, the half- breeds +prevailed upon the captain to go with them, in his whale-boat, to a +shoal on the thither side of the island, some distance from the spot +where lay the brigantine. They so managed it, moreover, that none but +the Lahineese under Samoa, in whom the captain much confided, were left +in custody of the Parki; the three white men going along to row; for +there happened to be little or no wind for a sail. + +Now, the fated brig lay anchored within a deep, smooth, circular +lagoon, margined on all sides but one by the most beautiful groves. On +that side, was the outlet to the sea; perhaps a cable’s length or more +from where the brigantine had been moored. An hour or two after the +party were gone, and when the boat was completely out of sight, the +natives in shoals were perceived coming off from the shore; some in +canoes, and some swimming. The former brought bread fruit and bananas, +ostentatiously piled up in their proas; the latter dragged after them +long strings of cocoanuts; for all of which, on nearing the vessel, +they clamorously demanded knives and hatchets in barter. + +From their actions, suspecting some treachery, Samoa stood in the +gangway, and warned them off; saying that no barter could take place +until the captain’s return. But presently one of the savages stealthily +climbed up from the water, and nimbly springing from the bob-stays to +the bow-sprit, darted a javelin full at the foremast, where it +vibrated. The signal of blood! With terrible outcries, the rest, +pulling forth their weapons, hitherto concealed in the canoes, or under +the floating cocoanuts, leaped into the low chains of the brigantine; +sprang over the bulwarks; and, with clubs and spears, attacked the +aghast crew with the utmost ferocity. + +After one faint rally, the Lahineese scrambled for the rigging; but to +a man were overtaken and slain. + +At the first alarm, Annatoo, however, had escaped to the +fore-top-gallant-yard, higher than which she could not climb, and +whither the savages durst not venture. For though after their nuts +these Polynesians will climb palm trees like squirrels; yet, at the +first blush, they decline a ship’s mast like Kennebec farmers. + +Upon the first token of an onslaught, Samoa, having rushed toward the +cabin scuttle for arms, was there fallen upon by two young savages. But +after a desperate momentary fray, in which his arm was mangled, he made +shift to spring below, instantly securing overhead the slide of the +scuttle. In the cabin, while yet the uproar of butchery prevailed, he +quietly bound up his arm; then laying on the transom the captain’s +three loaded muskets, undauntedly awaited an assault. + +The object of the natives, it seems, was to wreck the brigantine upon +the sharp coral beach of the lagoon. And with this intent, one of their +number had plunged into the water, and cut the cable, which was of +hemp. But the tide ebbing, cast the Parki’s head seaward—toward the +outlet; and the savages, perceiving this, clumsily boarded the +fore-tack, and hauled aft the sheet; thus setting, after a fashion, the +fore-sail, previously loosed to dry. + +Meanwhile, a gray-headed old chief stood calmly at the tiller, +endeavoring to steer the vessel shoreward. But not managing the helm +aright, the brigantine, now gliding apace through the water, only made +more way toward the outlet. Seeing which, the ringleaders, six or eight +in number, ran to help the old graybeard at the helm. But it was a +black hour for them. Of a sudden, while they were handling the tiller, +three muskets were rapidly discharged upon them from the cabin +skylight. Two of the savages dropped dead. The old steersman, clutching +wildly at the helm, fell over it, mortally wounded; and in a wild panic +at seeing their leaders thus unaccountably slain, the rest of the +natives leaped overboard and made for the shore. + +Hearing the slashing, Samoa flew on deck; and beholding the foresail +set, and the brigantine heading right out to sea, he cried out to +Annatoo, still aloft, to descend to the topsail-yard, and loose the +canvas there. His command was obeyed. Annatoo deserved a gold medal for +what she did that day. Hastening down the rigging, after loosing the +topsail, she strained away at the sheets; in which operation she was +assisted by Samoa, who snatched an instant from the helm. + +The foresail and fore-topsail were now tolerably well set; and as the +craft drew seaward, the breeze freshened. And well that it did; for, +recovered from their alarm, the savages were now in hot pursuit; some +in canoes, and some swimming as before. But soon the main-topsail was +given to the breeze, which still freshening, came from over the +quarter. And with this brave show of canvas, the Parki made gallantly +for the outlet; and loud shouted Samoa as she shot by the reef, and +parted the long swells without. Against these, the savages could not +swim. And at that turn of the tide, paddling a canoe therein was almost +equally difficult. But the fugitives were not yet safe. In full chase +now came in sight the whale-boat manned by the Cholos, and four or five +Islanders. Whereat, making no doubt, that all the whites who left the +vessel that morning had been massacred through the treachery of the +half-breeds; and that the capture of the brigantine had been +premeditated; Samoa now saw no other resource than to point his craft +dead away from the land. + +Now on came the devils buckling to their oars. Meantime Annatoo was +still busy aloft, loosing the smaller sails—t’gallants and royals, +which she managed partially to set. + +The strong breeze from astern now filling the ill-set sails, they +bellied, and rocked in the air, like balloons, while, from the novel +strain upon it, every spar quivered and sprung. And thus, like a +frightened gull fleeing from sea-hawks, the little Parki swooped along, +and bravely breasted the brine. + +His shattered arm in a hempen sling, Samoa stood at the helm, the +muskets reloaded, and planted full before him on the binnacle. For a +time, so badly did the brigantine steer, by reason of her ill- adjusted +sails, made still more unmanageable by the strength of the breeze,—that +it was doubtful, after all, notwithstanding her start, whether the +fugitives would not yet fall a prey to their hunters. The craft wildly +yawed, and the boat drew nearer and nearer. Maddened by the sight, and +perhaps thinking more of revenge for the past, than of security for the +future, Samoa, yielding the helm to Annatoo, rested his muskets on the +bulwarks, and taking long, sure aim, discharged them, one by one at the +advancing foe. + +The three reports were answered by loud jeers from the savages, who +brandished their spears, and made gestures of derision; while with +might and main the Cholos tugged at their oars. + +The boat still gaining on the brigantine, the muskets were again +reloaded. And as the next shot sped, there was a pause; when, like +lightning, the headmost Cholo bounded upwards from his seat, and oar in +hand, fell into the sea. A fierce yell; and one of the natives +springing into the water, caught the sinking body by its long hair; and +the dead and the living were dragged into the boat. Taking heart from +this fatal shot, Samoa fired yet again; but not with the like sure +result; merely grazing the remaining half-breed, who, crouching behind +his comrades, besought them to turn the boat round, and make for the +shore. Alarmed at the fate of his brother, and seemingly distrustful of +the impartiality of Samoa’s fire, the pusillanimous villain refused to +expose a limb above the gunwale. + +Fain now would the pursuers have made good their escape; but an +accident forbade. In the careening of the boat, when the stricken Cholo +sprung overboard, two of their oars had slid into the water; and +together with that death-griped by the half-breed, were now floating +off; occasionally lost to view, as they sunk in the trough of the sea. +Two of the Islanders swam to recover them; but frightened by the +whirring of a shot over their heads, as they unavoidably struck out +towards the Parki, they turned quickly about; just in time to see one +of their comrades smite his body with his hand, as he received a bullet +from Samoa. + +Enough: darting past the ill-fated boat, they swam rapidly for land, +followed by the rest; who plunged overboard, leaving in the boat the +surviving Cholo—who it seems could not swim—the wounded savage, and the +dead man. + +“Load away now, and take thy revenge, my fine fellow,” said Samoa to +himself. But not yet. Seeing all at his mercy, and having none, he +quickly laid his fore-topsail to the mast; “hove to” the brigantine; +and opened fire anew upon the boat; every swell of the sea heaving it +nearer and nearer. Vain all efforts to escape. The wounded man paddled +wildly with his hands the dead one rolled from side to side; and the +Cholo, seizing the solitary oar, in his frenzied heedlessness, spun the +boat round and round; while all the while shot followed shot, Samoa +firing as fast as Annatoo could load. At length both Cholo and savage +fell dead upon their comrades, canting the boat over sideways, till +well nigh awash; in which manner she drifted off. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. +Sailing From The Island They Pillage The Cabin + + +There was a small carronade on the forecastle, unshipped from its +carriage, and lashed down to ringbolts on the deck. This Samoa now +loaded; and with an ax knocking off the round knob upon the breech, +rammed it home in the tube. When, running the cannon out at one of the +ports, and studying well his aim, he let fly, sunk the boat, and buried +his dead. + +It was now late in the afternoon; and for the present bent upon +avoiding land, and gaining the shoreless sea, never mind where, Samoa +again forced round his craft before the wind, leaving the island +astern. The decks were still cumbered with the bodies of the Lahineese, +which heel to point and crosswise, had, log-like, been piled up on the +main-hatch. These, one by one, were committed to the sea; after which, +the decks were washed down. + +At sunrise next morning, finding themselves out of sight of land, with +little or no wind, they stopped their headway, and lashed the tiller +alee, the better to enable them to overhaul the brigantine; especially +the recesses of the cabin. For there, were stores of goods adapted for +barter among the Islanders; also several bags of dollars. + +Now, nothing can exceed the cupidity of the Polynesian, when, through +partial commerce with the whites, his eyes are opened to his nakedness, +and he perceives that in some things they are richer than himself. + +The poor skipper’s wardrobe was first explored; his chests of clothes +being capsized, and their contents strown about the cabin floor. + +Then took place the costuming. Samoa and Annatoo trying on coats and +pantaloons, shirts and drawers, and admiring themselves in the little +mirror panneled in the bulk-head. Then, were broken open boxes and +bales; rolls of printed cotton were inspected, and vastly admired; +insomuch, that the trumpery found in the captain’s chests was +disdainfully doffed: and donned were loose folds of calico, more +congénial to their tastes. + +As case after case was opened and overturned, slippery grew the cabin +deck with torrents of glass beads; and heavy the necks of Samoa and +Annatoo with goodly bunches thereof. + +Among other things, came to light brass jewelry,—Rag Fair gewgaws and +baubles a plenty, more admired than all; Annatoo, bedecking herself +like, a tragedy queen: one blaze of brass. Much mourned the married +dame, that thus arrayed, there was none to admire but Samoa her +husband; but he was all the while admiring himself, and not her. + +And here must needs be related, what has hitherto remained unsaid. Very +often this husband and wife were no Darby and Joan. Their married life +was one long campaign, whereof the truces were only by night. They +billed and they cooed on their arms, rising fresh in the morning to +battle, and often Samoa got more than a hen-pecking. To be short, +Annatoo was a Tartar, a regular Calmuc, and Samoa—Heaven help him—her +husband. + +Yet awhile, joined together by a sense of common danger, and long +engrossed in turning over their tinsel acquisitions without present +thought of proprietorship, the pair refrained from all squabbles. But +soon burst the storm. Having given every bale and every case a good +shaking, Annatoo, making an estimate of the whole, very coolly +proceeded to set apart for herself whatever she fancied. To this, Samoa +objected; to which objection Annatoo objected; and then they went at +it. + +The lady vowed that the things were no more Samoa’s than hers; nay, not +so much; and that whatever she wanted, that same would she have. And +furthermore, by way of codicil, she declared that she was slave to +nobody. + +Now, Samoa, sad to tell, stood in no little awe of his bellicose +spouse. What, though a hero in other respects; what, though he had +slain his savages, and gallantly carried his craft from their +clutches:—Like the valiant captains Marlborough and Belisarius, he was +a poltroon to his wife. And Annatoo was worse than either Sarah or +Antonina. + +However, like every thing partaking of the nature of a scratch, most +conjugal squabbles are quickly healed; for if they healed not, they +would never anew break out: which is the beauty of the thing. So at +length they made up but the treaty stipulations of Annatoo told much +against the interests of Samoa. Nevertheless, ostensibly, it was agreed +upon, that they should strictly go halves; the lady, however, laying +special claim to certain valuables, more particularly fancied. But as a +set-off to this, she generously renounced all claims upon the spare +rigging; all claims upon the fore-mast and mainmast; and all claims +upon the captain’s arms and ammunition. Of the latter, by the way, Dame +Antonina stood in no need. Her voice was a park of artillery; her +talons a charge of bayonets. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. +Dedicated To The College Of Physicians And Surgeons + + +By this time Samoa’s wounded arm was in such a state, that amputation +became necessary. Among savages, severe personal injuries are, for the +most part, accounted but trifles. When a European would be taking to +his couch in despair, the savage would disdain to recline. + +More yet. In Polynesia, every man is his own barber and surgeon, +cutting off his beard or arm, as occasion demands. No unusual thing, +for the warriors of Varvoo to saw off their own limbs, desperately +wounded in battle. But owing to the clumsiness of the instrument +employed—a flinty, serrated shell—the operation has been known to last +several days. Nor will they suffer any friend to help them; +maintaining, that a matter so nearly concerning a warrior is far better +attended to by himself. Hence it may be said, that they amputate +themselves at their leisure, and hang up their tools when tired. But, +though thus beholden to no one for aught connected with the practice of +surgery, they never cut off their own heads, that ever I heard; a +species of amputation to which, metaphorically speaking, many would-be +independent sort of people in civilized lands are addicted. + +Samoa’s operation was very summary. A fire was kindled in the little +caboose, or cook-house, and so made as to produce much smoke. He then +placed his arm upon one of the windlass bitts (a short upright timber, +breast-high), and seizing the blunt cook’s ax would have struck the +blow; but for some reason distrusting the precision of his aim, Annatoo +was assigned to the task. Three strokes, and the limb, from just above +the elbow, was no longer Samoa’s; and he saw his own bones; which many +a centenarian can not say. The very clumsiness of the operation was +safety to the subject. The weight and bluntness of the instrument both +deadened the pain and lessened the hemorrhage. The wound was then +scorched, and held over the smoke of the fire, till all signs of blood +vanished. From that day forward it healed, and troubled Samoa but +little. + +But shall the sequel be told? How that, superstitiously averse to +burying in the sea the dead limb of a body yet living; since in that +case Samoa held, that he must very soon drown and follow it; and how, +that equally dreading to keep the thing near him, he at last hung it +aloft from the topmast-stay; where yet it was suspended, bandaged over +and over in cerements. The hand that must have locked many others in +friendly clasp, or smote a foe, was no food, thought Samoa, for fowls +of the air nor fishes of the sea. + +Now, which was Samoa? The dead arm swinging high as Haman? Or the +living trunk below? Was the arm severed from the body, or the body from +the arm? The residual part of Samoa was alive, and therefore we say it +was he. But which of the writhing sections of a ten times severed worm, +is the worm proper? + +For myself, I ever regarded Samoa as but a large fragment of a man, not +a man complete. For was he not an entire limb out of pocket? And the +action at Teneriffe over, great Nelson himself—physiologically +speaking—was but three-quarters of a man. And the smoke of Waterloo +blown by, what was Anglesea but the like? After Saratoga, what Arnold? +To say nothing of Mutius Scaevola minus a hand, General Knox a thumb, +and Hannibal an eye; and that old Roman grenadier, Dentatus, nothing +more than a bruised and battered trunk, a knotty sort of hemlock of a +warrior, hard to hack and hew into chips, though much marred in +symmetry by battle-ax blows. Ah! but these warriors, like anvils, will +stand a deal of hard hammering. Especially in the old knight-errant +times. For at the battle of Brevieux in Flanders, my glorious old +gossiping ancestor, Froissart, informs me, that ten good knights, being +suddenly unhorsed, fell stiff and powerless to the plain, fatally +encumbered by their armor. Whereupon, the rascally burglarious +peasants, their foes, fell to picking their visors; as burglars, locks; +or oystermen, oysters; to get at their lives. But all to no purpose. +And at last they were fain to ask aid of a blacksmith; and not till +then, were the inmates of the armor dispatched. Now it was deemed very +hard, that the mysterious state- prisoner of France should be riveted +in an iron mask; but these knight-errants did voluntarily prison +themselves in their own iron Bastiles; and thus helpless were murdered +there-in. Days of chivalry these, when gallant chevaliers died +chivalric deaths! + +And this was the epic age, over whose departure my late eloquent and +prophetic friend and correspondent, Edmund Burke, so movingly mourned. +Yes, they were glorious times. But no sensible man, given to quiet +domestic delights, would exchange his warm fireside and muffins, for a +heroic bivouac, in a wild beechen wood, of a raw gusty morning in +Normandy; every knight blowing his steel-gloved fingers, and vainly +striving to cook his cold coffee in his helmet. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. +Peril A Peace-Maker + + +A few days passed: the brigantine drifting hither and thither, and +nothing in sight but the sea, when forth again on its stillness rung +Annatoo’s domestic alarum. The truce was up. Most egregiously had the +lady infringed it; appropriating to herself various objects previously +disclaimed in favor of Samoa. Besides, forever on the prowl, she was +perpetually going up and down; with untiring energy, exploring every +nook and cranny; carrying off her spoils and diligently secreting them. +Having little idea of feminine adaptations, she pilfered whatever came +handy:—iron hooks, dollars, bolts, hatchets, and stopping not at balls +of marline and sheets of copper. All this, poor Samoa would have borne +with what patience he might, rather than again renew the war, were it +not, that the audacious dame charged him with peculations upon her own +private stores; though of any such thing he was innocent as the +bowsprit. + +This insulting impeachment got the better of the poor islander’s +philosophy. He keenly resented it. And the consequence was, that seeing +all domineering useless, Annatoo flew off at a tangent; declaring that, +for the future, Samoa might stay by himself; she would have nothing +more to do with him. Save when unavoidable in managing the brigantine, +she would not even speak to him, that she wouldn’t, the monster! She +then boldly demanded the forecastle—in the brig’s case, by far the +pleasantest end of the ship—for her own independent suite of +apartments. As for hapless Belisarius, he might do what he pleased in +his dark little den of a cabin. + +Concerning the division of the spoils, the termagant succeeded in +carrying the day; also, to her quarters, bale after bale of goods, +together with numerous odds and ends, sundry and divers. Moreover, she +laid in a fine stock of edibles, so as, in all respects possible, to +live independent of her spouse. + +Unlovely Annatoo! Unfortunate Samoa! Thus did the pair make a divorce +of it; the lady going upon a separate maintenance,—and Belisarius +resuming his bachelor loneliness. In the captain’s state room, all cold +and comfortless, he slept; his lady whilome retiring to her forecastle +boudoir; beguiling the hours in saying her pater-nosters, and tossing +over and assorting her ill-gotten trinkets and finery; like Madame De +Maintenon dedicating her last days and nights to continence and +calicoes. + +But think you this was the quiet end of their conjugal quarrels? Ah, +no! No end to those feuds, till one or t’other gives up the ghost. + +Now, exiled from the nuptial couch, Belisarius bore the hardship +without a murmur. And hero that he was, who knows that he felt not like +a soldier on a furlough? But as for Antonina, she could neither get +along with Belisarius, nor without him. She made advances. But of what +sort? Why, breaking into the cabin and purloining sundry goods +therefrom; in artful hopes of breeding a final reconciliation out of +the temporary outburst that might ensue. + +Then followed a sad scene of altercation; interrupted at last by a +sudden loud roaring of the sea. Rushing to the deck, they beheld +themselves sweeping head-foremost toward a shoal making out from a +cluster of low islands, hitherto, by banks of clouds, shrouded from +view. + +The helm was instantly shifted; and the yards braced about. But for +several hours, owing to the freshness of the breeze, the set of the +currents, and the irregularity and extent of the shoal, it seemed +doubtful whether they would escape a catastrophe. But Samoa’s +seamanship, united to Annatoo’s industry, at last prevailed; and the +brigantine was saved. + +Of the land where they came so near being wrecked, they knew nothing; +and for that reason, they at once steered away. For after the fatal +events which had overtaken the Parki at the Pearl Shell islands, so +fearful were they of encountering any Islanders, that from the first +they had resolved to keep open sea, shunning every appearance of land; +relying upon being eventually picked up by some passing sail. + +Doubtless this resolution proved their salvation. For to the navigator +in these seas, no risk so great, as in approaching the isles; which +mostly are so guarded by outpost reefs, and far out from their margins +environed by perils, that the green flowery field within, lies like a +rose among thorns; and hard to be reached as the heart of proud maiden. +Though once attained, all three—red rose, bright shore, and soft +heart—are full of love, bloom, and all manner of delights. The Pearl +Shell islands excepted. + +Besides, in those generally tranquil waters, Samoa’s little craft, +though hundreds of miles from land, was very readily managed by himself +and Annatoo. So small was the Parki, that one hand could brace the +main-yard; and a very easy thing it was, even to hoist the small +top-sails; for after their first clumsy attempt to perform that +operation by hand, they invariably led the halyards to the windlass, +and so managed it, with the utmost facility. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. +Containing A Pennyweight Of Philosophy + + +Still many days passed and the Parki yet floated. The little flying- +fish got used to her familiar, loitering hull; and like swallows +building their nests in quiet old trees, they spawned in the great +green barnacles that clung to her sides. + +The calmer the sea, the more the barnacles grow. In the tropical +Pacific, but a few weeks suffice thus to encase your craft in shell +armor. Vast bunches adhere to the very cutwater, and if not stricken +off, much impede the ship’s sailing. And, at intervals, this clearing +away of barnacles was one of Annatoo’s occupations. For be it known, +that, like most termagants, the dame was tidy at times, though +capriciously; loving cleanliness by fits and starts. Wherefore, these +barnacles oftentimes troubled her; and with a long pole she would go +about, brushing them aside. It beguiled the weary hours, if nothing +more; and then she would return to her beads and her trinkets; telling +them all over again; murmuring forth her devotions, and marking whether +Samoa had been pilfering from her store. + +Now, the escape from the shoal did much once again to heal the +differences of the good lady and her spouse. And keeping house, as they +did, all alone by themselves, in that lonely craft, a marvel it is, +that they should ever have quarreled. And then to divorce, and yet +dwell in the same tenement, was only aggravating the evil. So +Belisarius and Antonina again came together. But now, grown wise by +experience, they neither loved over-keenly, nor hated; but took things +as they were; found themselves joined, without hope of a sundering, and +did what they could to make a match of the mate. Annatoo concluded that +Samoa was not wholly to be enslaved; and Samoa thought best to wink at +Annatoo’s foibles, and let her purloin when she pleased. + +But as in many cases, all this philosophy about wedlock is not proof +against the perpetual contact of the parties concerned; and as it is +far better to revive the old days of courtship, when men’s mouths are +honey-combs: and, to make them still sweeter, the ladies the bees which +there store their sweets; when fathomless raptures glimmer far down in +the lover’s fond eye; and best of all, when visits are alternated by +absence: so, like my dignified lord duke and his duchess, Samoa and +Annatoo, man and wife, dwelling in the same house, still kept up their +separate quarters. Marlborough visiting Sarah; and Sarah, Marlborough, +whenever the humor suggested. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. +In Which The Past History Of The Parki Is Concluded + + +Still days, days, days sped by; and steering now this way, now that, to +avoid the green treacherous shores, which frequently rose into view, +the Parki went to and fro in the sea; till at last, it seemed hard to +tell, in what watery world she floated. Well knowing the risks they +ran, Samoa desponded. But blessed be ignorance. For in the day of his +despondency, the lively old lass his wife bade him be of stout heart, +cheer up, and steer away manfully for the setting sun; following which, +they must inevitably arrive at her own dear native island, where all +their cares would be over. So squaring their yards, away they glided; +far sloping down the liquid sphere. + +Upon the afternoon of the day we caught sight of them in our boat, they +had sighted a cluster of low islands, which put them in no small panic, +because of their resemblance to those where the massacre had taken +place. Whereas, they must have been full five hundred leagues from that +fearful vicinity. However, they altered their course to avoid it; and a +little before sunset, dropping the islands astern, resumed their +previous track. But very soon after, they espied our little sea-goat, +bounding over the billows from afar. + +This they took for a canoe giving chase to them. It renewed and +augmented their alarm. + +And when at last they perceived that the strange object was a boat, +their fears, instead of being allayed, only so much the more increased. +For their wild superstitions led them to conclude, that a white man’s +craft coming upon them so suddenly, upon the open sea, and by night, +could be naught but a phantom. Furthermore, marking two of us in the +Chamois, they fancied us the ghosts of the Cholos. A conceit which +effectually damped Samoa’s courage, like my Viking’s, only proof +against things tangible. So seeing us bent upon boarding the +brigantine; after a hurried over-turning of their chattels, with a view +of carrying the most valuable aloft for safe keeping, they secreted +what they could; and together made for the fore-top; the man with a +musket, the woman with a bag of beads. Their endeavoring to secure +these treasures against ghostly appropriation originated in no real +fear, that otherwise they would be stolen: it was simply incidental to +the vacant panic into which they were thrown. No reproach this, to +Belisarius’ heart of game; for the most intrepid Feegee warrior, he who +has slain his hecatombs, will not go ten yards in the dark alone, for +fear of ghosts. + +Their purpose was to remain in the top until daylight; by which time, +they counted upon the withdrawal of their visitants; who, sure enough, +at last sprang on board, thus verifying their worst apprehensions. + +They watched us long and earnestly. But curious to tell, in that very +strait of theirs, perched together in that airy top, their domestic +differences again broke forth; most probably, from their being suddenly +forced into such very close contact. + +However that might be, taking advantage of our descent into the cabin, +Samoa, in desperation fled from his wife, and one-armed as he was, +sailor-like, shifted himself over by the fore and aft-stays to the +main-top, his musket being slung to his back. And thus divided, though +but a few yards intervened, the pair were as much asunder as if at the +opposite Poles. + +During the live-long night they were both in great perplexity as to the +extraordinary goblins on board. Such inquisitive, meddlesome spirits, +had never before been encountered. So cool and systematic; sagaciously +stopping the vessel’s headway the better to rummage;—the very plan they +themselves had adopted. But what most surprised them, was our striking +a light, a thing of which no true ghost would be guilty. Then, our +eating and drinking on the quarter- deck including the deliberate +investment of Vienna; and many other actions equally strange, almost +led Samoa to fancy that we were no shades, after all, but a couple of +men from the moon. + +Yet they had dimly caught sight of the frocks and trowsers we wore, +similar to those which the captain of the Parki had bestowed upon the +two Cholos, and in which those villains had been killed. This, with the +presence of the whale boat, united to chase away the conceit of our +lunar origin. But these considerations renewed their first +superstitious impressions of our being the ghosts of the murderous +half-breeds. + +Nevertheless, while during the latter part of the night we were +reclining beneath him, munching our biscuit, Samoa eyeing us intently, +was half a mind to open fire upon us by way of testing our +corporeality. But most luckily, he concluded to defer so doing till +sunlight; if by that time we should not have evaporated. + +For dame Annatoo, almost from our first boarding the brigantine, +something in our manner had bred in her a lurking doubt as to the +genuineness of our atmospheric organization; and abandoned to her +speculations when Samoa fled from her side, her incredulity waxed +stronger and stronger. Whence we came she knew not; enough, that we +seemed bent upon pillaging her own precious purloinings. Alas! thought +she, my buttons, my nails, my tappa, my dollars, my beads, and my +boxes! + +Wrought up to desperation by these dismal forebodings, she at length +shook the ropes leading from her own perch to Samoa’s; adopting this +method of arousing his attention to the heinousness of what was in all +probability going on in the cabin, a prelude most probably to the +invasion of her own end of the vessel. Had she dared raise her voice, +no doubt she would have suggested the expediency of shooting us so soon +as we emerged from the cabin. But failing to shake Samoa into an +understanding of her views on the subject, her malice proved futile. + +When her worst fears were confirmed, however, and we actually descended +into the forecastle; there ensued such a reckless shaking of the ropes, +that Samoa was fain to hold on hard, for fear of being tossed out of +the rigging. And it was this violent rocking that caused the loud +creaking of the yards, so often heard by us while below in Annatoo’s +apartment. + +And the fore-top being just over the open forecastle scuttle, the dame +could look right down upon us; hence our proceedings were plainly +revealed by the lights that we carried. Upon our breaking open her +strong-box, her indignation almost completely overmastered her fears. +Unhooking a top-block, down it came into the forecastle, charitably +commissioned with the demolition of Jarl’s cocoa-nut, then more exposed +to the view of an aerial observer than my own. But of it turned out, no +harm was done to our porcelain. + +At last, morning dawned; when ensued Jarl’s discovery as the occupant +of the main-top; which event, with what followed, has been duly +recounted. + +And such, in substance, was the first, second, third and fourth acts of +the Parki drama. The fifth and last, including several scenes, now +follows. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. +Suspicions Laid, And Something About The Calmuc + + +Though abounding in details full of the savor of reality, Samoa’s +narrative did not at first appear altogether satisfactory. Not that it +was so strange; for stranger recitals I had heard. + +But one reason, perhaps, was that I had anticipated a narrative quite +different; something agreeing with my previous surmises. + +Not a little puzzling, also, was his account of having seen islands the +day preceding; though, upon reflection, that might have been the case, +and yet, from his immediately altering the Parki’s course, the Chamois, +unknowingly might have sailed by their vicinity. Still, those islands +could form no part of the chain we were seeking. They must have been +some region hitherto undiscovered. + +But seems it likely, thought I, that one, who, according to his own +account, has conducted himself so heroically in rescuing the +brigantine, should be the victim of such childish terror at the mere +glimpse of a couple of sailors in an open boat, so well supplied, too, +with arms, as he was, to resist their capturing his craft, if such +proved their intention? On the contrary, would it not have been more +natural, in his dreary situation, to have hailed our approach with the +utmost delight? But then again, we were taken for phantoms, not flesh +and blood. Upon the whole, I regarded the narrator of these things +somewhat distrustfully. But he met my gaze like a man. While Annatoo, +standing by, looked so expressively the Amazonian character imputed to +her, that my doubts began to waver. And recalling all the little +incidents of their story, so hard to be conjured up on the spur of a +presumed necessity to lie; nay, so hard to be conjured up at all; my +suspicions at last gave way. And I could no longer harbor any +misgivings. + +For, to be downright, what object could Samoa have, in fabricating such +a narrative of horrors—those of the massacre, I mean—unless to conceal +some tragedy, still more atrocious, in which he himself had been +criminally concerned? A supposition, which, for obvious reasons, seemed +out of the question. True, instances were known to me of half- +civilized beings, like Samoa, forming part of the crews of ships in +these seas, rising suddenly upon their white ship-mates, and murdering +them, for the sake of wrecking the ship on the shore of some island +near by, and plundering her hull, when stranded. + +But had this been purposed with regard to the Parki, where the rest of +the mutineers? There was no end to my conjectures; the more I indulged +in them, the more they multiplied. So, unwilling to torment myself, +when nothing could be learned, but what Samoa related, and stuck to +like a hero; I gave over conjecturing at all; striving hard to repose +full faith in the Islander. + +Jarl, however, was skeptical to the last; and never could be brought +completely to credit the tale. He stoutly maintained that the +hobgoblins must have had something or other to do with the Parki. + +My own curiosity satisfied with respect to the brigantine, Samoa +himself turned inquisitor. He desired to know who we were; and whence +we came in our marvelous boat. But on these heads I thought best to +withhold from him the truth; among other things, fancying that if +disclosed, it would lessen his deference for us, as men superior to +himself. I therefore spoke vaguely of our adventures, and assumed the +decided air of a master; which I perceived was not lost upon the rude +Islander. As for Jarl, and what he might reveal, I embraced the first +opportunity to impress upon him the importance of never divulging our +flight from the Arcturion; nor in any way to commit himself on that +head: injunctions which he faithfully promised to observe. + +If not wholly displeased with the fine form of Samoa, despite his +savage lineaments, and mutilated member, I was much less conciliated by +the person of Annatoo; who, being sinewy of limb, and neither young, +comely, nor amiable, was exceedingly distasteful in my eyes. Besides, +she was a tigress. Yet how avoid admiring those Penthesilian qualities +which so signally had aided Samoa, in wresting the Parki from its +treacherous captors. Nevertheless, it was indispensable that she should +at once be brought under prudent subjection; and made to know, once for +all, that though conjugally a rebel, she must be nautically submissive. +For to keep the sea with a Calmuc on board, seemed next to impossible. +In most military marines, they are prohibited by law; no officer may +take his Pandora and her bandbox off soundings. + +By the way, this self-same appellative, Pandora, has been bestowed upon +vessels. There was a British ship by that name, dispatched in quest of +the mutineers of the Bounty. But any old tar might have prophesied her +fate. Bound home she was wrecked on a reef off New South Wales. +Pandora, indeed! A pretty name for a ship: fairly smiting Fate in the +face. But in this matter of christening ships of war, Christian nations +are but too apt to be dare-devils. Witness the following: British names +all—The Conqueror, the Defiance, the Revenge, the Spitfire, the +Dreadnaught, the Thunderer, and the Tremendous; not omitting the Etna, +which, in the Roads of Corfu, was struck by lightning, coming nigh +being consumed by fire from above. But almost potent as Moses’ rod, +Franklin’s proved her salvation. + +With the above catalogue, compare we the Frenchman’s; quite +characteristic of the aspirations of Monsieur:—The Destiny, the +Glorious, the Magnanimous, the Magnificent, the Conqueror, the +Triumphant, the Indomitable, the Intrepid, the Mont-Blanc. Lastly, the +Dons; who have ransacked the theology of the religion of peace for fine +names for their fighting ships; stopping not at designating one of +their three-deckers, The Most Holy Trinity. But though, at Trafalgar, +the Santissima Trinidada thundered like Sinai, her thunders were +silenced by the victorious cannonade of the Victory. + +And without being blown into splinters by artillery, how many of these +Redoubtables and Invincibles have succumbed to the waves, and like +braggarts gone down before hurricanes, with their bravadoes broad on +their bows. + +Much better the American names (barring Scorpions, Hornets, and Wasps;) +Ohio, Virginia, Carolina, Vermont. And if ever these Yankees fight +great sea engagements—which Heaven forefend!—how glorious, poetically +speaking, to range up the whole federated fleet, and pour forth a +broadside from Florida to Maine. Ay, ay, very glorious indeed! yet in +that proud crowing of cannon, how shall the shade of peace-loving Penn +be astounded, to see the mightiest murderer of them all, the great +Pennsylvania, a very namesake of his. Truly, the Pennsylvania’s guns +should be the wooden ones, called by men-of- war’s-men, Quakers. + +But all this is an episode, made up of digressions. Time to tack ship, +and return. + +Now, in its proper place, I omitted to mention, that shortly after +descending from the rigging, and while Samoa was rehearsing his +adventures, dame Annatoo had stolen below into the forecastle, intent +upon her chattels. And finding them all in mighty disarray, she +returned to the deck prodigiously, excited, and glancing angrily toward +Jarl and me, showered a whole torrent of objurgations into both ears of +Samoa. + +This contempt of my presence surprised me at first; but perhaps women +are less apt to be impressed by a pretentious demeanor, than men. + +Now, to use a fighting phrase, there is nothing like boarding an enemy +in the smoke. And therefore, upon this first token of Annatoo’s +termagant qualities, I gave her to understand—craving her pardon—that +neither the vessel nor aught therein was hers; but that every thing +belonged to the owners in Lahina. I added, that at all hazards, a stop +must be put to her pilferings. Rude language for feminine ears; but how +to be avoided? Here was an infatuated woman, who, according to Samoa’s +account, had been repeatedly detected in the act of essaying to draw +out the screw-bolts which held together the planks. Tell me; was she +not worse than the Load-Stone Rock, sailing by which a stout ship fell +to pieces? + +During this scene, Samoa said little. Perhaps he was secretly pleased +that his matrimonial authority was reinforced by myself and my Viking, +whose views of the proper position of wives at sea, so fully +corresponded with his own; however difficult to practice, those purely +theoretical ideas of his had hitherto proved. + +Once more turning to Annatoo, now looking any thing but amiable, I +observed, that all her clamors would be useless; and that if it came to +the worst, the Parki had a hull that would hold her. + +In the end she went off in a fit of the sulks; sitting down on the +windlass and glaring; her arms akimbo, and swaying from side to side; +while ever and anon she gave utterance to a dismal chant. It sounded +like an invocation to the Cholos to rise and dispatch us. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. +What They Lighted Upon In Further Searching The Craft, And The +Resolution They Came To + + +Descending into the cabin with Samoa, I bade him hunt up the +brigantine’s log, the captain’s writing-desk, and nautical instruments; +in a word, aught that could throw light on the previous history of the +craft, or aid in navigating her homeward. + +But nearly every thing of the kind had disappeared: log, quadrant, and +ship’s papers. Nothing was left but the sextant-case, which Jarl and I +had lighted upon in the state-room. + +Upon this, vague though they were, my suspicions returned; and I +closely questioned the Islander concerning the disappearance of these +important articles. In reply, he gave me to understand, that the +nautical instruments had been clandestinely carried down into the +forecastle by Annatoo; and by that indefatigable and inquisitive dame +they had been summarily taken apart for scientific inspection. It was +impossible to restore them; for many of the fixtures were lost, +including the colored glasses, sights, and little mirrors; and many +parts still recoverable, were so battered and broken as to be entirely +useless. For several days afterward, we now and then came across bits +of the quadrant or sextant; but it was only to mourn over their fate. + +However, though sextant and quadrant were both unattainable, I did not +so quickly renounce all hope of discovering a chronometer, which, if in +good order, though at present not ticking, might still be made in some +degree serviceable. But no such instrument was to be seen. No: nor to +be heard of; Samoa himself professing utter ignorance. + +Annatoo, I threatened and coaxed; describing the chronometer—a live, +round creature like a toad, that made a strange noise, which I +imitated; but she knew nothing about it. Whether she had lighted upon +it unbeknown to Samoa, and dissected it as usual, there was now no way +to determine. Indeed, upon this one point, she maintained an air of +such inflexible stupidity, that if she were really fibbing, her +dead-wall countenance superseded the necessity for verbal deceit. + +It may be, however, that in this particular she was wronged; for, as +with many small vessels, the Parki might never have possessed the +instrument in question. All thought, therefore, of feeling our way, as +we should penetrate farther and farther into the watery wilderness, was +necessarily abandoned. + +The log book had also formed a portion of Annatoo’s pilferings. It +seems she had taken it into her studio to ponder over. But after +amusing herself by again and again counting over the leaves, and +wondering how so many distinct surfaces could be compacted together in +so small a compass, she had very suddenly conceived an aversion to +literature, and dropped the book overboard as worthless. Doubtless, it +met the fate of many other ponderous tomes; sinking quickly and +profoundly. What Camden or Stowe hereafter will dive for it? + +One evening Samoa brought me a quarto half-sheet of yellowish, ribbed +paper, much soiled and tarry, which he had discovered in a dark hole of +the forecastle. It had plainly formed part of the lost log; but all the +writing thereon, at present decipherable, conveyed no information upon +the subject then nearest my heart. + +But one could not but be struck by a tragical occurrence, which the +page very briefly recounted; as well, as by a noteworthy pictorial +illustration of the event in the margin of the text. Save the cut, +there was no further allusion to the matter than the following:— “This +day, being calm, Tooboi, one of the Lahina men, went overboard for a +bath, and was eaten up by a shark. Immediately sent forward for his +bag.” + +Now, this last sentence was susceptible of two meanings. It is truth, +that immediately upon the decease of a friendless sailor at sea, his +shipmates oftentimes seize upon his effects, and divide them; though +the dead man’s clothes are seldom worn till a subsequent voyage. This +proceeding seems heartless. But sailors reason thus: Better we, than +the captain. For by law, either scribbled or unscribbled, the effects +of a mariner, dying on shipboard, should be held in trust by that +officer. But as sailors are mostly foundlings and castaways, and carry +all their kith and kin in their arms and their legs, there hardly ever +appears any heir-at-law to claim their estate; seldom worth inheriting, +like Esterhazy’s. Wherefore, the withdrawal of a dead man’s “kit” from +the forecastle to the cabin, is often held tantamount to its virtual +appropriation by the captain. At any rate, in small ships on long +voyages, such things have been done. + +Thus much being said, then, the sentence above quoted from the Parki’s +log, may be deemed somewhat ambiguous. At the time it struck me as +singular; for the poor diver’s grass bag could not have contained much +of any thing valuable unless, peradventure, he had concealed therein +some Cleopatra pearls, feloniously abstracted from the shells brought +up from the sea. + +Aside of the paragraph, copied above, was a pen-and-ink sketch of the +casualty, most cruelly executed; the poor fellow’s legs being +represented half way in the process of deglutition; his arms firmly +grasping the monster’s teeth, as if heroically bent upon making as +tough a morsel of himself as possible. + +But no doubt the honest captain sketched this cenotaph to the departed +in all sincerity of heart; perhaps, during the melancholy leisure which +followed the catastrophe. Half obliterated were several stains upon the +page; seemingly, lingering traces of a salt tear or two. + +From this unwonted embellishment of the text, I was led to infer, that +the designer, at one time or other, must have been engaged in the +vocation of whaling. For, in India ink, the logs of certain whalemen +are decorated by somewhat similar illustrations. + +When whales are seen, but not captured, the fact is denoted by an +outline figure representing the creature’s flukes, the broad, curving +lobes of his tail. But in those cases where the monster is both chased +and killed, this outline is filled up jet black; one for every whale +slain; presenting striking objects in turning over the log; and so +facilitating reference. Hence, it is quite imposing to behold, all in a +row, three or four, sometime five or six, of these drawings; showing +that so many monsters that day jetted their last spout. And the chief +mate, whose duty it is to keep the ship’s record, generally prides +himself upon the beauty, and flushy likeness to life, of his flukes; +though, sooth to say, many of these artists are no Landseers. + +After vainly searching the cabin for those articles we most needed, we +proceeded to explore the hold, into which as yet we had not penetrated. +Here, we found a considerable quantity of pearl shells; cocoanuts; an +abundance of fresh water in casks; spare sails and rigging; and some +fifty barrels or more of salt beef and biscuit. Unromantic as these +last mentioned objects were, I lingered over them long, and in a +revery. Branded upon each barrel head was the name of a place in +America, with which I was very familiar. It is from America chiefly, +that ship’s stores are originally procured for the few vessels sailing +out of the Hawaiian Islands. + +Having now acquainted myself with all things respecting the Parki, +which could in any way be learned, I repaired to the quarter-deck, and +summoning round me Samoa, Annatoo, and Jarl, gravely addressed them. + +I said, that nothing would give me greater satisfaction than forthwith +to return to the scene of the massacre, and chastise its surviving +authors. But as there were only four of us in all; and the place of +those islands was wholly unknown to me; and even if known, would be +altogether out of our reach, since we possessed no instruments of +navigation; it was quite plain that all thought of returning thither +was entirely useless. The last mentioned reason, also, prevented our +voyaging to the Hawaiian group, where the vessel belonged; though that +would have been the most advisable step, resulting, as it would, if +successful, in restoring the ill-fated craft to her owners. + +But all things considered, it seemed best, I added, cautiously to hold +on our way to the westward. It was our easiest course; for we would +ever have the wind from astern; and though we could not so much as hope +to arrive at any one spot previously designated, there was still a +positive certainty, if we floated long enough, of falling in with +islands whereat to refresh ourselves; and whence, if we thought fit, we +might afterward embark for more agreeable climes. I then reminded them +of the fact, that so long as we kept the sea, there was always some +prospect of encountering a friendly sail; in which event, our +solicitude would be over. + +All this I said in the mild, firm tone of a superior; being anxious, at +once to assume the unquestioned supremacy. For, otherwise, Jarl and I +might better quit the vessel forthwith, than remain on board subject to +the outlandish caprices of Annatoo, who through Samoa would then have +the sway. But I was sure of my Viking; and if Samoa proved docile, had +no fear of his dame. + +And therefore during my address, I steadfastly eyed him; thereby +learning enough to persuade me, that though he deferred to me at +present, he was, notwithstanding, a man who, without precisely +meditating mischief, could upon occasion act an ugly part. But of his +courage, and savage honor, such as it was, I had little doubt. Then, +wild buffalo that he was, tamed down in the yoke matrimonial, I could +not but fancy, that if upon no other account, our society must please +him, as rendering less afflictive the tyranny of his spouse. + +For a hen-pecked husband, by the way, Samoa was a most terrible fellow +to behold. And though, after all, I liked him; it was as you fancy a +fiery steed with mane disheveled, as young Alexander fancied +Bucephalus; which wild horse, when he patted, he preferred holding by +the bridle. But more of Samoa anon. + +Our course determined, and the command of the vessel tacitly yielded up +to myself, the next thing done was to put every thing in order. The +tattered sails were replaced by others, dragged up from the sail- room +below; in several places, new running-rigging was rove; blocks +restrapped; and the slackened stays and shrouds set taught. For all of +which, we were mostly indebted to my Viking’s unwearied and skillful +marling-spike, which he swayed like a scepter. + +The little Parki’s toilet being thus thoroughly made for the first time +since the massacre, we gave her new raiment to the breeze, and daintily +squaring her yards, she gracefully glided away; honest old Jarl at the +helm, watchfully guiding her path, like some devoted old foster-father. + +As I stood by his side like a captain, or walked up and down on the +quarter-deck, I felt no little importance upon thus assuming for the +first time in my life, the command of a vessel at sea. The novel +circumstances of the case only augmented this feeling; the wild and +remote seas where we were; the character of my crew, and the +consideration, that to all purposes, I was owner, as well as commander +of the craft I sailed. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. +Hints For A Full Length Of Samoa + + +My original intention to touch at the Kingsmill Chain, or the countries +adjacent, was greatly strengthened by thus encountering Samoa; and the +more I had to do with my Belisarius, the more I was pleased with him. +Nor could I avoid congratulating myself, upon having fallen in with a +hero, who in various ways, could not fail of proving exceedingly +useful. + +Like any man of mark, Samoa best speaks for himself; but we may as well +convey some idea of his person. Though manly enough, nay, an obelisk in +stature, the savage was far from being sentimentally prepossessing. Be +not alarmed; but he wore his knife in the lobe of his dexter ear, +which, by constant elongation almost drooped upon his shoulder. A mode +of sheathing it exceedingly handy, and far less brigandish than the +Highlander’s dagger concealed in his leggins. + +But it was the mother of Samoa, who at a still earlier day had +punctured him through and through in still another direction. The +middle cartilage of his nose was slightly pendent, peaked, and Gothic, +and perforated with a hole; in which, like a Newfoundland dog carrying +a cane, Samoa sported a trinket: a well polished nail. + +In other respects he was equally a coxcomb. In his style of tattooing, +for instance, which seemed rather incomplete; his marks embracing but a +vertical half of his person, from crown to sole; the other side being +free from the slightest stain. Thus clapped together, as it were, he +looked like a union of the unmatched moieties of two distinct beings; +and your fancy was lost in conjecturing, where roamed the absent ones. +When he turned round upon you suddenly, you thought you saw some one +else, not him whom you had been regarding before. + +But there was one feature in Samoa beyond the reach of the innovations +of art:—his eye; which in civilized man or savage, ever shines in the +head, just as it shone at birth. Truly, our eyes are miraculous things. +But alas, that in so many instances, these divine organs should be mere +lenses inserted into the socket, as glasses in spectacle rims. + +But my Islander had a soul in his eye; looking out upon you there, like +somebody in him. What an eye, to be sure! At times, brilliantly +changeful as opal; in anger, glowing like steel at white heat. + +Belisarius, be it remembered, had but very recently lost an arm. But +you would have thought he had been born without it; so Lord Nelson- +like and cavalierly did he sport the honorable stump. + +But no more of Samoa; only this: that his name had been given him by a +sea-captain; to whom it had been suggested by the native designation of +the islands to which he belonged; the Saviian or Samoan group, +otherwise known as the Navigator Islands. The island of Upolua, one of +that cluster, claiming the special honor of his birth, as Corsica does +Napoleon’s, we shall occasionally hereafter speak of Samoa as the +Upoluan; by which title he most loved to be called. + +It is ever ungallant to pass over a lady. But what shall be said of +Annatoo? As I live, I can make no pleasing portrait of the dame; for as +in most ugly subjects, flattering would but make the matter worse. +Furthermore, unalleviated ugliness should ever go unpainted, as +something unnecessary to duplicate. But the only ugliness is that of +the heart, seen through the face. And though beauty be obvious, the +only loveliness is invisible. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. +Rovings Alow And Aloft + + +Every one knows what a fascination there is in wandering up and down in +a deserted old tenement in some warm, dreamy country; where the vacant +halls seem echoing of silence, and the doors creak open like the +footsteps of strangers; and into every window the old garden trees +thrust their dark boughs, like the arms of night-burglars; and ever and +anon the nails start from the wainscot; while behind it the mice rattle +like dice. Up and down in such old specter houses one loves to wander; +and so much the more, if the place be haunted by some marvelous story. + +And during the drowsy stillness of the tropical sea-day, very much such +a fancy had I, for prying about our little brigantine, whose tragic +hull was haunted by the memory of the massacre, of which it still bore +innumerable traces. + +And so far as the indulgence of quiet strolling and reverie was +concerned, it was well nigh the same as if I were all by myself. For +Samoa, for a time, was rather reserved, being occupied with thoughts of +his own. And Annatoo seldom troubled me with her presence. She was +taken up with her calicoes and jewelry; which I had permitted her to +retain, to keep her in good humor if possible. And as for My royal old +Viking, he was one of those individuals who seldom speak, unless +personally addressed. + +Besides, all that by day was necessary to navigating the Parki was, +that—somebody should stand at the helm; the craft being so small, and +the grating, whereon the steersman stood, so elevated, that he +commanded a view far beyond the bowsprit; thus keeping Argus eyes on +the sea, as he steered us along. In all other respects we left the +brigantine to the guardianship of the gentle winds. + +My own turn at the helm—for though commander, I felt constrained to do +duty with the rest—came but once in the twenty-four hours. And not only +did Jarl and Samoa, officiate as helmsmen, but also Dame Annatoo, who +had become quite expert at the business. Though Jarl always maintained +that there was a slight drawback upon her usefulness in this vocation. +Too much taken up by her lovely image partially reflected in the glass +of the binnacle before her, Annatoo now and then neglected her duty, +and led us some devious dances. Nor was she, I ween, the first woman +that ever led men into zigzags. + +For the reasons above stated, I had many spare hours to myself. At +times, I mounted aloft, and lounging in the slings of the topsail +yard—one of the many snug nooks in a ship’s rigging—I gazed broad off +upon the blue boundless sea, and wondered what they were doing in that +unknown land, toward which we were fated to be borne. Or feeling less +meditative, I roved about hither and thither; slipping over, by the +stays, from one mast to the other; climbing up to the truck; or +lounging out to the ends of the yards; exploring wherever there was a +foothold. It was like climbing about in some mighty old oak, and +resting in the crotches. + +To a sailor, a ship’s ropes are a study. And to me, every rope-yarn of +the Parki’s was invested with interest. The outlandish fashion of her +shrouds, the collars of her stays, the stirrups, seizings, +Flemish-horses, gaskets,—all the wilderness of her rigging, bore +unequivocal traces of her origin. + +But, perhaps, my pleasantest hours were those which I spent, stretched +out on a pile of old sails, in the fore-top; lazily dozing to the +craft’s light roll. + +Frequently, I descended to the cabin: for the fiftieth time, exploring +the lockers and state-rooms for some new object of curiosity. And +often, with a glimmering light, I went into the midnight hold, as into +old vaults and catacombs; and creeping between damp ranges of casks, +penetrated into its farthest recesses. + +Sometimes, in these under-ground burrowings, I lighted upon sundry +out-of-the-way hiding places of Annatoo’s; where were snugly secreted +divers articles, with which she had been smitten. In truth, no small +portion of the hull seemed a mine of stolen goods, stolen out of its +own bowels. I found a jaunty shore-cap of the captain’s, hidden away in +the hollow heart of a coil of rigging; covered over in a manner most +touchingly natural, with a heap of old ropes; and near by, in a +breaker, discovered several entire pieces of calico, heroically tied +together with cords almost strong enough to sustain the mainmast. + +Near the stray light, which, when the hatch was removed, gleamed down +into this part of the hold, was a huge ground-tier butt, headless as +Charles the First. And herein was a mat nicely spread for repose; a +discovery which accounted for what had often proved an enigma. Not +seldom Annatoo had been among the missing; and though, from stem to +stern, loudly invoked to come forth and relieve the poignant distress +of her anxious friends, the dame remained perdu; silent and invisible +as a spirit. But in her own good time, she would mysteriously emerge; +or be suddenly espied lounging quietly in the forecastle, as if she had +been there from all eternity. + +Useless to inquire, “Where hast thou been, sweet Annatoo?” For no sweet +rejoinder would she give. + +But now the problem was solved. Here, in this silent cask in the hold, +Annatoo was wont to coil herself away, like a garter-snake under a +stone. + +Whether-she-thus stood sentry over her goods secreted round about: +whether she here performed penance like a nun in her cell; or was moved +to this unaccountable freak by the powers of the air; no one could +tell. Can you? + +Verily, her ways were as the ways of the inscrutable penguins in +building their inscrutable nests, which baffle all science, and make a +fool of a sage. + +Marvelous Annatoo! who shall expound thee? + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. +Xiphius Platypterus + + +About this time, the loneliness of our voyage was relieved by an event +worth relating. + +Ever since leaving the Pearl Shell Islands, the Parki had been followed +by shoals of small fish, pleasantly enlivening the sea, and socially +swimming by her side. But in vain did Jarl and I search among their +ranks for the little, steel-blue Pilot fish, so long outriders of the +Chamois. But perhaps since the Chamois was now high and dry on the +Parki’s deck, our bright little avant-couriers were lurking out of +sight, far down in the brine; racing along close to the keel. + +But it is not with the Pilot fish that we now have to do. + +One morning our attention was attracted to a mighty commotion in the +water. The shoals of fish were darting hither and thither, and leaping +into the air in the utmost affright. Samoa declared, that their deadly +foe the Sword fish must be after them. + +And here let me say, that, since of all the bullies, and braggarts, and +bravoes, and free-booters, and Hectors, and fish-at-arms, and +knight-errants, and moss-troopers, and assassins, and foot-pads, and +gallant soldiers, and immortal heroes that swim the seas, the Indian +Sword fish is by far the most remarkable, I propose to dedicate this +chapter to a special description of the warrior. In doing which, I but +follow the example of all chroniclers and historians, my Peloponnesian +friend Thucydides and others, who are ever mindful of devoting much +space to accounts of eminent destroyers; for the purpose, no doubt, of +holding them up as ensamples to the world. + +Now, the fish here treated of is a very different creature from the +Sword fish frequenting the Northern Atlantic; being much larger every +way, and a more dashing varlet to boot. Furthermore, he is denominated +the Indian Sword fish, in contradistinction from his namesake above +mentioned. But by seamen in the Pacific, he is more commonly known as +the Bill fish; while for those who love science and hard names, be it +known, that among the erudite naturalists he goeth by the outlandish +appellation of “_Xiphius Platypterus_.” + +But I waive for my hero all these his cognomens, and substitute a much +better one of my own: namely, the Chevalier. And a Chevalier he is, by +good right and title. A true gentleman of Black Prince Edward’s bright +day, when all gentlemen were known by their swords; whereas, in times +present, the Sword fish excepted, they are mostly known by their high +polished boots and rattans. + +A right valiant and jaunty Chevalier is our hero; going about with his +long Toledo perpetually drawn. Rely upon it, he will fight you to the +hilt, for his bony blade has never a scabbard. He himself sprang from +it at birth; yea, at the very moment he leaped into the Battle of Life; +as we mortals ourselves spring all naked and scabbardless into the +world. Yet, rather, are we scabbards to our souls. And the drawn soul +of genius is more glittering than the drawn cimeter of Saladin. But how +many let their steel sleep, till it eat up the scabbard itself, and +both corrode to rust-chips. Saw you ever the hillocks of old Spanish +anchors, and anchor-stocks of ancient galleons, at the bottom of Callao +Bay? The world is full of old Tower armories, and dilapidated Venetian +arsenals, and rusty old rapiers. But true warriors polish their good +blades by the bright beams of the morning; and gird them on to their +brave sirloins; and watch for rust spots as for foes; and by many stout +thrusts and stoccadoes keep their metal lustrous and keen, as the +spears of the Northern Lights charging over Greenland. + +Fire from the flint is our Chevalier enraged. He takes umbrage at the +cut of some ship’s keel crossing his road; and straightway runs a tilt +at it; with one mad lounge thrusting his Andrea Ferrara clean through +and through; not seldom breaking it short off at the haft, like a bravo +leaving his poignard in the vitals of his foe. + +In the case of the English ship Foxhound, the blade penetrated through +the most solid part of her hull, the bow; going completely through the +copper plates and timbers, and showing for several inches in the hold. +On the return of the ship to London, it was carefully sawn out; and, +imbedded in the original wood, like a fossil, is still preserved. But +this was a comparatively harmless onslaught of the valiant Chevalier. +With the Rousseau, of Nantucket, it fared worse. She was almost +mortally stabbed; her assailant withdrawing his blade. And it was only +by keeping the pumps clanging, that she managed to swim into a Tahitian +harbor, “heave down,” and have her wound dressed by a ship-surgeon with +tar and oakum. This ship I met with at sea, shortly after the disaster. + +At what armory our Chevalier equips himself after one of his spiteful +tilting-matches, it would not be easy to say. But very hard for him, if +ever after he goes about in the lists, swordless and disarmed, at the +mercy of any caitiff shark he may meet. + +Now, seeing that our fellow-voyagers, the little fish along-side, were +sorely tormented and thinned out by the incursions of a pertinacious +Chevalier, bent upon making a hearty breakfast out of them, I +determined to interfere in their behalf, and capture the enemy. + +With shark-hook and line I succeeded, and brought my brave gentleman to +the deck. He made an emphatic landing; lashing the planks with his +sinewy tail; while a yard and a half in advance of his eyes, reached +forth his terrible blade. + +As victor, I was entitled to the arms of the vanquished; so, quickly +dispatching him, and sawing off his Toledo, I bore it away for a +trophy. It was three-sided, slightly concave on each, like a bayonet; +and some three inches through at the base, it tapered from thence to a +point. + +And though tempered not in Tagus or Guadalquiver, it yet revealed upon +its surface that wavy grain and watery fleckiness peculiar to tried +blades of Spain. It was an aromatic sword; like the ancient caliph’s, +giving out a peculiar musky odor by friction. But far different from +steel of Tagus or Damascus, it was inflexible as Crocket’s rifle tube; +no doubt, as deadly. + +Long hung that rapier over the head of my hammock. Was it not storied +as the good trenchant blade of brave Bayard, that other chevalier? The +knight’s may have slain its scores, or fifties; but the weapon I +preserved had, doubtless, run through and riddled its thousands. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. +Otard + + +And here is another little incident. + +One afternoon while all by myself curiously penetrating into the hold, +I most unexpectedly obtained proof, that the ill-fated captain of the +Parki had been a man of sound judgment and most excellent taste. In +brief, I lighted upon an aromatic cask of prime old Otard. + +Now, I mean not to speak lightly of any thing immediately connected +with the unfortunate captain. Nor, on the other hand, would I resemble +the inconsolable mourner, who among other tokens of affliction, bound +in funereal crape his deceased friend’s copy of Joe Miller. Is there +not a fitness in things? + +But let that pass. I found the Otard, and drank there-of; finding it, +moreover, most pleasant to the palate, and right cheering to the soul. +My next impulse was to share my prize with my shipmates. But here a +judicious reflection obtruded. From the sea-monarchs, his ancestors, my +Viking had inherited one of their cardinal virtues, a detestation and +abhorrence of all vinous and spirituous beverages; insomuch, that he +never could see any, but he instantly quaffed it out of sight. To be +short, like Alexander the Great and other royalties, Jarl was prone to +overmuch bibing. And though at sea more sober than a Fifth Monarchy +Elder, it was only because he was then removed from temptation. But +having thus divulged my Viking’s weak; side, I earnestly entreat, that +it may not disparage him in any charitable man’s estimation. Only +think, how many more there are like him to say nothing further of +Alexander the Great—especially among his own class; and consider, I +beseech, that the most capacious-souled fellows, for that very reason, +are the most apt to be too liberal in their libations; since, being so +large-hearted, they hold so much more good cheer than others. + +For Samoa, from his utter silence hitherto as to aught inebriating on +board, I concluded, that, along with his other secrets, the departed +captain had very wisely kept his Otard to himself. + +Nor did I doubt, but that the Upoluan, like all Polynesians, much loved +getting high of head; and in that state, would be more intractable than +a Black Forest boar. And concerning Annatoo, I shuddered to think, how +that Otard might inflame her into a Fury more fierce than the foremost +of those that pursued Orestes. + +In good time, then, bethinking me of the peril of publishing my +discovery;—bethinking me of the quiet, lazy, ever-present perils of the +voyage, of all circumstances, the very worst under which to introduce +an intoxicating beverage to my companions, I resolved to withhold it +from them altogether. + +So impressed was I with all this, that for a moment, I was almost +tempted to roll over the cask on its bilge, remove the stopper, and +suffer its contents to mix with the foul water at the bottom of the +hold. + +But no, no: What: dilute the brine with the double distilled soul of +the precious grape? Haft himself would have haunted me! + +Then again, it might come into play medicinally; and Paracelsus himself +stands sponsor for every cup drunk for the good of the abdomen. So at +last, I determined to let it remain where it was: visiting it +occasionally, by myself, for inspection. + +But by way of advice to all ship-masters, let me say, that if your +Otard magazine be exposed to view—then, in the evil hour of wreck, +stave in your spirit-casks, ere rigging the life-boat. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. +How They Steered On Their Way + + +When we quitted the Chamois for the brigantine, we must have been at +least two hundred leagues to the westward of the spot, where we had +abandoned the Arcturion. Though how far we might then have been, North +or South of the Equator, I could not with any certainty divine. + +But that we were not removed any considerable distance from the Line, +seemed obvious. For in the starriest night no sign of the extreme Polar +constellations was visible; though often we scanned the northern and +southern horizon in search of them. So far as regards the aspect of the +skies near the ocean’s rim, the difference of several degrees in one’s +latitude at sea, is readily perceived by a person long accustomed to +surveying the heavens. + +If correct in my supposition, concerning our longitude at the time here +alluded to, and allowing for what little progress we had been making in +the Parki, there now remained some one hundred leagues to sail, ere the +country we sought would be found. But for obvious reasons, how long +precisely we might continue to float out of sight of land, it was +impossible to say. Calms, light breezes, and currents made every thing +uncertain. Nor had we any method of estimating our due westward +progress, except by what is called Dead Reckoning,—the computation of +the knots run hourly; allowances’ being made for the supposed +deviations from our course, by reason of the ocean streams; which at +times in this quarter of the Pacific run with very great velocity. + +Now, in many respects we could not but feel safer aboard the Parki than +in the Chamois. The sense of danger is less vivid, the greater the +number of lives involved. He who is ready to despair in solitary peril, +plucks up a heart in the presence of another. In a plurality of +comrades is much countenance and consolation. + +Still, in the brigantine there were many sources of uneasiness and +anxiety unknown to me in the whale-boat. True, we had now between us +and the deep, five hundred good planks to one lath in our buoyant +little chip. But the Parki required more care and attention; especially +by night, when a vigilant look-out was indispensable. With impunity, in +our whale-boat, we might have run close to shoal or reef; whereas, +similar carelessness or temerity now, might prove fatal to all +concerned. + +Though in the joyous sunlight, sailing through the sparkling sea, I was +little troubled with serious misgivings; in the hours of darkness it +was quite another thing. And the apprehensions, nay terrors I felt, +were much augmented by the remissness of both Jarl and Samoa, in +keeping their night-watches. Several times I was seized with a deadly +panic, and earnestly scanned the murky horizon, when rising from +slumber I found the steersman, in whose hands for the time being were +life and death, sleeping upright against the tiller, as much of a +fixture there, as the open-mouthed dragon rudely carved on our prow. + +Were it not, that on board of other vessels, I myself had many a time +dozed at the helm, spite of all struggles, I would have been almost at +a loss to account for this heedlessness in my comrades. But it seemed +as if the mere sense of our situation, should have been sufficient to +prevent the like conduct in all on board our craft. + +Samoa’s aspect, sleeping at the tiller, was almost appalling. His large +opal eyes were half open; and turned toward the light of the binnacle, +gleamed between the lids like bars of flame. And added to all, was his +giant stature and savage lineaments. + +It was in vain, that I remonstrated, begged, or threatened: the +occasional drowsiness of my fellow-voyagers proved incurable. To no +purpose, I reminded my Viking that sleeping in the night-watch in a +craft like ours, was far different from similar heedlessness on board +the Arcturion. For there, our place upon the ocean was always known, +and our distance from land; so that when by night the seamen were +permitted to be drowsy, it was mostly, because the captain well knew +that strict watchfulness could be dispensed with. + +Though in all else, the Skyeman proved a most faithful ally, in this +one thing he was either perversely obtuse, or infatuated. Or, perhaps, +finding himself once more in a double-decked craft, which rocked him as +of yore, he was lulled into a deceitful security. + +For Samoa, his drowsiness was the drowsiness of one beat on sleep, come +dreams or death. He seemed insensible to the peril we ran. Often I sent +the sleepy savage below, sad, steered myself till morning. At last I +made a point of slumbering much by day, the better to stand watch by +night; though I made Samoa and Jarl regularly go through with their +allotted four hours each. + +It has been mentioned, that Annatoo took her turn at the helm; but it +was only by day. And in justice to the lady, I must affirm, that upon +the whole she acquitted herself well. For notwithstanding the syren +face in the binnacle, which dimly allured her glances, Annatoo after +all was tolerably heedful of her steering. Indeed she took much pride +therein; always ready for her turn; with marvelous exactitude +calculating the approaching hour, as it came on in regular rotation. +Her time-piece was ours, the sun. By night it must have been her +guardian star; for frequently she gazed up at a particular section of +the heavens, like one regarding the dial in a tower. + +By some odd reasoning or other, she had cajoled herself into the +notion, that whoever steered the brigantine, for that period was +captain. Wherefore, she gave herself mighty airs at the tiller; with +extravagant gestures issuing unintelligible orders about trimming the +sails, or pitching overboard something to see how fast we were going. +All this much diverted my Viking, who several times was delivered of a +laugh; a loud and healthy one to boot: a phenomenon worthy the +chronicling. + +And thus much for Annatoo, preliminary to what is further to be said. +Seeing the drowsiness of Jarl and Samoa, which so often kept me from my +hammock at night, forcing me to repose by day, when I far preferred +being broad awake, I decided to let Annatoo take her turn at the night +watches; which several times she had solicited me to do; railing at the +sleepiness of her spouse; though abstaining from all reflections upon +Jarl, toward whom she had of late grown exceedingly friendly. + +Now the Calmuc stood her first night watch to admiration; if any thing, +was altogether too wakeful. The mere steering of the craft employed not +sufficiently her active mind. Ever and anon she must needs rush from +the tiller to take a parenthetical pull at the fore- brace, the end of +which led down to the bulwarks near by; then refreshing herself with a +draught or two of water and a biscuit, she would continue to steer +away, full of the importance of her office. At any unusual flapping of +the sails, a violent stamping on deck announced the fact to the +startled crew. Finding her thus indefatigable, I readily induced her to +stand two watches to Jarl’s and Samoa’s one; and when she was at the +helm, I permitted myself to doze on a pile of old sails, spread every +evening on the quarter-deck. + +It was the Skyeman, who often admonished me to “heave the ship to” +every night, thus stopping her headway till morning; a plan which, +under other circumstances, might have perhaps warranted the slumbers of +all. But as it was, such a course would have been highly imprudent. For +while making no onward progress through the water, the rapid currents +we encountered would continually be drifting us eastward; since, +contrary to our previous experience, they seemed latterly to have +reversed their flow, a phenomenon by no means unusual in the vicinity +of the Line in the Pacific. And this it was that so prolonged our +passage to the westward. Even in a moderate breeze, I sometimes +fancied, that the impulse of the wind little more than counteracted the +glide of the currents; so that with much show of sailing, we were in +reality almost a fixture on the sea. + +The equatorial currents of the South Seas may be regarded as among the +most mysterious of the mysteries of the deep. Whence they come, whither +go, who knows? Tell us, what hidden law regulates their flow. +Regardless of the theory which ascribes to them a nearly uniform course +from east to west, induced by the eastwardly winds of the Line, and the +collateral action of the Polar streams; these currents are forever +shifting. Nor can the period of their revolutions be at all relied upon +or predicted. + +But however difficult it may be to assign a specific cause for the +ocean streams, in any part of the world, one of the wholesome effects +thereby produced would seem obvious enough. And though the circumstance +here alluded to is perhaps known to every body, it may be questioned, +whether it is generally invested with the importance it deserves. +Reference is here made to the constant commingling and purification of +the sea-water by reason of the currents. + +For, that the ocean, according to the popular theory, possesses a +special purifying agent in its salts, is somewhat to be doubted. Nor +can it be explicitly denied, that those very salts might corrupt it, +were it not for the brisk circulation of its particles consequent upon +the flow of the streams. It is well known to seamen, that a bucket of +sea-water, left standing in a tropical climate, very soon becomes +highly offensive; which is not the case with rainwater. + +But I build no theories. And by way of obstructing the one, which might +possibly be evolved from the statement above, let me add, that the +offensiveness of sea-water left standing, may arise in no small degree +from the presence of decomposed animal matter. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. +Ah, Annatoo! + + +In order to a complete revelation, I must needs once again discourse of +Annatoo and her pilferings; and to what those pilferings led. In the +simplicity of my soul, I fancied that the dame, so much flattered as +she needs must have been, by the confidence I began to repose in her, +would now mend her ways, and abstain from her larcenies. But not so. +She was possessed by some scores of devils, perpetually her to mischief +on their own separate behoof, and not less for many of her pranks were +of no earthly advantage to her, present or prospective. + +One day the log-reel was missing. Summon Annatoo. She came; but knew +nothing about it. Jarl spent a whole morning in contriving a +substitute; and a few days after, pop, we came upon the lost: article +hidden away in the main-top. + +Another time, discovering the little vessel to “gripe” hard in +steering, as if some one under water were jerking her backward, we +instituted a diligent examination, to see what was the matter. When lo; +what should we find but a rope, cunningly attached to one of the +chain-plates under the starboard main-channel. It towed heavily in the +water. Upon dragging it up—much as you would the cord of a ponderous +bucket far down in a well—a stout wooden box was discovered at the end; +which opened, disclosed sundry knives, hatchets, and ax-heads. + +Called to the stand, the Upoluan deposed, that thrice he had rescued +that identical box from Annatoo’s all-appropriating clutches. + +Now, here were four human beings shut up in this little oaken craft, +and, for the time being, their interests the same. What sane mortal, +then, would forever be committing thefts, without rhyme or reason. It +was like stealing silver from one pocket and decanting it into the +other. And what might it not lead to in the end? + +Why, ere long, in good sooth, it led to the abstraction of the compass +from the binnacle; so that we were fain to substitute for it, the one +brought along in the Chamois. + +It was Jarl that first published this last and alarming theft. Annatoo +being at the helm at dawn, he had gone to relieve her; and looking to +see how we headed, was horror-struck at the emptiness of the binnacle. + +I started to my feet; sought out the woman, and ferociously demanded +the compass. But her face was a blank; every word a denial. + +Further lenity was madness. I summoned Samoa, told him what had +happened, and affirmed that there was no safety for us except in the +nightly incarceration of his spouse. To this he privily assented; and +that very evening, when Annatoo descended into the forecastle, we +barred over her the scuttle-slide. Long she clamored, but unavailingly. +And every night this was repeated; the dame saying her vespers most +energetically. + +It has somewhere been hinted, that Annatoo occasionally cast sheep’s +eyes at Jarl. So I was not a little surprised when her manner toward +him decidedly changed. Pulling at the ropes with us, she would give him +sly pinches, and then look another way, innocent as a lamb. Then again, +she would refuse to handle the same piece of rigging with him; with wry +faces, rinsed out the wooden can at the water cask, if it so chanced +that my Viking had previously been drinking therefrom. At other times, +when the honest Skyeman came up from below, she would set up a shout of +derision, and loll out her tongue; accompanying all this by certain +indecorous and exceedingly unladylike gestures, significant of the +profound contempt in which she held him. + +Yet, never did Jarl heed her ill-breeding; but patiently overlooked and +forgave it. Inquiring the reason of the dame’s singular conduct, I +learned, that with eye averted, she had very lately crept close to my +Viking, and met with no tender reception. + +Doubtless, Jarl, who was much of a philosopher, innocently imagined +that ere long the lady would forgive and forget him. But what knows a +philosopher about women? + +Ere long, so outrageous became Annatoo’s detestation of him, that the +honest old tar could stand it no longer, and like most good-natured men +when once fairly roused, he was swept through and through with a +terrible typhoon of passion. He proposed, that forthwith the woman +should be sacked and committed to the deep; he could stand it no +longer. + +Murder is catching. At first I almost jumped at the proposition; but as +quickly rejected it. Ah! Annatoo: Woman unendurable: deliver me, ye +gods, from being shut up in a ship with such a hornet again. + +But are we yet through with her? Not yet. Hitherto she had continued to +perform the duties of the office assigned her since the commencement of +the voyage: namely, those of the culinary department. From this she was +now deposed. Her skewer was broken. My Viking solemnly averring, that +he would eat nothing more of her concocting, for fear of being +poisoned. For myself, I almost believed, that there was malice enough +in the minx to give us our henbane broth. + +But what said Samoa to all this? Passing over the matter of the +cookery, will it be credited, that living right among us as he did, he +was yet blind to the premeditated though unachieved peccadilloes of his +spouse? Yet so it was. And thus blind was Belisarius himself, +concerning the intrigues of Antonina. + +Witness that noble dame’s affair with the youth Theodosius; when her +deluded lord charged upon the scandal-mongers with the very horns she +had bestowed upon him. + +Upon one occasion, seized with a sudden desire to palliate Annatoo’s +thievings, Samoa proudly intimated, that the lady was the most virtuous +of her sex. + +But alas, poor Annatoo, why say more? And bethinking me of the hard +fate that so soon overtook thee, I almost repent what has already and +too faithfully been portrayed. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVI. +The Parki Gives Up The Ghost + + +A long calm in the boat, and now, God help us, another in the +brigantine. It was airless and profound. + +In that hot calm, we lay fixed and frozen in like Parry at the Pole. +The sun played upon the glassy sea like the sun upon the glaciers. + +At the end of two days we lifted up our eyes and beheld a low, +creeping, hungry cloud expanding like an army, wing and wing, along the +eastern horizon. Instantly Jarl bode me take heed. + +Here be it said, that though for weeks and weeks reign over the +equatorial latitudes of the Pacific, the mildest and sunniest of days; +that nevertheless, when storms do come, they come in their strength: +spending in a few, brief blasts their concentrated rage. They come like +the Mamelukes: they charge, and away. + +It wanted full an hour to sunset; but the sun was well nigh obscured. +It seemed toiling among bleak Scythian steeps in the hazy background. +Above the storm-cloud flitted ominous patches of scud, rapidly +advancing and receding: Attila’s skirmishers, thrown forward in the van +of his Huns. Beneath, a fitful shadow slid along the surface. As we +gazed, the cloud came nearer; accelerating its approach. + +With all haste we proceeded to furl the sails, which, owing to the +calm, had been hanging loose in the brails. And by help of a spare +boom, used on the forecastle-deck sit a sweep or great oar, we +endeavored to cast the brigantine’s head toward the foe. + +The storm seemed about to overtake us; but we felt no breeze. The +noiseless cloud stole on; its advancing shadow lowering over a distinct +and prominent milk-white crest upon the surface of the ocean. But now +this line of surging foam came rolling down upon us like a white charge +of cavalry: mad Hotspur and plumed Murat at its head; pouring right +forward in a continuous frothy cascade, which curled over, and fell +upon the glassy sea before it. + +Still, no breath of air. But of a sudden, like a blow from a man’s +hand, and before our canvas could be secured, the stunned craft, giving +one lurch to port, was stricken down on her beam-ends; the roaring tide +dashed high up against her windward side, and drops of brine fell upon +the deck, heavy as drops of gore. + +It was all a din and a mist; a crashing of spars and of ropes; a +horrible blending of sights and of sounds; as for an instant we seemed +in the hot heart of the gale; our cordage, like harp-strings, shrieking +above the fury of the blast. The masts rose, and swayed, and dipped +their trucks in the sea. And like unto some stricken buffalo brought +low to the plain, the brigantine’s black hull, shaggy with sea-weed, +lay panting on its flank in the foam. + +Frantically we clung to the uppermost bulwarks. And now, loud above the +roar of the sea, was suddenly heard a sharp, splintering sound, as of a +Norway woodman felling a pine in the forest. It was brave Jarl, who +foremost of all had snatched from its rack against the mainmast, the +ax, always there kept. + +“Cut the lanyards to windward!” he cried; and again buried his ax into +the mast. He was quickly obeyed. And upon cutting the third lanyard of +the five, he shouted for us to pause. Dropping his ax, he climbed up to +windward. As he clutched the rail, the wounded mast snapped in twain +with a report like a cannon. A slight smoke was perceptible where it +broke. The remaining lanyards parted. From the violent strain upon +them, the two shrouds flew madly into the air, and one of the great +blocks at their ends, striking Annatoo upon the forehead, she let go +her hold upon a stanchion, and sliding across the aslant deck, was +swallowed up in the whirlpool under our lea. Samoa shrieked. But there +was no time to mourn; no hand could reach to save. + +By the connecting stays, the mainmast carried over with it the +foremast; when we instantly righted, and for the time were saved; my +own royal Viking our saviour. + +The first fury of the gale was gone. But far to leeward was seen the +even, white line of its onset, pawing the ocean into foam. All round +us, the sea boiled like ten thousand caldrons; and through eddy, wave, +and surge, our almost water-logged craft waded heavily; every dead +clash ringing hollow against her hull, like blows upon a coffin. + +We floated a wreck. With every pitch we lifted our dangling jib-boom +into the air; and beating against the side, were the shattered +fragments of the masts. From these we made all haste to be free, by +cutting the rigging that held them. + +Soon, the worst of the gale was blown over. But the sea ran high. Yet +the rack and scud of the tempest, its mad, tearing foam, was subdued +into immense, long-extended, and long-rolling billows; the white cream +on their crests like snow on the Andes. Ever and anon we hung poised on +their brows; when the furrowed ocean all round looked like a panorama +from Chimborazo. + +A few hours more, and the surges went down. There was a moderate sea, a +steady breeze, and a clear, starry sky. Such was the storm that came +after our calm. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVII. +Once More They Take To The Chamois + + +Try the pumps. We dropped the sinker, and found the Parki bleeding at +every pore. Up from her well, the water, spring-like, came bubbling, +pure and limpid as the water of Saratoga. Her time had come. But by +keeping two hands at the pumps, we had no doubt she would float till +daylight; previous to which we liked not to abandon her. + +The interval was employed in clanging at the pump-breaks, and preparing +the Chamois for our reception. So soon as the sea permitted, we lowered +it over the side; and letting it float under the stern, stowed it with +water and provisions, together with various other things, including +muskets and cutlasses. + +Shortly after daylight, a violent jostling and thumping under foot +showed that the water, gaining rapidly in the, hold, spite of all +pumping, had floated the lighter casks up-ward to the deck, against +which they were striking. + +Now, owing to the number of empty butts in the hold, there would have +been, perhaps, but small danger of the vessel’s sinking outright—all +awash as her decks would soon be—were it not, that many of her timbers +were of a native wood, which, like the Teak of India, is specifically +heavier than water. This, with the pearl shells on board, counteracted +the buoyancy of the casks. + +At last, the sun—long waited for—arose; the Parki meantime sinking +lower and lower. + +All things being in readiness, we proceeded to embark from the wreck, +as from a wharf. + +But not without some show of love for our poor brigantine. + +To a seaman, a ship is no piece of mechanism merely; but a creature of +thoughts and fancies, instinct with life. Standing at her vibrating +helm, you feel her beating pulse. I have loved ships, as I have loved +men. + +To abandon the poor Parki was like leaving to its fate something that +could feel. It was meet that she should die decently and bravely. + +All this thought the Skyeman. Samoa and I were in the boat, calling +upon him to enter quickly, lest the vessel should sink, and carry us +down in the eddies; for already she had gone round twice. But cutting +adrift the last fragments of her broken shrouds, and putting her decks +in order, Jarl buried his ax in the splintered stump of the mainmast, +and not till then did he join us. + +We slowly cheered, and sailed away. + +Not ten minutes after, the hull rolled convulsively in the sea; went +round once more; lifted its sharp prow as a man with arms pointed for a +dive; gave a long seething plunge; and went down. + +Many of her old planks were twice wrecked; once strown upon ocean’s +beach; now dropped into its lowermost vaults, with the bones of drowned +ships and drowned men. + +Once more afloat in our shell! But not with the intrepid spirit that +shoved off with us from the deck of the Arcturion. A bold deed done +from impulse, for the time carries few or no misgivings along with it. +But forced upon you, its terrors stare you in the face. So now. I had +pushed from the Arcturion with a stout heart; but quitting the sinking +Parki, my heart sunk with her. + +With a fair wind, we held on our way westward, hoping to see land +before many days. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVIII. +The Sea On Fire + + +The night following our abandonment of the Parki, was made memorable by +a remarkable spectacle. + +Slumbering in the bottom of the boat, Jarl and I were suddenly awakened +by Samoa. Starting, we beheld the ocean of a pallid white color, +corruscating all over with tiny golden sparkles. But the pervading hue +of the water cast a cadaverous gleam upon the boat, so that we looked +to each other like ghosts. For many rods astern our wake was revealed +in a line of rushing illuminated foam; while here and there beneath the +surface, the tracks of sharks were denoted by vivid, greenish trails, +crossing and recrossing each other in every direction. Farther away, +and distributed in clusters, floated on the sea, like constellations in +the heavens, innumerable Medusae, a species of small, round, refulgent +fish, only to be met with in the South Seas and the Indian Ocean. + +Suddenly, as we gazed, there shot high into the air a bushy jet of +flashes, accompanied by the unmistakable deep breathing sound of a +sperm whale. Soon, the sea all round us spouted in fountains of fire; +and vast forms, emitting a glare from their flanks, and ever and anon +raising their heads above water, and shaking off the sparkles, showed +where an immense shoal of Cachalots had risen from below to sport in +these phosphorescent billows. + +The vapor jetted forth was far more radiant than any portion of the +sea; ascribable perhaps to the originally luminous fluid contracting +still more brilliancy from its passage through the spouting canal of +the whales. + +We were in great fear, lest without any vicious intention the +Leviathans might destroy us, by coming into close contact with our +boat. We would have shunned them; but they were all round and round us. +Nevertheless we were safe; for as we parted the pallid brine, the +peculiar irradiation which shot from about our keel seemed to deter +them. Apparently discovering us of a sudden, many of them plunged +headlong down into the water, tossing their fiery tails high into the +air, and leaving the sea still more sparkling from the violent surging +of their descent. + +Their general course seemed the same as our own; to the westward. To +remove from them, we at last out oars, and pulled toward the north. So +doing, we were steadily pursued by a solitary whale, that must have +taken our Chamois for a kindred fish. Spite of all our efforts, he drew +nearer and nearer; at length rubbing his fiery flank against the +Chamois’ gunwale, here and there leaving long strips of the glossy +transparent substance which thin as gossamer invests the body of the +Cachalot. + +In terror at a sight so new, Samoa shrank. But Jarl and I, more used to +the intimate companionship of the whales, pushed the boat away from it +with our oars: a thing often done in the fishery. + +The close vicinity of the whale revived in the so long astute Skyeman +all the enthusiasm of his daring vocation. However quiet by nature, a +thorough-bred whaleman betrays no little excitement in sight of his +game. And it required some persuasion to prevent Jarl from darting his +harpoon: insanity under present circumstances; and of course without +object. But “Oh! for a dart,” cried my Viking. And “Where’s now our old +ship?” he added reminiscently. + +But to my great joy the monster at last departed; rejoining the shoal, +whose lofty spoutings of flame were still visible upon the distant line +of the horizon; showing there, like the fitful starts of the Aurora +Borealis. + +The sea retained its luminosity for about three hours; at the +expiration of half that period beginning to fade; and excepting +occasional faint illuminations consequent upon the rapid darting of +fish under water, the phenomenon at last wholly disappeared. + +Heretofore, I had beheld several exhibitions of marine phosphorescence, +both in the Atlantic and Pacific. But nothing in comparison with what +was seen that night. In the Atlantic, there is very seldom any portion +of the ocean luminous, except the crests of the waves; and these mostly +appear so during wet, murky weather. Whereas, in the Pacific, all +instances of the sort, previously corning under my notice, had been +marked by patches of greenish light, unattended with any pallidness of +sea. Save twice on the coast of Peru, where I was summoned from my +hammock to the alarming midnight cry of “All hands ahoy! tack ship!” +And rushing on deck, beheld the sea white as a shroud; for which reason +it was feared we were on soundings. + +Now, sailors love marvels, and love to repeat them. And from many an +old shipmate I have heard various sage opinings, concerning the +phenomenon in question. Dismissing, as destitute of sound philosophic +probability, the extravagant notion of one of my nautical friends—no +less a philosopher than my Viking himself—namely: that the +phosphoresence of the sea is caused by a commotion among the mermaids, +whose golden locks, all torn and disheveled, do irradiate the waters at +such times; I proceed to record more reliable theories. + +Faraday might, perhaps, impute the phenomenon to a peculiarly +electrical condition of the atmosphere; and to that solely. But herein, +my scientific friend would be stoutly contradicted by many intelligent +seamen, who, in part, impute it to the presence of large quantities of +putrescent animal matter; with which the sea is well known to abound. + +And it would seem not unreasonable to suppose, that it is by this means +that the fluid itself becomes charged with the luminous principle. Draw +a bucket of water from the phosphorescent ocean, and it still retains +traces of fire; but, standing awhile, this soon subsides. Now pour it +along the deck, and it is a stream of flame; caused by its renewed +agitation. Empty the bucket, and for a space sparkles cling to it +tenaciously; and every stave seems ignited. + +But after all, this seeming ignition of the sea can not be wholly +produced by dead matter therein. There are many living fish, +phosphorescent; and, under certain conditions, by a rapid throwing off +of luminous particles must largely contribute to the result. Not to +particularize this circumstance as true of divers species of sharks, +cuttle-fish, and many others of the larger varieties of the finny +tribes; the myriads of microscopic mollusca, well known to swarm off +soundings, might alone be deemed almost sufficient to kindle a fire in +the brine. + +But these are only surmises; likely, but uncertain. + +After science comes sentiment. + +A French naturalist maintains, that the nocturnal radiance of the +fire-fly is purposely intended as an attraction to the opposite sex; +that the artful insect illuminates its body for a beacon to love. Thus: +perched upon the edge of a leaf, and waiting the approach of her +Leander, who comes buffeting with his wings the aroma of the flowers, +some insect Hero may show a torch to her gossamer gallant. + +But alas, thrice alas, for the poor little fire-fish of the sea, whose +radiance but reveals them to their foes, and lights the way to their +destruction. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIX. +They Fall In With Strangers + + +After quitting the Parki, we had much calm weather, varied by light +breezes. And sailing smoothly over a sea, so recently one sheet of +foam, I could not avoid bethinking me, how fortunate it was, that the +gale had overtaken us in the brigantine, and not in the Chamois. For +deservedly high as the whale-shallop ranks as a sea boat; still, in a +severe storm, the larger your craft the greater your sense of security. +Wherefore, the thousand reckless souls tenanting a line-of- battle ship +scoff at the most awful hurricanes; though, in reality, they may be +less safe in their wooden-walled Troy, than those who contend with the +gale in a clipper. + +But not only did I congratulate myself upon salvation from the past, +but upon the prospect for the future. For storms happening so seldom in +these seas, one just blown over is almost a sure guarantee of very many +weeks’ calm weather to come. + +Now sun followed sun; and no land. And at length it almost seemed as if +we must have sailed past the remotest presumable westerly limit of the +chain of islands we sought; a lurking suspicion which I sedulously kept +to myself However, I could not but nourish a latent faith that all +would yet be well. + +On the ninth day my forebodings were over. In the gray of the dawn, +perched upon the peak of our sail, a noddy was seen fast asleep. This +freak was true to the nature of that curious fowl, whose name is +significant of its drowsiness. Its plumage was snow-white, its bill and +legs blood-red; the latter looking like little pantalettes. In a sly +attempt at catching the bird, Samoa captured three tail- feathers; the +alarmed creature flying away with a scream, and leaving its quills in +his hand. + +Sailing on, we gradually broke in upon immense low-sailing flights of +other aquatic fowls, mostly of those species which are seldom found far +from land: terns, frigate-birds, mollymeaux, reef-pigeons, boobies, +gulls, and the like. They darkened the air; their wings making overhead +an incessant rustling like the simultaneous turning over of ten +thousand leaves. The smaller sort skimmed the sea like pebbles sent +skipping from the shore. Over these, flew myriads of birds of broader +wing. While high above all, soared in air the daring “Diver,” or +sea-kite, the power of whose vision is truly wonderful. It perceives +the little flying-fish in the water, at a height which can not be less +than four hundred feet. Spirally wheeling and screaming as it goes, the +sea-kite, bill foremost, darts downward, swoops into the water, and for +a moment altogether disappearing, emerges at last; its prey firmly +trussed in its claws. But bearing it aloft, the bold bandit is quickly +assailed by other birds of prey, that strive to wrest from him his +booty. And snatched from his talons, you see the fish falling through +the air, till again caught up in the very act of descent, by the +fleetest of its pursuers. + +Leaving these sights astern, we presently picked up the slimy husk of a +cocoanut, all over green barnacles. And shortly after, passed two or +three limbs of trees, and the solitary trunk of a palm; which, upon +sailing nearer, seemed but very recently started on its endless voyage. +As noon came on; the dark purple land-haze, which had been dimly +descried resting upon the western horizon, was very nearly obscured. +Nevertheless, behind that dim drapery we doubted not bright boughs were +waving. + +We were now in high spirits. Samoa between times humming to himself +some heathenish ditty, and Jarl ten times more intent on his silence +than ever; yet his eye full of expectation and gazing broad off from +our bow. Of a sudden, shading his face with his hand, he gazed fixedly +for an instant, and then springing to his feet, uttered the long-drawn +sound—“Sail ho!” + +Just tipping the furthest edge of the sky was a little speck, dancing +into view every time we rose upon the swells. It looked like one of +many birds; for half intercepting our view, fell showers of plumage: a +flight of milk-white noddies flying downward to the sea. + +But soon the birds are seen no more. Yet there remains the speck; +plainly a sail; but too small for a ship. Was it a boat after a whale? +The vessel to which it belonged far astern, and shrouded by the haze? +So it seemed. + +Quietly, however, we waited the stranger’s nearer approach; confident, +that for some time he would not be able to perceive us, owing to our +being in what mariners denominate the “sun-glade,” or that part of the +ocean upon which the sun’s rays flash with peculiar intensity. + +As the sail drew nigh, its failing to glisten white led us to doubt +whether it was indeed a whale-boat. Presently, it showed yellow; and +Samoa declared, that it must be the sail of some island craft. True. +The stranger proving a large double-canoe, like those used by the +Polynesians in making passages between distant islands. + +The Upoluan was now clamorous for a meeting, to which Jarl was averse. +Deliberating a moment, I directed the muskets to be loaded; then +setting the sail the wind on our quarter—we headed away for the canoe, +now sailing at right angles with our previous course. + +Here it must be mentioned, that from the various gay cloths and other +things provided for barter by the captain of the Parki, I had very +strikingly improved my costume; making it free, flowing, and eastern. I +looked like an Emir. Nor had my Viking neglected to follow my example; +though with some few modifications of his own. With his long tangled +hair and harpoon, he looked like the sea-god, that boards ships, for +the first time crossing the Equator. For tatooed Samoa, he yet sported +both kilt and turban, reminding one of a tawny leopard, though his +spots were all in one place. Besides this raiment of ours, against +emergencies we had provided our boat with divers nankeens and silks. + +But now into full view comes a yoke of huge clumsy prows, shaggy with +carving, and driving through the water with considerable velocity; the +immense sprawling sail holding the wind like a bag. She seemed full of +men; and from the dissonant cries borne over to us, and the canoe’s +widely yawing, it was plain that we had occasioned no small sensation. +They seemed undetermined what course to pursue: whether to court a +meeting, or avoid it; whether to regard us as friends or foes. + +As we came still nearer, distinctly beholding their faces, we loudly +hailed them, inviting them to furl their sails, and allow us to board +them. But no answer was returned; their confusion increasing. And now, +within less than two ships’-lengths, they swept right across our bow, +gazing at us with blended curiosity and fear. + +Their craft was about thirty feet long, consisting of a pair of +parallel canoes, very narrow, and at the distance of a yard or so, +lengthwise, united by stout cross-timbers, lashed across the four +gunwales. Upon these timbers was a raised platform or dais, quite dry; +and astern an arched cabin or tent; behind which, were two broad-bladed +paddles terminating in rude shark-tails, by which the craft was +steered. + +The yard, spreading a yellow sail, was a crooked bough, supported +obliquely in the crotch of a mast, to which the green bark was still +clinging. Here and there were little tufts of moss. The high, beaked +prow of that canoe in which the mast was placed, resembled a rude +altar; and all round it was suspended a great variety of fruits, +including scores of cocoanuts, unhusked. This prow was railed off, +forming a sort of chancel within. + +The foremost beam, crossing the gunwales, extended some twelve feet +beyond the side of the dais; and at regular intervals hereupon, stout +cords were fastened, which, leading up to the head of the mast, +answered the purpose of shrouds. The breeze was now streaming fresh; +and, as if to force down into the water the windward side of the craft, +five men stood upon this long beam, grasping five shrouds. Yet they +failed to counterbalance the pressure of the sail; and owing to the +opposite inclination of the twin canoes, these living statues were +elevated high above the water; their appearance rendered still more +striking by their eager attitudes, and the apparent peril of their +position, as the mad spray from the bow dashed over them. Suddenly, the +Islanders threw their craft into the wind; while, for ourselves, we lay +on our oars, fearful of alarming them by now coming nearer. But hailing +them again, we said we were friends; and had friendly gifts for them, +if they would peaceably permit us to approach. This understood, there +ensued a mighty clamor; insomuch, that I bade Jarl and Samoa out oars, +and row very gently toward the strangers. Whereupon, amid a storm of +vociferations, some of them hurried to the furthest side of their dais; +standing with arms arched over their heads, as if for a dive; others +menacing us with clubs and spears; and one, an old man with a bamboo +trellis on his head forming a sort of arbor for his hair, planted +himself full before the tent, stretching behind him a wide plaited +sling. + +Upon this hostile display, Samoa dropped his oar, and brought his piece +to bear upon the old man, who, by his attitude, seemed to menace us +with the fate of the great braggart of Gath. But I quickly knocked down +the muzzle of his musket, and forbade the slightest token of hostility; +enjoining it upon my companions, nevertheless, to keep well on their +guard. + +We now ceased rowing, and after a few minutes’ uproar in the canoe, +they ran to the steering-paddles, and forcing round their craft before +the wind, rapidly ran away from us. With all haste we set our sail, and +pulling also at our oars, soon overtook them, determined upon coming +into closer communion. + + + + +CHAPTER XL. +Sire And Sons + + +Seeing flight was useless, the Islanders again stopped their canoe, and +once more we cautiously drew nearer; myself crying out to them not to +be fearful; and Samoa, with the odd humor of his race, averring that he +had known every soul of them from his infancy. + +We approached within two or three yards; when we paused, which somewhat +allayed their alarm. Fastening a red China handkerchief to the blade of +our long mid-ship oar, I waved it in the air. A lively clapping of +hands, and many wild exclamations. + +While yet waving the flag, I whispered to Jarl to give the boat a sheer +toward the canoe, which being adroitly done, brought the bow, where I +stood, still nearer to the Islanders. I then dropped the silk among +them; and the Islander, who caught it, at once handed it to the warlike +old man with the sling; who, on seating himself, spread it before him; +while the rest crowding round, glanced rapidly from the wonderful gift, +to the more wonderful donors. + +This old man was the superior of the party. And Samoa asserted, that he +must be a priest of the country to which the Islanders belonged; that +the craft could be no other than one of their sacred canoes, bound on +some priestly voyage. All this he inferred from the altar- like prow, +and there being no women on board. + +Bent upon conciliating the old priest, I dropped into the canoe another +silk handkerchief; while Samoa loudly exclaimed, that we were only +three men, and were peaceably inclined. Meantime, old Aaron, fastening +the two silks crosswise over his shoulders, like a brace of Highland +plaids, crosslegged sat, and eyed us. + +It was a curious sight. The old priest, like a scroll of old parchment, +covered all over with hieroglyphical devices, harder to interpret, I’ll +warrant, than any old Sanscrit manuscript. And upon his broad brow, +deep-graven in wrinkles, were characters still more mysterious, which +no Champollion nor gipsy could have deciphered. He looked old as the +elderly hills; eyes sunken, though bright; and head white as the summit +of Mont Blanc. + +The rest were a youthful and comely set: their complexion that of Gold +Sherry, and all tattooed after this pattern: two broad cross- stripes +on the chest and back; reaching down to the waist, like a +foot-soldier’s harness. Their faces were full of expression; and their +mouths were full of fine teeth; so that the parting of their lips, was +as the opening of pearl oysters. Marked, here and there, after the +style of Tahiti, with little round figures in blue, dotted in the +middle with a spot of vermilion, their brawny brown thighs looked not +unlike the gallant hams of Westphalia, spotted with the red dust of +Cayenne. + +But what a marvelous resemblance in the features of all. Were they born +at one birth? This resemblance was heightened by their uniform marks. +But it was subsequently ascertained, that they were the children of one +sire; and that sire, old Aaron; who, no doubt, reposed upon his sons, +as an old general upon the trophies of his youth. + +They were the children of as many mothers; and he was training them up +for the priesthood. + + + + +CHAPTER XLI. +A Fray + + +So bent were the strangers upon concealing who they were, and the +object of their voyage, that it was some time ere we could obtain the +information we desired. + +They pointed toward the tent, as if it contained their Eleusinian +mysteries. And the old priest gave us to know, that it would be +profanation to enter it. + +But all this only roused my curiosity to unravel the wonder. + +At last I succeeded. + +In that mysterious tent was concealed a beautiful maiden. And, in +pursuance of a barbarous custom, by Aleema, the priest, she was being +borne an offering from the island of Amma to the gods of Tedaidee. + +Now, hearing of the maiden, I waited for no more. Need I add, how +stirred was my soul toward this invisible victim; and how hotly I +swore, that precious blood of hers should never smoke upon an altar. If +we drowned for it, I was bent upon rescuing the captive. But as yet, no +gentle signal of distress had been waved to us from the tent. Thence, +no sound could be heard, but an occasional rustle of the matting. Was +it possible, that one about to be immolated could proceed thus +tranquilly to her fate? + +But desperately as I resolved to accomplish the deliverance of the +maiden, it was best to set heedfully about it. I desired no shedding of +blood; though the odds were against us. + +The old priest seemed determined to prevent us from boarding his craft. +But being equally determined the other way, I cautiously laid the bow +of the Chamois against the canoe’s quarter, so as to present the +smallest possible chance for a hostile entrance into our boat. Then, +Samoa, knife in ear, and myself with a cutlass, stepped upon the dais, +leaving Jarl in the boat’s head, equipped with his harpoon; three +loaded muskets lying by his side. He was strictly enjoined to resist +the slightest demonstration toward our craft. + +As we boarded the canoe, the Islanders slowly retreated; meantime +earnestly conferring in whispers; all but the old priest, who, still +seated, presented an undaunted though troubled front. To our surprise, +he motioned us to sit down by him; which we did; taking care, however, +not to cut off our communication with Jarl. + +With the hope of inspiring good will, I now unfolded a roll of printed +cotton, and spreading it before the priest, directed his attention to +the pictorial embellishments thereon, representing some hundreds of +sailor boys simultaneously ascending some hundreds of uniform sections +of a ship’s rigging. Glancing at them a moment, by a significant sign, +he gave me to know, that long previous he himself had ascended the +shrouds of a ship. Making this allusion, his countenance was overcast +with a ferocious expression, as if something terrific was connected +with the reminiscence. But it soon passed away, and somewhat abruptly +he assumed an air of much merriment. + +While we were thus sitting together, and my whole soul full of the +thoughts of the captive, and how best to accomplish my purpose, and +often gazing toward the tent; I all at once noticed a movement among +the strangers. Almost in the same instant, Samoa, right across the face +of Aleema, and in his ordinary tones, bade me take heed to myself, for +mischief was brewing. Hardly was this warning uttered, when, with +carved clubs in their hands, the Islanders completely surrounded us. +Then up rose the old priest, and gave us to know, that we were wholly +in his power, and if we did not swear to depart in our boat forthwith, +and molest him no more, the peril be ours. + +“Depart and you live; stay and you die.” + +Fifteen to three. Madness to gainsay his mandate. Yet a beautiful +maiden was at stake. + +The knife before dangling in Samoa’s ear was now in his hand. Jarl +cried out for us to regain the boat, several of the Islanders making a +rush for it. No time to think. All passed quicker than it can be said. +They closed in upon us, to push us from the canoe: Rudely the old +priest flung me from his side, menacing me with his dagger, the sharp +spine of a fish. A thrust and a threat! Ere I knew it, my cutlass made +a quick lunge. A curse from the priest’s mouth; red blood from his +side; he tottered, stared about him, and fell over like a brown hemlock +into the sea. A yell of maledictions rose on the air. A wild cry was +heard from the tent. Making a dead breach among the crowd, we now +dashed side by side for the boat. Springing into it, we found Jarl +battling with two Islanders; while the rest were still howling upon the +dais. Rage and grief had almost disabled them. + +With one stroke of my cutlass, I now parted the line that held us to +the canoe, and with Samoa falling upon the two Islanders, by Jarl’s +help, we quickly mastered them; forcing them down into the bottom of +the boat. + +The Skyeman and Samoa holding passive the captives, I quickly set our +sail, and snatching the sheet at the cavil, we rapidly shot from the +canoe. The strangers defying us with their spears; several couching +them as if to dart; while others held back their hands, as if to +prevent them from jeopardizing the lives of their countrymen in the +Chamois. + +Seemingly untoward events oftentimes lead to successful results: Far +from destroying all chance of rescuing the captive, our temporary +flight, indispensable for the safety of Jarl, only made the success of +our enterprise more probable. For having made prisoners two of the +strangers, I determined to retain them as hostages, through whom to +effect my plans without further bloodshed. + +And here it must needs be related, that some of the natives were +wounded in the fray: while all three of their assailants had received +several bruises. + + + + +CHAPTER XLII. +Remorse + + +During the skirmish not a single musket had been discharged. The first +snatched by Jarl had missed fire, and ere he could seize another, it +was close quarters with him, and no gestures to spare. His harpoon was +his all. And truly, there is nothing like steel in a fray. It comes and +it goes with a will, and is never a-weary. Your sword is your life, and +that of your foe; to keep or to take as it happens. Closer home does it +go than a rammer; and fighting with steel is a play without ever an +interlude. There are points more deadly than bullets; and stocks packed +full of subtle tubes, whence comes an impulse more reliable than +powder. + +Binding our prisoners lengthwise across the boat’s seats, we rowed for +the canoe, making signs of amity. + +Now, if there be any thing fitted to make a high tide ebb in the veins, +it is the sight of a vanquished foe, inferior to yourself in powers of +destruction; but whom some necessity has forced you to subdue. All +victories are not triumphs, nor all who conquer, heroes. + +As we drew near the canoe, it was plain, that the loss of their sire +had again for the instant overcome the survivors. Raising hands, they +cursed us; and at intervals sent forth a low, piercing wail, peculiar +to their race. As before, faint cries were heard from the tent. And all +the while rose and fell on the sea, the ill-fated canoe. + +As I gazed at this sight, what iron mace fell on my soul; what curse +rang sharp in my ear! It was I, who was the author of the deed that +caused the shrill wails that I heard. By this hand, the dead man had +died. Remorse smote me hard; and like lightning I asked myself, whether +the death-deed I had done was sprung of a virtuous motive, the rescuing +a captive from thrall; or whether beneath that pretense, I had engaged +in this fatal affray for some other, and selfish purpose; the +companionship of a beautiful maid. But throttling the thought, I swore +to be gay. Am I not rescuing the maiden? Let them go down who withstand +me. + +At the dismal spectacle before him, Jarl, hitherto menacing our +prisoners with his weapon, in order to intimidate their countrymen, +honest Jarl dropped his harpoon. But shaking his knife in the air, +Samoa yet defied the strangers; nor could we prevent him. His +heathenish blood was up. + +Standing foremost in the boat, I now assured the strangers, that all we +sought at their hands was the maiden in the tent. That captive +surrendered, our own, unharmed, should be restored. If not, they must +die. With a cry, they started to their feet, and brandished their +clubs; but, seeing Jarl’s harpoon quivering over the hearts of our +prisoners, they quickly retreated; at last signifying their +acquiescence in my demand. Upon this, I sprang to the dais, and across +it indicating a line near the bow, signed the Islanders to retire +beyond it. Then, calling upon them one by one to deliver their weapons, +they were passed into the boat. + +The Chamois was now brought round to the canoe’s stern; and leaving +Jarl to defend it as before, the Upoluan rejoined me on the dais. By +these precautions—the hostages still remaining bound hand and foot in +the boat—we deemed ourselves entirely secure. + +Attended by Samoa, I stood before the tent, now still as the grave. + + + + +CHAPTER XLIII. +The Tent Entered + + +By means of thin spaces between the braids of matting, the place was +open to the air, but not to view. There was also a round opening on one +side, only large enough, however, to admit the arm; but this aperture +was partially closed from within. In front, a deep-dyed rug of osiers, +covering the entrance way, was intricately laced to the standing part +of the tent. As I divided this lacing with my cutlass, there arose an +outburst of voices from the Islanders. And they covered their faces, as +the interior was revealed to my gaze. + +Before me crouched a beautiful girl. Her hands were drooping. And, like +a saint from a shrine, she looked sadly out from her long, fair hair. A +low wail issued from her lips, and she trembled like a sound. There +were tears on her cheek, and a rose-colored pearl on her bosom. + +Did I dream?—A snow-white skin: blue, firmament eyes: Golconda locks. +For an instant spell-bound I stood; while with a slow, apprehensive +movement, and still gazing fixedly, the captive gathered more closely +about her a gauze-like robe. Taking one step within, and partially +dropping the curtain of the tent, I so stood, as to have both sight and +speech of Samoa, who tarried without; while the maiden, crouching in +the farther corner of the retreat, was wholly screened from all eyes +but mine. + +Crossing my hands before me, I now stood without speaking. For the soul +of me, I could not link this mysterious creature with the tawny +strangers. She seemed of another race. So powerful was this impression, +that unconsciously, I addressed her in my own tongue. She started, and +bending over, listened intently, as if to the first faint echo of +something dimly remembered. Again I spoke, when throwing back her hair, +the maiden looked up with a piercing, bewildered gaze. But her eyes +soon fell, and bending over once more, she resumed her former attitude. +At length she slowly chanted to herself several musical words, unlike +those of the Islanders; but though I knew not what they meant, they +vaguely seemed familiar. + +Impatient to learn her story, I now questioned her in Polynesian. But +with much earnestness, she signed me to address her as before. Soon +perceiving, however, that without comprehending the meaning of the +words I employed, she seemed merely touched by something pleasing in +their sound, I once more addressed her in Polynesian; saying that I was +all eagerness to hear her history. + +After much hesitation she complied; starting with alarm at every sound +from without; yet all the while deeply regarding me. + +Broken as these disclosures were at the time, they are here presented +in the form in which they were afterward more fully narrated. + +So unearthly was the story, that at first I little comprehended it; and +was almost persuaded that the luckless maiden was some beautiful +maniac. + +She declared herself more than mortal, a maiden from Oroolia, the +Island of Delights, somewhere in the paradisiacal archipelago of the +Polynesians. To this isle, while yet an infant, by some mystical power, +she had been spirited from Amma, the place of her nativity. Her name +was Yillah. And hardly had the waters of Oroolia washed white her olive +skin, and tinged her hair with gold, when one day strolling in the +woodlands, she was snared in the tendrils of a vine. Drawing her into +its bowers, it gently transformed her into one of its blossoms, leaving +her conscious soul folded up in the transparent petals. + +Here hung Yillah in a trance, the world without all tinged with the +rosy hue of her prison. At length when her spirit was about to burst +forth in the opening flower, the blossom was snapped from its stem; and +borne by a soft wind to the sea; where it fell into the opening valve +of a shell; which in good time was cast upon the beach of the Island of +Amma. + +In a dream, these events were revealed to Aleema the priest; who by a +spell unlocking its pearly casket, took forth the bud, which now showed +signs of opening in the reviving air, and bore faint shadowy +revealings, as of the dawn behind crimson clouds. Suddenly expanding, +the blossom exhaled away in perfumes; floating a rosy mist in the air. +Condensing at last, there emerged from this mist the same radiant young +Yillah as before; her locks all moist, and a rose- colored pearl on her +bosom. Enshrined as a goddess, the wonderful child now tarried in the +sacred temple of Apo, buried in a dell; never beheld of mortal eyes +save Aleema’s. + +Moon after moon passed away, and at last, only four days gone by, +Aleema came to her with a dream; that the spirits in Oroolia had +recalled her home by the way of Tedaidee, on whose coast gurgled up in +the sea an enchanted spring; which streaming over upon the brine, +flowed on between blue watery banks; and, plunging into a vortex, went +round and round, descending into depths unknown. Into this whirlpool +Yillah was to descend in a canoe, at last to well up in an inland +fountain of Oroolia. + + + + +CHAPTER XLIV. +Away! + + +Though clothed in language of my own, the maiden’s story is in +substance the same as she related. Yet were not these things narrated +as past events; she merely recounted them as impressions of her +childhood, and of her destiny yet unaccomplished. And mystical as the +tale most assuredly was, my knowledge of the strange arts of the island +priesthood, and the rapt fancies indulged in by many of their victims, +deprived it in good part of the effect it otherwise would have +produced. + +For ulterior purposes connected with their sacerdotal supremacy, the +priests of these climes oftentimes secrete mere infants in their +temples; and jealously secluding them from all intercourse with the +world, craftily delude them, as they grow up, into the wildest +conceits. + +Thus wrought upon, their pupils almost lose their humanity in the +constant indulgence of seraphic imaginings. In many cases becoming +inspired as oracles; and as such, they are sometimes resorted to by +devotees; always screened from view, however, in the recesses of the +temples. But in every instance, their end is certain. Beguiled with +some fairy tale about revisiting the islands of Paradise, they are led +to the secret sacrifice, and perish unknown to their kindred. + +But, would that all this had been hidden from me at the time. For +Yillah was lovely enough to be really divine; and so I might have been +tranced into a belief of her mystical legends. + +But with what passionate exultation did I find myself the deliverer of +this beautiful maiden; who, thinking no harm, and rapt in a dream, was +being borne to her fate on the coast of Tedaidee. Nor now, for a +moment, did the death of Aleema her guardian seem to hang heavy upon my +heart. I rejoiced that I had sent him to his gods; that in place of the +sea moss growing over sweet Yillah drowned in the sea, the vile priest +himself had sunk to the bottom. + +But though he had sunk in the deep, his ghost sunk not in the deep +waters of my soul. However in exultations its surface foamed up, at +bottom guilt brooded. Sifted out, my motives to this enterprise +justified not the mad deed, which, in a moment of rage, I had done: +though, those motives had been covered with a gracious pretense; +concealing myself from myself. But I beat down the thought. + +In relating her story, the maiden frequently interrupted it with +questions concerning myself:—Whence I came: being white, from Oroolia? +Whither I was going: to Amma? And what had happened to Aleema? For she +had been dismayed at the fray, though knowing not what it could mean; +and she had heard the priest’s name called upon in lamentations. These +questions for the time I endeavored to evade; only inducing her to +fancy me some gentle demigod, that had come over the sea from her own +fabulous Oroolia. And all this she must verily have believed. For whom, +like me, ere this could she have beheld? Still fixed she her eyes upon +me strangely, and hung upon the accents of my voice. + +While this scene was passing, the strangers began to show signs of +impatience, and a voice from the Chamois repeatedly hailed us to +accelerate our movements. + +My course was quickly decided. The only obstacle to be encountered was +the possibility of Yillah’s alarm at being suddenly borne into my prow. +For this event I now sought to prepare her. I informed the damsel that +Aleema had been dispatched on a long errand to Oroolia; leaving to my +care, for the present, the guardianship of the lovely Yillah; and that +therefore, it was necessary to carry her tent into my own canoe, then +waiting to receive it. + +This intelligence she received with the utmost concern; and not knowing +to what her perplexity might lead, I thought fit to transport her into +the Chamois, while yet overwhelmed by the announcement of my intention. + +Quitting her retreat, I apprised Jarl of my design; and then, no more +delay! + +At bottom, the tent was attached to a light framework of bamboos; and +from its upper corners, four cords, like those of a marquee, confined +it to the dais. These, Samoa’s knife soon parted; when lifting the +light tent, we speedily transferred it to the Chamois; a wild yell +going up from the Islanders, which drowned the faint cries of the +maiden. But we heeded not the din. Toss in the fruit, hanging from the +altar-prow! It was done; and then running up our sail, we glided +away;—Chamois, tent, hostages, and all. Rushing to the now vacant stern +of their canoe, the Islanders once more lifted up their hands and their +voices in curses. + +A suitable distance gained, we paused to fling overboard the arms we +had taken; and Jarl proceeded to liberate the hostages. + +Meanwhile, I entered the tent, and by many tokens, sought to allay the +maiden’s alarm. Thus engaged, violent plunges were heard: our prisoners +taking to the sea to regain their canoe. All dripping, they were +received by their brethren with wild caresses. + +From something now said by the captives, the rest seemed suddenly +inspirited with hopes of revenge; again wildly shaking their spears, +just before picked up from the sea. With great clamor and confusion +they soon set their mat-sail; and instead of sailing southward for +Tedaidee, or northward for Amma their home, they steered straight after +us, in our wake. + +Foremost in the prow stood three; javelins poised for a dart; at +intervals, raising a yell. + +Did they mean to pursue me? Full in my rear they came on, baying like +hounds on their game. Yillah trembled at their cries. My own heart beat +hard with undefinable dread. The corpse of Aleema seemed floating +before: its avengers were raging behind. + +But soon these phantoms departed. For very soon it appeared that in +vain the pagans pursued. Their craft, our fleet Chamois outleaped. And +farther and farther astern dropped the evil-boding canoe, till at last +but a speck; when a great swell of the sea surged up before it, and it +was seen no more. Samoa swore that it must have swamped, and gone down. +But however it was, my heart lightened apace. I saw none but ourselves +on the sea: I remembered that our keel left no track as it sailed. + +Let the Oregon Indian through brush, bramble, and brier, hunt his +enemy’s trail, far over the mountains and down in the vales; comes he +to the water, he snuffs idly in air. + + + + +CHAPTER XLV. +Reminiscences + + +In resecuing the gentle Yillah from the hands of the Islanders, a +design seemed accomplished. But what was now to be done? Here, in our +adventurous Chamois, was a damsel more lovely than the flushes of +morning; and for companions, whom had she but me and my comrades? +Besides, her bosom still throbbed with alarms, her fancies all roving +through mazes. + +How subdue these dangerous imaginings? How gently dispel them? + +But one way there was: to lead her thoughts toward me, as her friend +and preserver; and a better and wiser than Aleema the priest. Yet could +not this be effected but by still maintaining my assumption of a divine +origin in the blessed isle of Oroolia; and thus fostering in her heart +the mysterious interest, with which from the first she had regarded me. +But if punctilious reserve on the part of her deliverer should teach +her to regard him as some frigid stranger from the Arctic Zone, what +sympathy could she have for him? and hence, what peace of mind, having +no one else to cling to? + +Now re-entering the tent, she again inquired where tarried Aleema. + +“Think not of him, sweet Yillah,” I cried. “Look on me. Am I not white +like yourself? Behold, though since quitting Oroolia the sun has dyed +my cheek, am I not even as you? Am I brown like the dusky Aleema? They +snatched you away from your isle in the sea, too early for you to +remember me there. But you have not been forgotten by me, sweetest +Yillah. Ha! ha! shook we not the palm-trees together, and chased we not +the rolling nuts down the glen? Did we not dive into the grotto on the +sea-shore, and come up together in the cool cavern in the hill? In my +home in Oroolia, dear Yillah, I have a lock of your hair, ere yet it +was golden: a little dark tress like a ring. How your cheeks were then +changing from olive to white. And when shall I forget the hour, that I +came upon you sleeping among the flowers, with roses and lilies for +cheeks. Still forgetful? Know you not my voice? Those little spirits in +your eyes have seen me before. They mimic me now as they sport in their +lakes. All the past a dim blank? Think of the time when we ran up and +down in our arbor, where the green vines grew over the great ribs of +the stranded whale. Oh Yillah, little Yillah, has it all come to this? +am I forever forgotten? Yet over the wide watery world have I sought +thee: from isle to isle, from sea to sea. And now we part not. Aleema +is gone. My prow shall keep kissing the waves, till it kisses the beach +at Oroolia. Yillah, look up.” + +Sunk the ghost of Aleema: Sweet Yillah was mine! + + + + +CHAPTER XLVI. +The Chamois With A Roving Commission + + +Through the assiduity of my Viking, ere nightfall our Chamois was again +in good order. And with many subtle and seamanlike splices the light +tent was lashed in its place; the sail taken up by a reef. + +My comrades now questioned me, as to my purposes; whether they had been +modified by the events of the day. I replied that our destination was +still the islands to the westward. + +But from these we had steadily been drifting all the morning long; so +that now no loom of the land was visible. But our prow was kept +pointing as before. + +As evening came on, my comrades fell fast asleep, leaving me at the +helm. + +How soft and how dreamy the light of the hour. The rays of the sun, +setting behind golden-barred clouds, came to me like the gleaming of a +shaded light behind a lattice. And the low breeze, pervaded with the +peculiar balm of the mid-Pacific near land, was fragrant as the breath +of a bride. + +Such was the scene; so still and witching that the hand of Yillah in +mine seemed no hand, but a touch. Visions flitted before me and in me; +something hummed in my ear; all the air was a lay. + +And now entered a thought into my heart. I reflected how serenely we +might thus glide along, far removed from all care and anxiety. And +then, what different scenes might await us upon any of the shores +roundabout. But there seemed no danger in the balmy sea; the assured +vicinity of land imparting a sense of security. We had ample supplies +for several days more, and thanks to the Pagan canoe, an abundance of +fruit. + +Besides, what cared I now for the green groves and bright shore? Was +not Yillah my shore and my grove? my meadow, my mead, my soft shady +vine, and my arbor? Of all things desirable and delightful, the full- +plumed sheaf, and my own right arm the band? Enough: no shore for me +yet. One sweep of the helm, and our light prow headed round toward the +vague land of song, sun, and vine: the fabled South. + +As we glided along, strange Yillah gazed down in the sea, and would +fain have had me plunge into it with her, to rove through its depths. +But I started dismayed; in fancy, I saw the stark body of the priest +drifting by. Again that phantom obtruded; again guilt laid his red hand +on my soul. But I laughed. Was not Yillah my own? by my arm rescued +from ill? To do her a good, I had periled myself. So down, down, +Aleema. + +When next morning, starting from slumber, my comrades beheld the sun on +our beam, instead of astern as before at that hour, they eagerly +inquired, “Whither now?” But very briefly I gave them to know, that +after devoting the night to the due consideration of a matter so +important, I had determined upon voyaging for the island Tedaidee, in +place of the land to the westward. + +At this, they were not displeased. But to tell the plain truth, I +harbored some shadowy purpose of merely hovering about for a while, +till I felt more landwardly inclined. + +But had I not declared to Yillah, that our destination was the fairy +isle she spoke of, even Oroolia? Yet that shore was so exceedingly +remote, and the folly of endeavoring to reach it in a craft built with +hands, so very apparent, that what wonder I really nourished no thought +of it? + +So away floated the Chamois, like a vagrant cloud in the heavens: +bound, no one knew whither. + + + + +CHAPTER XLVII. +Yillah, Jarl, And Samoa + + +But time to tell, how Samoa and Jarl regarded this mystical Yillah; and +how Yillah regarded them. + +As Beauty from the Beast, so at first shrank the damsel from my one- +armed companion. But seeing my confidence in the savage, a reaction +soon followed. And in accordance with that curious law, by which, under +certain conditions, the ugliest mortals become only amiably hideous, +Yillah at length came to look upon Samoa as a sort of harmless and +good-natured goblin. Whence came he, she cared not; or what was his +history; or in what manner his fortunes were united to mine. + +May be, she held him a being of spontaneous origin. + +Now, as every where women are the tamers of the menageries of men; so +Yillah in good time tamed down Samoa to the relinquishment of that +horrible thing in his ear, and persuaded him to substitute a vacancy +for the bauble in his nose. On his part, however, all this was +conditional. He stipulated for the privilege of restoring both trinkets +upon suitable occasions. + +But if thus gayly the damsel sported with Samoa; how different his +emotions toward her? The fate to which she had been destined, and every +nameless thing about her, appealed to all his native superstitions, +which ascribed to beings of her complexion a more than terrestrial +origin. When permitted to approach her, he looked timid and awkwardly +strange; suggesting the likeness of some clumsy satyr, drawing in his +horns; slowly wagging his tail; crouching abashed before some radiant +spirit. + +And this reverence of his was most pleasing to me, Bravo! thought I; be +a pagan forever. No more than myself; for, after a different fashion, +Yillah was an idol to both. + +But what of my Viking? Why, of good Jarl I grieve to say, that the +old-fashioned interest he took in my affairs led him to look upon +Yillah as a sort of intruder, an Ammonite syren, who might lead me +astray. This would now and then provoke a phillipic; but he would only +turn toward my resentment his devotion; and then I was silent. + +Unsophisticated as a wild flower in the germ, Yillah seemed incapable +of perceiving the contrasted lights in which she was regarded by our +companions. And like a true beauty seemed to cherish the presumption, +that it was quite impossible for such a person as hers to prove +otherwise than irresistible to all. + +She betrayed much surprise at my Vikings appearance. But most of all +was she struck by a characteristic device upon the arm of the wonderful +mariner—our Saviour on the cross, in blue; with the crown of thorns, +and three drops of blood in vermilion, falling one by one from each +hand and foot. + +Now, honest Jarl did vastly pride himself upon this ornament. It was +the only piece of vanity about him. And like a lady keeping gloveless +her hand to show off a fine Turquoise ring, he invariably wore that +sleeve of his frock rolled up, the better to display the embellishment. + +And round and round would Yillah turn Jarl’s arm, till Jarl was fain to +stand firm, for fear of revolving all over. How such untutored homage +would have thrilled the heart of the ingenious artist! + +Eventually, through the Upoluan, she made overtures to the Skyeman, +concerning the possession of his picture in her own proper right. In +her very simplicity, little heeding, that like a landscape in fresco, +it could not be removed. + + + + +CHAPTER XLVIII. +Something Under The Surface + + +Not to omit an occurrence of considerable interest, we must needs here +present some account of a curious retinue of fish which overtook our +Chamois, a day or two after parting with the canoe. + +A violent creaming and frothing in our rear announced their approach. +Soon we found ourselves the nucleus of an incredible multitude of finny +creatures, mostly anonymous. + +First, far in advance of our prow, swam the helmeted Silver-heads; side +by side, in uniform ranks, like an army. Then came the Boneetas, with +their flashing blue flanks. Then, like a third distinct regiment, +wormed and twisted through the water like Archimedean screws, the +quivering Wriggle-tails; followed in turn by the rank and file of the +Trigger-fish—so called from their quaint dorsal fins being set in their +backs with a comical curve, as if at half-cock. Far astern the rear was +brought up by endless battalions of Yellow- backs, right martially +vested in buff. + +And slow sailing overhead were flights of birds; a wing in the air for +every fin in the sea. + +But let the sea-fowls fly on: turn we to the fish. + +Their numbers were amazing; countless as the tears shed for perfidious +lovers. Far abroad on both flanks, they swam in long lines, tier above +tier; the water alive with their hosts. Locusts of the sea, +peradventure, going to fall with a blight upon some green, mossy +province of Neptune. And tame and fearless they were, as the first fish +that swam in Euphrates; hardly evading the hand; insomuch that Samoa +caught many without lure or line. + +They formed a decorous escort; paddling along by our barnacled sides, +as if they had been with us from the very beginning; neither scared by +our craft’s surging in the water; nor in the least sympathetic at +losing a comrade by the hand of Samoa. They closed in their ranks and +swam on. + +How innocent, yet heartless they looked! Had a plank dropped out of our +boat, we had sunk to the bottom; and belike, our cheerful retinue would +have paid the last rites to our remains. + +But still we kept company; as sociably as you please; Samoa helping +himself when he listed, and Yillah clapping her hands as the radiant +creatures, by a simultaneous turning round on their silvery bellies, +caused the whole sea to glow like a burnished shield. + +But what has befallen this poor little Boneeta astern, that he swims so +toilingly on, with gills showing purple? What has he there, towing +behind? It is tangled sea-kelp clinging to its fins. But the clogged +thing strains to keep up with its fellows. Yet little they heed. Away +they go; every fish for itself, and any fish for Samoa. + +At last the poor Boneeta is seen no more. The myriad fins swim on; a +lonely waste, where the lost one drops behind. + +Strange fish! All the live-long day, they were there by our side; and +at night still tarried and shone; more crystal and scaly in the pale +moonbeams, than in the golden glare of the sun. + +How prettily they swim; all silver life; darting hither and thither +between their long ranks, and touching their noses, and scraping +acquaintance. No mourning they wear for the Boneeta left far astern; +nor for those so cruelly killed by Samoa. No, no; all is glee, fishy +glee, and frolicking fun; light hearts and light fins; gay backs and +gay spirits.—Swim away, swim away! my merry fins all. Let us roam the +flood; let us follow this monster fish with the barnacled sides; this +strange-looking fish, so high out of water; that goes without fins. +What fish can it be? What rippling is that? Dost hear the great monster +breathe? Why, ’tis sharp at both ends; a tail either way; nor eyes has +it any, nor mouth. What a curious fish! what a comical fish! But more +comical far, those creatures above, on its hollow back, clinging +thereto like the snaky eels, that cling and slide on the back of the +Sword fish, our terrible foe. But what curious eels these are! Do they +deem themselves pretty as we? No, no; for sure, they behold our limber +fins, our speckled and beautiful scales. Poor, powerless things! How +they must wish they were we, that roam the flood, and scour the seas +with a wish. Swim away; merry fins, swim away! Let him drop, that +fellow that halts; make a lane; close in, and fill up. Let him drown, +if he can not keep pace. No laggards for us:— + +We fish, we fish, we merrily swim, +We care not for friend nor for foe: + Our fins are stout, + Our tails are out, +As through the seas we go. + +Fish, Fish, we are fish with red gills; + Naught disturbs us, our blood is at zero: +We are buoyant because of our bags, + Being many, each fish is a hero. +We care not what is it, this life + That we follow, this phantom unknown: +To swim, it’s exceedingly pleasant,— + So swim away, making a foam. +This strange looking thing by our side, + Not for safety, around it we flee:— +Its shadow’s so shady, that’s all,— + We only swim under its lee. +And as for the eels there above, + And as for the fowls in the air, +We care not for them nor their ways, + As we cheerily glide afar! + +We fish, we fish, we merrily swim, +We care not for friend nor for foe: + Our fins are stout, + Our tails are out, +As through the seas we go. + + +But how now, my fine fish! what alarms your long ranks, and tosses them +all into a hubbub of scales and of foam? Never mind that long knave +with the spear there, astern. Pipe away, merry fish, and give us a +stave or two more, keeping time with your doggerel tails. But no, no! +their singing was over. Grim death, in the shape of a Chevalier, was +after them. + +How they changed their boastful tune! How they hugged the vilified +boat! How they wished they were in it, the braggarts! And how they all +tingled with fear! + +For, now here, now there, is heard a terrific rushing sound under +water, betokening the onslaught of the dread fish of prey, that with +spear ever in rest, charges in upon the out-skirts of the shoal, +transfixing the fish on his weapon. Re-treating and shaking them off, +the Chevalier devours them; then returns to the charge. + +Hugging the boat to desperation, the poor fish fairly crowded +themselves up to the surface, and floundered upon each other, as men +are lifted off their feet in a mob. They clung to us thus, out of a +fancied security in our presence. Knowing this, we felt no little alarm +for ourselves, dreading lest the Chevalier might despise our boat, full +as much as his prey; and in pursuing the fish, run through the poor +Chamois with a lunge. A jacket, rolled up, was kept in readiness to be +thrust into the first opening made; while as the thousand fins audibly +patted against our slender planks, we felt nervously enough; as if +treading upon thin, crackling ice. + +At length, to our no small delight, the enemy swam away; and again by +our side merrily paddled our escort; ten times merrier than ever. + + + + +CHAPTER XLIX. +Yillah + + +While for a few days, now this way, now that, as our craft glides +along, surrounded by these locusts of the deep, let the story of Yillah +flow on. + +Of her beauty say I nothing. It was that of a crystal lake in a +fathomless wood: all light and shade; full of fleeting revealings; now +shadowed in depths; now sunny in dimples; but all sparkling and +shifting, and blending together. + +But her wild beauty was a vail to things still more strange. As often +she gazed so earnestly into my eyes, like some pure spirit looking far +down into my soul, and seeing therein some upturned faces, I started in +amaze, and asked what spell was on me, that thus she gazed. + +Often she entreated me to repeat over and over again certain syllables +of my language. These she would chant to herself, pausing now and then, +as if striving to discover wherein lay their charm. + +In her accent, there was something very different from that of the +people of the canoe. Wherein lay the difference. I knew not; but it +enabled her to pronounce with readiness all the words which I taught +her; even as if recalling sounds long forgotten. + +If all this filled me with wonder, how much was that wonder increased, +and yet baffled again, by considering her complexion, and the cast of +her features. + +After endeavoring in various ways to account for these things, I was +led to imagine, that the damsel must be an Albino (Tulla) occasionally +to be met with among the people of the Pacific. These persons are of an +exceedingly delicate white skin, tinted with a faint rose hue, like the +lips of a shell. Their hair is golden. But, unlike the Albinos of other +climes, their eyes are invariably blue, and no way intolerant of light. + +As a race, the Tullas die early. And hence the belief, that they +pertain to some distant sphere, and only through irregularities in the +providence of the gods, come to make their appearance upon earth: +whence, the oversight discovered, they are hastily snatched. And it is +chiefly on this account, that in those islands where human sacrifices +are offered, the Tullas are deemed the most suitable oblations for the +altar, to which from their birth many are prospectively devoted. It was +these considerations, united to others, which at times induced me to +fancy, that by the priest, Yillah was regarded as one of these beings. +So mystical, however, her revelations concerning her past history, that +often I knew not what to divine. But plainly they showed that she had +not the remotest conception of her real origin. + +But these conceits of a state of being anterior to an earthly existence +may have originated in one of those celestial visions seen +transparently stealing over the face of a slumbering child. And +craftily drawn forth and re-echoed by another, and at times repeated +over to her with many additions, these imaginings must at length have +assumed in her mind a hue of reality, heightened into conviction by the +dreamy seclusion of her life. + +But now, let her subsequent and more credible history be related, as +from time to time she rehearsed it. + + + + +CHAPTER L. +Yillah In Ardair + + +In the verdant glen of Ardair, far in the silent interior of Amma, shut +in by hoar old cliffs, Yillah the maiden abode. + +So small and so deep was this glen, so surrounded on all sides by steep +acclivities, and so vividly green its verdure, and deceptive the +shadows that played there; that, from above, it seemed more like a lake +of cool, balmy air, than a glen: its woodlands and grasses gleaming +shadowy all, like sea groves and mosses beneath the calm sea. + +Here, none came but Aleema the priest, who at times was absent for days +together. But at certain seasons, an unseen multitude with loud chants +stood upon the verge of the neighboring precipices, and traversing +those shaded wilds, slowly retreated; their voices lessening and +lessening, as they wended their way through the more distant groves. + +At other times, Yillah being immured in the temple of Apo, a band of +men entering the vale, surrounded her retreat, dancing there till +evening came. Meanwhile, heaps of fruit, garlands of flowers, and +baskets of fish, were laid upon an altar without, where stood Aleema, +arrayed in white tappa, and muttering to himself, as the offerings were +laid at his feet. + +When Aleema was gone, Yillah went forth into the glen, and wandered +among the trees, and reposed by the banks of the stream. And ever as +she strolled, looked down upon her the grim old cliffs, bearded with +trailing moss. + +Toward the lower end of the vale, its lofty walls advancing and +overhanging their base, almost met in mid air. And a great rock, hurled +from an adjacent height, and falling into the space intercepted, there +remained fixed. Aerial trees shot up from its surface; birds nested in +its clefts; and strange vines roved abroad, overrunning the tops of the +trees, lying thereon in coils and undulations, like anacondas basking +in the light. Beneath this rock, was a lofty wall of ponderous stones. +Between its crevices, peeps were had of a long and leafy arcade, +quivering far away to where the sea rolled in the sun. Lower down, +these crevices gave an outlet to the waters of the brook, which, in a +long cascade, poured over sloping green ledges near the foot of the +wall, into a deep shady pool; whose rocky sides, by the perpetual +eddying of the water, had been worn into a grotesque resemblance to a +group of giants, with heads submerged, indolently reclining about the +basin. + +In this pool, Yillah would bathe. And once, emerging, she heard the +echoes of a voice, and called aloud. But the only reply, was the +rustling of branches, as some one, invisible, fled down the valley +beyond. Soon after, a stone rolled inward, and Aleema the priest stood +before her; saying that the voice she had heard was his. But it was +not. + +At last the weary days grew, longer and longer, and the maiden pined +for companionship. When the breeze blew not, but slept in the caves of +the mountains, and all the leaves of the trees stood motionless as +tears in the eye, Yillah would sadden, and call upon the spirits in her +soul to awaken. She sang low airs, she thought she had heard in +Oroolia; but started affrighted, as from dingles and dells, came back +to her strains more wild than hers. And ever, when sad, Aleema would +seek to cheer her soul, by calling to mind the bright scenes of Oroolia +the Blest, to which place, he averred, she was shortly to return, never +more to depart. + +Now, at the head of the vale of Ardair, rose a tall, dark peak, +presenting at the top the grim profile of a human face; whose shadow, +every afternoon, crept down the verdant side of the mountain: a silent +phantom, stealing all over the bosom of the glen. + +At times, when the phantom drew near, Aleema would take Yillah forth, +and waiting its approach, lay her down by the shadow, disposing her +arms in a caress; saying, “Oh, Apo! dost accept thy bride?” And at +last, when it crept beyond the place where he stood, and buried the +whole valley in gloom; Aleema would say, “Arise Yillah; Apo hath +stretched himself to sleep in Ardair. Go, slumber where thou wilt; for +thou wilt slumber in his arms.” + +And so, every night, slept the maiden in the arms of grim Apo. + +One day when Yillah had come to love the wild shadow, as something that +every day moved before her eyes, where all was so deathfully still; she +went forth alone to watch it, as softly it slid down from the peak. Of +a sudden, when its face was just edging a chasm, that made it to look +as if parting its lips, she heard a loud voice, and thought it was Apo +calling “Yillah! Yillah!” But now it seemed like the voice she had +heard while bathing in the pool. Glancing upward, she beheld a +beautiful open-armed youth, gazing down upon her from an inaccessible +crag. But presently, there was a rustling in the groves behind, and +swift as thought, something darted through the air. The youth bounded +forward. Yillah opened her arms to receive him; but he fell upon the +cliff, and was seen no more. As alarmed, and in tears, she fled from +the scene, some one out of sight ran before her through the wood. + +Upon recounting this adventure to Aleema, he said, that the being she +had seen, must have been a bad spirit come to molest her; and that Apo +had slain him. + +The sight of this youth, filled Yillah with wild yearnings to escape +from her lonely retreat; for a glimpse of some one beside the priest +and the phantom, suggested vague thoughts of worlds of fair beings, in +regions beyond Ardair. But Aleema sought to put away these conceits; +saying, that ere long she would be journeying to Oroolia, there to +rejoin the spirits she dimly remembered. + +Soon after, he came to her with a shell—one of those ever moaning of +ocean—and placing it to her ear, bade her list to the being within, +which in that little shell had voyaged from Oroolia to bear her company +in Amma. + +Now, the maiden oft held it to her ear, and closing her eyes, listened +and listened to its soft inner breathings, till visions were born of +the sound, and her soul lay for hours in a trance of delight. + +And again the priest came, and brought her a milk-white bird, with a +bill jet-black, and eyes like stars. “In this, lurks the soul of a +maiden; it hath flown from Oroolia to greet you.” The soft stranger +willingly nestled in her bosom; turning its bright eyes upon hers, and +softly warbling. + +Many days passed; and Yillah, the bird, and the shell were inseparable. +The bird grew familiar; pecked seeds from her mouth; perched upon her +shoulder, and sang in her ear; and at night, folded its wings in her +bosom, and, like a sea-fowl, went softly to sleep: rising and falling +upon the maiden’s heart. And every morning it flew from its nest, and +fluttered and chirped; and sailed to and fro; and blithely sang; and +brushed Yillah’s cheek till she woke. Then came to her hand: and +Yillah, looking earnestly in its eyes, saw strange faces there; and +said to herself as she gazed—“These are two souls, not one.” + +But at last, going forth into the groves with the bird, it suddenly +flew from her side, and perched in a bough; and throwing back its white +downy throat, there gushed from its bill a clear warbling jet, like a +little fountain in air. Now the song ceased; when up and away toward +the head of the vale, flew the bird. “Lil! Lil! come back, leave me +not, blest souls of the maidens.” But on flew the bird, far up a +defile, winging its way till a speck. + +It was shortly after this, and upon the evening of a day which had been +tumultuous with sounds of warfare beyond the lower wall of the glen; +that Aleema came to Yillah in alarm; saying—“Yillah, the time has come +to follow thy bird; come, return to thy home in Oroolia.” And he told +her the way she would voyage there: by the vortex on the coast of +Tedaidee. That night, being veiled and placed in the tent, the maiden +was borne to the sea-side, where the canoe was in waiting. And setting +sail quickly, by next morning the island of Amma was no longer in +sight. + +And this was the voyage, whose sequel has already been recounted. + + + + +CHAPTER LI. +The Dream Begins To Fade + + +Stripped of the strange associations, with which a mind like Yillah’s +must have invested every incident of her life, the story of her abode +in Ardair seemed not incredible. + +But so etherealized had she become from the wild conceits she +nourished, that she verily believed herself a being of the lands of +dreams. Her fabulous past was her present. + +Yet as our intimacy grew closer and closer, these fancies seemed to be +losing their hold. And often she questioned me concerning my own +reminiscences of her shadowy isle. And cautiously I sought to produce +the impression, that whatever I had said of that clime, had been +revealed to me in dreams; but that in these dreams, her own lineaments +had smiled upon me; and hence the impulse which had sent me roving +after the substance of this spiritual image. + +And true it was to say so; and right it was to swear it, upon her white +arms crossed. For oh, Yillah; were you not the earthly semblance of +that sweet vision, that haunted my earliest thoughts? + +At first she had wildly believed, that the nameless affinities between +us, were owing to our having in times gone by dwelt together in the +same ethereal region. But thoughts like these were fast dying out. Yet +not without many strange scrutinies. More intently than ever she gazed +into my eyes; rested her ear against my heart, and listened to its +beatings. And love, which in the eye of its object ever seeks to invest +itself with some rare superiority, love, sometimes induced me to prop +my failing divinity; though it was I myself who had undermined it. + +But if it was with many regrets, that in the sight of Yillah, I +perceived myself thus dwarfing down to a mortal; it was with quite +contrary emotions, that I contemplated the extinguishment in her heart +of the notion of her own spirituality. For as such thoughts were chased +away, she clung the more closely to me, as unto one without whom she +would be desolate indeed. + +And now, at intervals, she was sad, and often gazed long and fixedly +into the sea. Nor would she say why it was, that she did so; until at +length she yielded; and replied, that whatever false things Aleema +might have instilled into her mind; of this much she was certain: that +the whirlpool on the coast of Tedaidee prefigured her fate; that in the +waters she saw lustrous eyes, and beckoning phantoms, and strange +shapes smoothing her a couch among the mosses. + +Her dreams seemed mine. Many visions I had of the green corse of the +priest, outstretching its arms in the water, to receive pale Yillah, as +she sunk in the sea. + +But these forebodings departed, no happiness in the universe like ours. +We lived and we loved; life and love were united; in gladness glided +our days. + + + + +CHAPTER LII. +World Ho! + + +Five suns rose and set. And Yillah pining for the shore, we turned our +prow due west, and next morning came in sight of land. + +It was innumerable islands; lifting themselves bluely through the azure +air, and looking upon the distant sea, like haycocks in a hazy field. +Towering above all, and mid-most, rose a mighty peak; one fleecy cloud +sloping against its summit; a column wreathed. Beyond, like purple +steeps in heaven at set of sun, stretched far away, what seemed lands +on lands, in infinite perspective. + +Gliding on, the islands grew more distinct; rising up from the billows +to greet us; revealing hills, vales, and peaks, grouped within a +milk-white zone of reef, so vast, that in the distance all was dim. The +jeweled vapors, ere-while hovering over these violet shores, now seemed +to be shedding their gems; and as the almost level rays of the sun, +shooting through the air like a variegated prism, touched the verdant +land, it trembled all over with dewy sparkles. + +Still nearer we came: our sail faintly distended as the breeze died +away from our vicinity to the isles. The billows rolled listlessly by, +as if conscious that their long task was nigh done; while gleamed the +white reef, like the trail of a great fish in a calm. But as yet, no +sign of paddle or canoe; no distant smoke; no shining thatch. Bravo! +good comrades, we’ve discovered some new constellation in the sea. + +Sweet Yillah, no more of Oroolia; see you not this flowery land? +Nevermore shall we desire to roam. + +Voyaging along the zone, we came to an opening; and quitting the +firmament blue of the open sea, we glided in upon the still, green +waters of the wide lagoon. Mapped out in the broad shadows of the +isles, and tinted here and there with the reflected hues of the sun +clouds, the mild waters stretched all around us like another sky. Near +by the break in the reef, was a little island, with palm trees harping +in the breeze; an aviary of alluring sounds, that seemed calling upon +us to land. And here, Yillah, whom the sight of the verdure had made +glad, threw out a merry suggestion. Nothing less, than to plant our +mast, sail-set, upon the highest hill; and fly away, island and all; +trees rocking, birds caroling, flowers springing; away, away, across +the wide waters, to Oroolia! But alas! how weigh the isle’s coral +anchor, leagues down in the fathomless sea? + +We glanced around; but all the islands seemed slumbering in the +flooding light. + +“A canoe! a canoe!” cried Samoa, as three proas showed themselves +rounding a neighboring shore. Instantly we sailed for them; but after +shooting to and fro for a time, and standing up and gazing at us, the +Islanders retreated behind the headland. Hardly were they out of sight, +when from many a shore roundabout, other proas pushed off. Soon the +water all round us was enlivened by fleets of canoes, darting hither +and thither like frighted water-fowls. Presently they all made for one +island. + +From their actions we argued that these people could have had but +little or no intercourse with whites; and most probably knew not how to +account for our appearance among them. Desirous, therefore, of a +friendly meeting, ere any hostile suspicions might arise, we pointed +our craft for the island, whither all the canoes were now hastening. +Whereupon, those which had not yet reached their destination, turned +and fled; while the occupants of the proas that had landed, ran into +the groves, and were lost to view. + +Crossing the distinct outer line of the isle’s shadow on the water, we +gained the shore; and gliding along its margin, passing canoe after +canoe, hauled up on the silent beach, which otherwise seemed entirely +innocent of man. + +A dilemma. But I decided at last upon disembarking Jarl and Samoa, to +seek out and conciliate the natives. So, landing them upon a jutting +buttress of coral, whence they waded to the shore; I pushed off with +Yillah into the water beyond, to await the event. + +Full an hour must have elapsed; when, to our great joy, loud shouts +were heard; and there burst into view a tumultuous crowd, in the midst +of which my Viking was descried, mounted upon the shoulders of two +brawny natives; while the Upoluan, striding on in advance, seemed +resisting a similar attempt to elevate him in the world. + +Good omens both. + +“Come ashore!” cried Jarl. “Aramai!” cried Samoa; while storms of +interjections went up from the Islanders who with extravagant gestures +danced about the beach. + +Further caution seemed needless: I pointed our prow for the shore. No +sooner was this perceived, than, raising an applauding shout, the +Islanders ran up to their waists in the sea. And skimming like a gull +over the smooth lagoon, the light shallop darted in among them. Quick +as thought, fifty hands were on the gunwale: and, with all its +contents, lifted bodily into the air, the little Chamois, upon many a +dripping shoulder, was borne deep into the groves. Yillah shrieked at +the rocking motion, and when the boughs of the trees brushed against +the tent. + +With his staff, an old man now pointed to a couple of twin-like trees, +some four paces apart; and a little way from the ground conveniently +crotched. + +And here, eftsoons, they deposited their burden; lowering the Chamois +gently between the forks of the trees, whose willow-like foliage +fringed the tent and its inmate. + + + + +CHAPTER LIII. +The Chamois Ashore + + +Until now, enveloped in her robe, and crouching like a fawn, Yillah had +been well nigh hidden from view. But presently she withdrew her hood. + +What saw the Islanders, that they so gazed and adored in silence: some +retreating, some creeping nearer, and the women all in a flutter? Long +they gazed; and following Samoa’s example, stretched forth their arms +in reverence. + +The adoration of the maiden was extended to myself. Indeed, from the +singular gestures employed, I had all along suspected, that we were +being received with unwonted honors. + +I now sought to get speech of my comrades. But so obstreperous was the +crowd, that it was next to impossible. Jarl was still in his perch in +the air; his enthusiastic bearers not yet suffering him to alight. +Samoa, however, who had managed to keep out of the saddle, by-and-by +contrived to draw nearer to the Chamois. + +He advised me, by no means to descend for the present; since in any +event we were sure of remaining unmolested therein; the Islanders +regarding it as sacred. + +The Upoluan attracted a great deal of attention; chiefly from his style +of tattooing, which, together with other peculiarities, so interested +the natives, that they were perpetually hanging about him, putting +eager questions, and all the time keeping up a violent clamor. + +But despite the large demand upon his lungs, Samoa made out to inform +me, that notwithstanding the multitude assembled, there was no high +chief, or person of consequence present; the king of the place, also +those of the islands adjacent, being absent at a festival in another +quarter of the Archipelago. But upon the first distant glimpse of the +Chamois, fleet canoes had been dispatched to announce the surprising +event that had happened. + +In good time, the crowd becoming less tumultuous, and abandoning the +siege of Samoa, I availed myself of this welcome lull, and called upon +him and my Viking to enter the Chamois; desirous of condensing our +forces against all emergencies. + +Samoa now gave me to understand, that from all he could learn, the +Islanders regarded me as a superior being. They had inquired of him, +whether I was not white Taji, a sort of half-and-half deity, now and +then an Avatar among them, and ranking among their inferior ex- officio +demi-gods. To this, Samoa had said ay; adding, moreover, all he could +to encourage the idea. + +He now entreated me, at the first opportunity, to announce myself as +Taji: declaring that if once received under that title, the unbounded +hospitality of our final reception would be certain; and our persons +fenced about from all harm. + +Encouraging this. But it was best to be wary. For although among some +barbarians the first strangers landing upon their shores, are +frequently hailed as divine; and in more than one wild land have been +actually styled gods, as a familiar designation; yet this has not +exempted the celestial visitants from peril, when too much presuming +upon the reception extended to them. In sudden tumults they have been +slain outright, and while full faith in their divinity had in no wise +abated. The sad fate of an eminent navigator is a well-known +illustration of this unaccountable waywardness. + +With no small anxiety, therefore, we awaited the approach of some of +the dignitaries of Mardi; for by this collective appellation, the +people informed us, their islands were known. + +We waited not long. Of a sudden, from the sea-side, a single shrill cry +was heard. A moment more, and the blast of numerous conch shells +startled the air; a confused clamor drew nearer and nearer; and flying +our eyes in the direction of these sounds, we impatiently awaited what +was to follow. + + + + +CHAPTER LIV. +A Gentleman From The Sun + + +Never before had I seen the deep foliage of woodlands navigated by +canoes. But on they came sailing through the leaves; two abreast; borne +on men’s shoulders; in each a chief, carried along to the measured +march of his bearers; paddle blades reversed under arms. As they +emerged, the multitude made gestures of homage. At the distance of some +eight or ten paces the procession halted; when the kings alighted to +the ground. + +They were fine-looking men, arrayed in various garbs. Rare the show of +stained feathers, and jewels, and other adornments. Brave the floating +of dyed mantles. + +The regal bearing of these personages, the deference paid them, and +their entire self-possession, not a little surprised me. And it seemed +preposterous, to assume a divine dignity in the presence of these +undoubted potentates of _terra firma_. Taji seemed oozing from my +fingers’ ends. But courage! and erecting my crest, I strove to look +every inch the character I had determined to assume. + +For a time, it was almost impossible to tell with what emotions +precisely the chiefs were regarding me. They said not a word. + +But plucking up heart of grace, I crossed my cutlass on my chest, and +reposing my hand on the hilt, addressed their High Mightinesses thus. +“Men of Mardi, I come from the sun. When this morning it rose and +touched the wave, I pushed my shallop from its golden beach, and hither +sailed before its level rays. I am Taji.” + +More would have been added, but I paused for the effect of my exordium. + +Stepping back a pace or two, the chiefs eagerly conversed. + +Emboldened, I returned to the charge, and labored hard to impress them +with just such impressions of me and mine, as I deemed desirable. The +gentle Yillah was a seraph from the sun; Samoa I had picked off a reef +in my route from that orb; and as for the Skyeman, why, as his name +imported, he came from above. In a word, we were all strolling +divinities. + +Advancing toward the Chamois, one of the kings, a calm old man, now +addressed me as follows:—“Is this indeed Taji? he, who according to a +tradition, was to return to us after five thousand moons? But that +period is yet unexpired. What bring’st thou hither then, Taji, before +thy time? Thou wast but a quarrelsome demi-god, say the legends, when +thou dwelt among our sires. But wherefore comest thou, Taji? Truly, +thou wilt interfere with the worship of thy images, and we have plenty +of gods besides thee. But comest thou to fight?—We have plenty of +spears, and desire not thine. Comest thou to dwell?—Small are the +houses of Mardi. Or comest thou to fish in the sea? Tell us, Taji.” + +Now, all this was a series of posers hard to be answered; furnishing a +curious example, moreover, of the reception given to strange demi- gods +when they travel without their portmanteaus; and also of the familiar +manner in which these kings address the immortals. Much I mourned that +I had not previously studied better my part, and learned the precise +nature of my previous existence in the land. + +But nothing like carrying it bravely. + +“Attend. Taji comes, old man, because it pleases him to come. And Taji +will depart when it suits him. Ask the shades of your sires whether +Taji thus scurvily greeted them, when they came stalking into his +presence in the land of spirits. No. Taji spread the banquet. He +removed their mantles. He kindled a fire to drive away the damp. He +said not, ‘Come you to fight, you fogs and vapors? come you to dwell? +or come you to fish in the sea?’ Go to, then, kings of Mardi!” + +Upon this, the old king fell back; and his place was supplied by a +noble chief, of a free, frank bearing. Advancing quickly toward the +boat, he exclaimed—“I am Media, the son of Media. Thrice welcome, Taji. +On my island of Odo hast thou an altar. I claim thee for my guest.” He +then reminded the rest, that the strangers had voyaged far, and needed +repose. And, furthermore, that he proposed escorting them forthwith to +his own dominions; where, next day, he would be happy to welcome all +visitants. + +And good as his word, he commanded his followers to range themselves +under the Chamois. Springing out of our prow, the Upoluan was followed +by Jarl; leaving Yillah and Taji to be borne therein toward the sea. + +Soon, we were once more afloat; by our side, Media sociably seated; six +of his paddlers, perched upon the gunwale, swiftly urging us over the +lagoon. + +The transition from the grove to the sea was instantaneous. All seemed +a dream. + +The place to which we were hastening, being some distance away, as we +rounded isle after isle, the extent of the Archipelago grew upon us +greatly. + + + + +CHAPTER LV. +Tiffin In A Temple + + +Upon at last drawing nigh to Odo, its appearance somewhat disappointed +me. A small island, of moderate elevation. + +But plumb not the height of the house that feasts you. The beach was +lined with expectant natives, who, lifting the Chamois, carried us up +the beach. + +Alighting, as they were bearing us along, King Media, designating a +canoe-house hard by, ordered our craft to be deposited therein. This +being done, we stepped upon the soil. It was the first we had pressed +in very many days. It sent a sympathetic thrill through our frames. + +Turning his steps inland, Media signed us to follow. + +Soon we came to a rude sort of inclosure, fenced in by an imposing +wall. Here a halt was sounded, and in great haste the natives proceeded +to throw down a portion of the stones. This accomplished, we were +signed to enter the fortress thus carried by storm. Upon an artificial +mound, opposite the breach, stood a small structure of bamboo, open in +front. Within, was a long pedestal, like a settee, supporting three +images, also of wood, and about the size of men; bearing, likewise, a +remote resemblance to that species of animated nature. Before these +idols was an altar, and at its base many fine mats. + +Entering the temple, as if he felt very much at home, Media disposed +these mats so as to form a very pleasant lounge; where he deferentially +entreated Yillah to recline. Then deliberately removing the first idol, +he motioned me to seat myself in its place. Setting aside the middle +one, he quietly established himself in its stead. The displaced +ciphers, meanwhile, standing upright before us, and their blank faces +looking upon this occasion unusually expressive. As yet, not a syllable +as to the meaning of this cavalier treatment of their wooden godships. + +We now tranquilly awaited what next might happen, and I earnestly +prayed, that if sacrilege was being committed, the vengeance of the +gods might be averted from an ignoramus like me; notwithstanding the +petitioner himself hailed from the other world. Perfect silence was +preserved: Jarl and Samoa standing a little without the temple; the +first looking quite composed, but his comrade casting wondering glances +at my sociable apotheosis with Media. + +Now happening to glance upon the image last removed, I was not long in +detecting a certain resemblance between it and our host. Both were +decorated in the same manner; the carving on the idol exactly +corresponding with the tattooing of the king. + +Presently, the silence was relieved by a commotion without: and a +butler approached, staggering under an immense wooden trencher; which, +with profound genuflexions, he deposited upon the altar before us. The +tray was loaded like any harvest wain; heaped up with good things +sundry and divers: Bread-fruit, and cocoanuts, and plantains, and +guavas; all pleasant to the eye, and furnishing good earnest of +something equally pleasant to the palate. + +Transported at the sight of these viands, after so long an estrangement +from full indulgence in things green, I was forthwith proceeding to +help Yillah and myself, when, like lightning, a most unwelcome query +obtruded. Did deities dine? Then also recurred what Media had declared +about my shrine in Odo. Was this it? Self- sacrilegious demigod that I +was, was I going to gluttonize on the very offerings, laid before me in +my own sacred fane? Give heed to thy ways, oh Taji, lest thou stumble +and be lost. + +But hereupon, what saw we, but his cool majesty of Odo tranquilly +proceeding to lunch in the temple? + +How now? Was Media too a god? Egad, it must be so. Else, why his image +here in the fane, and the original so entirely at his ease, with legs +full cosily tucked away under the very altar itself. This put to flight +all appalling apprehensions of the necessity of starving to keep up the +assumption of my divinity. So without more ado I helped myself right +and left; taking the best care of Yillah; who over fed her flushed +beauty with juicy fruits, thereby transferring to her cheek the sweet +glow of the guava. + +Our hunger appeased, and Media in token thereof celestially laying his +hand upon the appropriate region, we proceeded to quit the inclosure. +But coming to the wall where the breach had been made, lo, and behold, +no breach was to be seen. But down it came tumbling again, and forth we +issued. + +This overthrowing of walls, be it known, is an incidental compliment +paid distinguished personages in this part of Mardi. It would seem to +signify, that such gentry can go nowhere without creating an +impression; even upon the most obdurate substances. + +But to return to our ambrosial lunch. + +Sublimate, as you will, the idea of our ethereality as intellectual +beings; no sensible man can harbor a doubt, but that there is a vast +deal of satisfaction in dining. More: there is a savor of life and +immortality in substantial fare. Like balloons, we are nothing till +filled. + +And well knowing this, nature has provided this jolly round board, our +globe, which in an endless sequence of courses and crops, spreads a +perpetual feast. Though, as with most public banquets, there is no +small crowding, and many go away famished from plenty. + + + + +CHAPTER LVI. +King Media A Host + + +Striking into a grove, about sunset we emerged upon a fine, clear +space, and spied a city in the woods. + +In the middle of all, like a generalissimo’s marquee among tents, was a +structure more imposing than the rest. Here, abode King Media. + +Disposed round a space some fifty yards square, were many palm posts +staked firmly in the earth. A man’s height from the ground, these +supported numerous horizontal trunks, upon which lay a flooring of +habiscus. High over this dais, but resting upon independent supports +beyond, a gable-ended roof sloped away to within a short distance of +the ground. + +Such was the palace. + +We entered it by an arched, arbored entrance, at one of its +palmetto-thatched ends. But not through this exclusive portal entered +the Islanders. Humbly stooping, they found ingress under the drooping +eaves. A custom immemorial, and well calculated to remind all +contumacious subjects of the dignity of the habitation thus entered. + +Three steps led to the summit of the dais, where piles of soft mats, +and light pillows of woven grass, stuffed with the golden down of a +wild thistle, invited all loiterers to lounge. + +How pleasant the twilight that welled up from under the low eaves, +above which we were seated. And how obvious now the design of the roof. +No shade more grateful and complete; the garish sun lingering without +like some lackey in waiting. + +But who is this in the corner, gaping at us like a butler in a +quandary? Media’s household deity, in the guise of a plethoric monster, +his enormous head lolling back, and wide, gaping mouth stuffed full of +fresh fruits and green leaves. Truly, had the idol possessed a soul +under his knotty ribs, how tantalizing to hold so glorious a mouthful +without the power of deglutition. Far worse than the inexorable +lock-jaw, which will not admit of the step preliminary to a swallow. + +This jolly Josh image was that of an inferior deity, the god of Good +Cheer, and often after, we met with his merry round mouth in many other +abodes in Mardi. Daily, his jaws are replenished, as a flower vase in +summer. + +But did the demi-divine Media thus brook the perpetual presence of a +subaltern divinity? Still more; did he render it homage? But ere long +the Mardian mythology will be discussed, thereby making plain what may +now seem anomalous. + +Politely escorting us into his palace, Media did the honors by inviting +his guests to recline. He then seemed very anxious to impress us with +the fact, that, by bringing us to his home, and thereby charging the +royal larder with our maintenance, he had taken no hasty or imprudent +step. His merry butlers kept piling round us viands, till we were well +nigh walled in. At every fresh deposit, Media directing our attention +to the same, as yet additional evidence of his ample resources as a +host. The evidence was finally closed by dragging under the eaves a +felled plantain tree, the spike of red ripe fruit, sprouting therefrom, +blushing all over, at so rude an introduction to the notice of +strangers. + +During this scene, Jarl was privily nudging Samoa, in wonderment, to +know what upon earth it all meant. But Samoa, scarcely deigning to +notice interrogatories propounded through the elbow, only let drop a +vague hint or two. + +It was quite amusing, what airs Samoa now gave himself, at least toward +my Viking. Among the Mardians he was at home. And who, when there, +stretches not out his legs, and says unto himself, “Who is greater than +I?” + +To be plain: concerning himself and the Skyeman, the tables were +turned. At sea, Jarl had been the oracle: an old sea-sage, learned in +hemp and helm. But our craft high and dry, the Upoluan lifted his crest +as the erudite pagan; master of Gog and Magog, expounder of all things +heathenish and obscure. + +An hour or two was now laughed away in very charming conversation with +Media; when I hinted, that a couch and solitude would be acceptable. +Whereupon, seizing a taper, our host escorted us without the palace. +And ushering us into a handsome unoccupied mansion, gave me to +understand that the same was mine. Mounting to the dais, he then +instituted a vigorous investigation, to discern whether every thing was +in order. Not fancying something about the mats, he rolled them up into +bundles, and one by one sent them flying at the heads of his servitors; +who, upon that gentle hint made off with them, soon after returning +with fresh ones. These, with mathematical precision, Media in person +now spread on the dais; looking carefully to the fringes or ruffles +with which they were bordered, as if striving to impart to them a +sentimental expression. + +This done, he withdrew. + + + + +CHAPTER LVII. +Taji Takes Counsel With Himself + + +My brief intercourse with our host, had by this time enabled me to form +a pretty good notion of the light, in which I was held by him and his +more intelligent subjects. + +His free and easy carriage evinced, that though acknowledging my +assumptions, he was no way overawed by them; treating me as familiarly, +indeed, as if I were a mere mortal, one of the abject generation of +mushrooms. + +The scene in the temple, however, had done much toward explaining this +demeanor of his. A demi-god in his own proper person, my claims to a +similar dignity neither struck him with wonder, nor lessened his good +opinion of himself. + +As for any thing foreign in my aspect, and my ignorance of Mardian +customs—-all this, instead of begetting a doubt unfavorable to my +pretensions, but strengthened the conviction of them as verities. Thus +has it been in similar instances; but to a much greater extent. The +celebrated navigator referred to in a preceding chapter, was hailed by +the Hawaiians as one of their demi-gods, returned to earth, after a +wide tour of the universe. And they worshiped him as such, though +incessantly he was interrogating them, as to who under the sun his +worshipers were; how their ancestors came on the island; and whether +they would have the kindness to provide his followers with plenty of +pork during his stay. + +But a word or two concerning the idols in the shrine at Odo. Superadded +to the homage rendered him as a temporal prince, Media was there +worshiped as a spiritual being. In his corporeal absence, his effigy +receiving all oblations intended for him. And in the days of his +boyhood, listening to the old legends of the Mardian mythology, Media +had conceived a strong liking for the fabulous Taji; a deity whom he +had often declared was worthy a niche in any temple extant. Hence he +had honored my image with a place in his own special shrine; placing it +side by side with his worshipful likeness. + +I appreciated the compliment. But of the close companionship of the +other image there, I was heartily ashamed. And with reason. The +nuisance in question being the image of a deified maker of plantain- +pudding, lately deceased; who had been famed far and wide as the most +notable fellow of his profession in the whole Archipelago. During his +sublunary career, having been attached to the household of Media, his +grateful master had afterward seen fit to crown his celebrity by this +posthumous distinction: a circumstance sadly subtracting from the +dignity of an apotheosis. Nor must it here be omitted, that in this +part of Mardi culinary artists are accounted worthy of high +consideration. For among these people of Odo, the matter of eating and +drinking is held a matter of life and of death. “Drag away my queen +from my arms,” said old Tyty when overcome of Adommo, “but leave me my +cook.” + +Now, among the Mardians there were plenty of incarnated deities to keep +me in countenance. Most of the kings of the Archipelago, besides Media, +claiming homage as demi-gods; and that, too, by virtue of hereditary +descent, the divine spark being transmissable from father to son. In +illustration of this, was the fact, that in several instances the +people of the land addressed the supreme god Oro, in the very same +terms employed in the political adoration of their sublunary rulers. + +Ay: there were deities in Mardi far greater and taller than I: right +royal monarchs to boot, living in jolly round tabernacles of jolly +brown clay; and feasting, and roystering, and lording it in yellow +tabernacles of bamboo. These demi-gods had wherewithal to sustain their +lofty pretensions. If need were, could crush out of him the infidelity +of a non-conformist. And by this immaculate union of church and state, +god and king, in their own proper persons reigned supreme Caesars over +the souls and bodies of their subjects. + +Beside these mighty magnates, I and my divinity shrank into nothing. In +their woodland ante-chambers plebeian deities were kept lingering. For +be it known, that in due time we met with several decayed, broken down +demi-gods: magnificos of no mark in Mardi; having no temples wherein to +feast personal admirers, or spiritual devotees. They wandered about +forlorn and friendless. And oftentimes in their dinnerless despair +hugely gluttonized, and would fain have grown fat, by reflecting upon +the magnificence of their genealogies. But poor fellows! like shabby +Scotch lords in London in King James’s time, the very multitude of them +confounded distinction. And since they could show no rent-roll, they +were permitted to fume unheeded. + +Upon the whole, so numerous were living and breathing gods in Mardi, +that I held my divinity but cheaply. And seeing such a host of +immortals, and hearing of multitudes more, purely spiritual in their +nature, haunting woodlands and streams; my views of theology grew +strangely confused; I began to bethink me of the Jew that rejected the +Talmud, and his all-permeating principle, to which Goethe and others +have subscribed. + +Instead, then, of being struck with the audacity of endeavoring to palm +myself off as a god—the way in which the thing first impressed me—I now +perceived that I might be a god as much as I pleased, and yet not whisk +a lion’s tail after all at least on that special account. + +As for Media’s reception, its graciousness was not wholly owing to the +divine character imputed to me. His, he believed to be the same. But to +a whim, a freakishness in his soul, which led him to fancy me as one +among many, not as one with no peer. + +But the apparent unconcern of King Media with respect to my godship, by +no means so much surprised me, as his unaffected indifference to my +amazing voyage from the sun; his indifference to the sun itself; and +all the wonderful circumstances that must have attended my departure. +Whether he had ever been there himself, that he regarded a solar trip +with so much unconcern, almost became a question in my mind. Certain it +is, that as a mere traveler he must have deemed me no very great +prodigy. + +My surprise at these things was enhanced by reflecting, that to the +people of the Archipelago the map of Mardi was the map of the world. +With the exception of certain islands out of sight and at an indefinite +distance, they had no certain knowledge of any isles but their own. + +And, no long time elapsed ere I had still additional reasons to cease +wondering at the easy faith accorded to the story which I had given of +myself. For these Mardians were familiar with still greater marvels +than mine; verily believing in prodigies of all sorts. Any one of them +put my exploits to the blush. + +Look to thy ways then, Taji, thought I, and carry not thy crest too +high. Of a surety, thou hast more peers than inferiors. Thou art +overtopped all round. Bear thyself discreetly and not haughtily, Taji. +It will not answer to give thyself airs. Abstain from all consequential +allusions to the other world, and the genteel deities among whom thou +hast circled. Sport not too jauntily thy raiment, because it is novel +in Mardi; nor boast of the fleetness of thy Chamois, because it is +unlike a canoe. Vaunt not of thy pedigree, Taji; for Media himself will +measure it with thee there by the furlong. Be not a “snob,” Taji. + +So then, weighing all things well, and myself severely, I resolved to +follow my Mentor’s wise counsel; neither arrogating aught, nor abating +of just dues; but circulating freely, sociably, and frankly, among the +gods, heroes, high priests, kings, and gentlemen, that made up the +principalities of Mardi. + + + + +CHAPTER LVIII. +Mardi By Night And Yillah By Day + + +During the night following our arrival, many dreams were no doubt +dreamt in Odo. But my thoughts were wakeful. And while all others +slept, obeying a restless impulse, I stole without into the magical +starlight. There are those who in a strange land ever love to view it +by night. + +It has been said, that the opening in the groves where was situated +Media’s city, was elevated above the surrounding plains. Hence was +commanded a broad reach of prospect. + +Far and wide was deep low-sobbing repose of man and nature. The groves +were motionless; and in the meadows, like goblins, the shadows advanced +and retreated. Full before me, lay the Mardian fleet of isles, +profoundly at anchor within their coral harbor. Near by was one belted +round by a frothy luminous reef, wherein it lay, like Saturn in its +ring. + +From all their summits, went up a milk-white smoke, as from Indian +wigwams in the hazy harvest-moon. And floating away, these vapors +blended with the faint mist, as of a cataract, hovering over the +circumvallating reef. Far beyond all, and far into the infinite night, +surged the jet-black ocean. + +But how tranquil the wide lagoon, which mirrored the burning spots in +heaven! Deep down into its innermost heart penetrated the slanting rays +of Hesperus like a shaft of light, sunk far into mysterious Golcondas, +where myriad gnomes seemed toiling. Soon a light breeze rippled the +water, and the shaft was seen no more. But the moon’s bright wake was +still revealed: a silver track, tipping every wave-crest in its course, +till each seemed a pearly, scroll-prowed nautilus, buoyant with some +elfin crew. + +From earth to heaven! High above me was Night’s shadowy bower, +traversed, vine-like, by the Milky Way, and heavy with golden +clusterings. Oh stars! oh eyes, that see me, wheresoe’er I roam: +serene, intent, inscrutable for aye, tell me Sybils, what I +am.—Wondrous worlds on worlds! Lo, round and round me, shining, awful +spells: all glorious, vivid constellations, God’s diadem ye are! To +you, ye stars, man owes his subtlest raptures, thoughts unspeakable, +yet full of faith. + +But how your mild effulgence stings the boding heart. Am I a murderer, +stars? + +Hours pass. The starry trance is departed. Long waited for, the dawn +now comes. + +First, breaking along the waking face; peeping from out the languid +lids; then shining forth in longer glances; till, like the sun, up +comes the soul, and sheds its rays abroad. + +When thus my Yillah did daily dawn, how she lit up my world; tinging +more rosily the roseate clouds, that in her summer cheek played to and +fro, like clouds in Italian air. + + + + +CHAPTER LIX. +Their Morning Meal + + +Not wholly is our world made up of bright stars and bright eyes: so now +to our story. + +A conscientious host should ever be up betimes, to look after the +welfare of his guests, and see to it that their day begin auspiciously. +King Media announced the advent of the sun, by rustling at my bower’s +eaves in person. + +A repast was spread in an adjoining arbor, which Media’s pages had +smoothed for our reception, and where his subordinate chiefs were in +attendance. Here we reclined upon mats. Balmy and fresh blew the breath +of the morning; golden vapors were upon the mountains, silver sheen +upon the grass; and the birds were at matins in the groves; their +bright plumage flashing into view, here and there, as if some rainbow +were crouching in the foliage. + +Spread before us were viands, served in quaint-shaped, curiously-dyed +gourds, not Sevres, but almost as tasteful; and like true porcelain, +fire had tempered them. Green and yielding, they are plucked from the +tree; and emptied of their pulp, are scratched over with minute marks, +like those of a line engraving. The ground prepared, the various +figures are carefully etched. And the outlines filled up with delicate +punctures, certain vegetable oils are poured over them, for coloring. +Filled with a peculiar species of earth, the gourd is now placed in an +oven in the ground. And in due time exhumed, emptied of its contents, +and washed in the stream, it presents a deep-dyed exterior; every +figure distinctly traced and opaque, but the ground semi-transparent. +In some cases, owing to the variety of dyes employed, each figure is of +a different hue. + +More glorious goblets than these for the drinking of wine, went never +from hand to mouth. Capacious as pitchers, they almost superseded +decanters. + +Now, in a tropical climate, fruit, with light wines, forms the only fit +meal of a morning. And with orchards and vineyards forever in sight, +who but the Hetman of the Cossacs would desire more? We had plenty of +the juice of the grape. But of this hereafter; there are some fine old +cellars, and plenty of good cheer in store. + +During the repast, Media, for a time, was much taken up with our +raiment. He begged me to examine for a moment the texture of his right +royal robe, and observe how much superior it was to my own. It put my +mantle to the blush; being tastefully stained with rare devices in red +and black; and bordered with dyed fringes of feathers, and tassels of +red birds’ claws. + +Next came under observation the Skyeman’s Guayaquil hat; at whose +preposterous shape, our host laughed in derision; clapping a great +conical calabash upon the head of an attendant, and saying that now he +was Jarl. At this, and all similar sallies, Samoa was sure to roar +louder than any; though mirth was no constitutional thing with him. But +he seemed rejoiced at the opportunity of turning upon us the ridicule, +which as a barbarian among whites, he himself had so often experienced. + +These pleasantries over, King Media very slightly drew himself up, as +if to make amends for his previous unbending. He discoursed imperially +with his chiefs; nodded his sovereign will to his pages; called for +another gourd of wine; in all respects carrying his royalty bravely. + +The repast concluded, we journeyed to the canoe-house, where we found +the little Chamois stabled like a steed. One solitary depredation had +been committed. Its sides and bottom had been completely denuded of the +minute green barnacles, and short sea-grass, which, like so many +leeches, had fastened to our planks during our long, lazy voyage. + +By the people they had been devoured as dainties. + + + + +CHAPTER LX. +Belshazzar On The Bench + + +Now, Media was king of Odo. And from the simplicity of his manners +hitherto, and his easy, frank demeanor toward ourselves, had we +foolishly doubted that fact, no skepticism could have survived an +illustration of it, which this very day we witnessed at noon. + +For at high noon, Media was wont to don his dignity with his symbols of +state; and sit on his judgment divan or throne, to hear and try all +causes brought before him, and fulminate his royal decrees. + +This divan was elevated at one end of a spacious arbor, formed by an +avenue of regal palms, which in brave state, held aloft their +majestical canopy. + +The crown of the island prince was of the primitive old Eastern style; +in shape, similar, perhaps, to that jauntily sported as a foraging cap +by his sacred majesty King Nimrod, who so lustily followed the hounds. +It was a plaited turban of red tappa, radiated by the pointed and +polished white bones of the Ray-fish. These diverged from a bandeau or +fillet of the most precious pearls; brought up from the sea by the +deepest diving mermen of Mardi. From the middle of the crown rose a +tri-foiled spear-head. And a spear- headed scepter graced the right +hand of the king. + +Now, for all the rant of your democrats, a fine king on a throne is a +very fine sight to behold. He looks very much like a god. No wonder +that his more dutiful subjects so swore, that their good lord and +master King Media was demi-divine. + +A king on his throne! Ah, believe me, ye Gracchi, ye Acephali, ye +Levelers, it is something worth seeing, be sure; whether beheld at +Babylon the Tremendous, when Nebuchadnezzar was crowned; at old Scone +in the days of Macbeth; at Rheims, among Oriflammes, at the coronation +of Louis le Grand; at Westminster Abbey, when the gentlemanly George +doffed his beaver for a diadem; or under the soft shade of palm trees +on an isle in the sea. + +Man lording it over man, man kneeling to man, is a spectacle that +Gabriel might well travel hitherward to behold; for never did he behold +it in heaven. But Darius giving laws to the Medes and the Persians, or +the conqueror of Bactria with king-cattle yoked to his car, was not a +whit more sublime, than Beau Brummel magnificently ringing for his +valet. + +A king on his throne! It is Jupiter nodding in the councils of Olympus; +Satan, seen among the coronets in Hell. + +A king on his throne! It is the sun over a mountain; the sun over +law-giving Sinai; the sun in our system: planets, duke-like, dancing +attendance, and baronial satellites in waiting. + +A king on his throne! After all, but a gentleman seated. And thus sat +the good lord, King Media. + +Time passed. And after trying and dismissing several minor affairs, +Media called for certain witnesses to testify concerning one Jiromo, a +foolhardy wight, who had been silly enough to plot against the majesty +now sitting judge and jury upon him. + +His guilt was clear. And the witnesses being heard, from a bunch of +palm plumes Media taking a leaf, placed it in the hand of a runner or +pursuivant, saying, “This to Jiromo, where he is prisoned; with his +king’s compliments; say we here wait for his head.” + +It was doffed like a turban before a Dey, and brought back on the +instant. + +Now came certain lean-visaged, poverty-stricken, and hence +suspicious-looking varlets, grumbling and growling, and amiable as +Bruin. They came muttering some wild jargon about “bulwarks,” +“bulkheads,” “cofferdams,” “safeguards,” “noble charters,” “shields,” +and “paladiums,” “great and glorious birthrights,” and other +unintelligible gibberish. + +Of the pursuivants, these worthies asked audience of Media. + +“Go, kneel at the throne,” was the answer. + +“Our knee-pans are stiff with sciatics,” was the rheumatic reply. + +“An artifice to keep on your legs,” said the pursuivants. + +And advancing they salamed, and told Media the excuse of those +sour-looking varlets. Whereupon my lord commanded them to down on their +marrow-bones instanter, either before him or the headsman, whichsoever +they pleased. + +They preferred the former. And as they there kneeled, in vain did men +with sharp ears (who abound in all courts) prick their auriculars, to +list to that strange crackling and firing off of bone balls and +sockets, ever incident to the genuflections of rheumatic courtiers. + +In a row, then, these selfsame knee-pans did kneel before the king; who +eyed them as eagles in air do goslings on dunghills; or hunters, hounds +crouching round their calves. + +“Your prayer?” said Media. + +It was a petition, that thereafter all differences between man and man +in Ode, together with all alleged offenses against the state, might be +tried by twelve good men and true. These twelve to be unobnoxious to +the party or parties concerned; their peers; and previously unbiased +touching the matter at issue. Furthermore, that unanimity in these +twelve should be indispensable to a verdict; and no dinner be +vouchsafed till unanimity came. + +Loud and long laughed King Media in scorn. + +“This be your judge,” he cried, swaying his scepter. “What! are twelve +wise men more wise than one? or will twelve fools, put together, make +one sage? Are twelve honest men more honest than one? or twelve knaves +less knavish than one? And if, of twelve men, three be fools, and three +wise, three knaves, and three upright, how obtain real unanimity from +such? + +“But if twelve judges be better than one, then are twelve hundred +better than twelve. But take the whole populace for a judge, and you +will long wait for a unanimous verdict. + +“If upon a thing dubious, there be little unanimity in the conflicting +opinions of one man’s mind, how expect it in the uproar of twelve +puzzled brains? though much unanimity be found in twelve hungry +stomachs. + +“Judges unobnoxious to the accused! Apply it to a criminal case. Ha! +ha! if peradventure a Cacti be rejected, because he had seen the +accused commit the crime for which he is arraigned. Then, his mind +would be biased: no impartiality from him! Or your testy accused might +object to another, because of his tomahawk nose, or a cruel squint of +the eye. + +“Of all follies the most foolish! Know ye from me, that true peers +render not true verdicts. Jiromo was a rebel. Had I tried him by his +peers, I had tried him by rebels; and the rebel had rebelled to some +purpose. + +“Away! As unerring justice dwells in a unity, and as one judge will at +last judge the world beyond all appeal; so—though often here below +justice be hard to attain—does man come nearest the mark, when he +imitates that model divine. Hence, one judge is better than twelve.” + +“And as Justice, in ideal, is ever painted high lifted above the crowd; +so, from the exaltation of his rank, an honest king is the best of +those unical judges, which individually are better than twelve. And +therefore am I, King Media, the best judge in this land.” + +“Subjects! so long as I live, I will rule you and judge you alone. And +though you here kneeled before me till you grew into the ground, and +there took root, no yea to your petition will you get from this throne. +I am king: ye are slaves. Mine to command: yours to obey. And this hour +I decree, that henceforth no gibberish of bulwarks and bulkheads be +heard in this land. For a dead bulwark and a bulkhead, to dam off +sedition, will I make of that man, who again but breathes those bulky +words. Ho! spears! see that these knee-pans here kneel till set of +sun.” + +High noon was now passed; and removing his crown, and placing it on the +dais for the kneelers to look at during their devotions, King Media +departed from that place, and once more played the agreeable host. + + + + +CHAPTER LXI. +An Incognito + + +For the rest of that day, and several that followed, we were +continually receiving visits from the neighboring islands; whose +inhabitants in fleets and flotillas flocked round Odo to behold the +guests of its lord. Among them came many messengers from the +neighboring kings with soft speeches and gifts. + +But it were needless to detail our various interviews, or relate in +what manifold ways, the royal strangers gave token of their interest +concerning us. + +Upon the third day, however, there was noticed a mysterious figure, +like the inscrutable incognitos sometimes encountered, crossing the +tower-shadowed Plaza of Assignations at Lima. It was enveloped in a +dark robe of tappa, so drawn and plaited about the limbs; and with one +hand, so wimpled about the face, as only to expose a solitary eye. But +that eye was a world. Now it was fixed upon Yillah with a sinister +glance, and now upon me, but with a different expression. However great +the crowd, however tumultuous, that fathomless eye gazed on; till at +last it seemed no eye, but a spirit, forever prying into my soul. Often +I strove to approach it, but it would evade me, soon reappearing. + +Pointing out the apparition to Media, I intreated him to take means to +fix it, that my suspicions might be dispelled, as to its being +incorporeal. He replied that, by courtesy, incognitos were sacred. +Insomuch that the close-plaited robe and the wimple were secure as a +castle. At last, to my relief, the phantom disappeared, and was seen no +more. + +Numerous and fervent the invitations received to return the calls +wherewith we were honored. But for the present we declined them; +preferring to establish ourselves firmly in the heart of Media, ere +encountering the vicissitudes of roaming. In a multitude of +acquaintances is less security, than in one faithful friend. + +Now, while these civilities were being received, and on the fourth +morning after our arrival, there landed on the beach three black-eyed +damsels, deep brunettes, habited in long variegated robes, and with gay +blossoms on their heads. + +With many salams, the strangers were ushered into my presence by an old +white-haired servitor of Media’s, who with a parting congé murmured, +“From Queen Hautia,” then departed. Surprised, I stood mute, and +welcomed them. + +The first, with many smiles and blandishments, waved before me a +many-tinted Iris: the flag-flower streaming with pennons. Advancing, +the second then presented three rose-hued purple-veined Circea flowers, +the dew still clinging to them. The third placed in my hand a moss-rose +bud; then, a Venus-car. + +“Thanks for your favors! now your message.” + +Starting at this reception, graciously intended, they conferred a +moment; when the Iris-bearer said in winning phrase, “We come from +Hautia, whose moss-rose you hold.” + +“All thanks to Hautia then; the bud is very fragrant.” + +Then she pointed to the Venus-car. + +“This too is sweet; thanks to Hautia for her flowers. Pray, bring me +more.” + +“He mocks our mistress,” and gliding from me, they waved witch- hazels, +leaving me alone and wondering. + +Informing Media of this scene, he smiled; threw out queer hints of +Hautia; but knew not what her message meant. + +At first this affair occasioned me no little uneasiness, with much +matter for marveling; but in the novel pleasure of our sojourn in Odo, +it soon slipped from my mind; nor for some time, did I again hear aught +of Queen Hautia. + + + + +CHAPTER LXII. +Taji Retires From The World + + +After a while, when the strangers came not in shoals as before, I +proposed to our host, a stroll over his dominions; desirous of +beholding the same, and secretly induced by the hope of selecting an +abode, more agreeable to my fastidious taste, than the one already +assigned me. + +The ramble over—a pleasant one it was—it resulted in a determination on +my part to quit Odo. Yet not to go very far; only ten or twelve yards, +to a little green tuft of an islet; one of many, which here and there, +all round the island, nestled like birds’ nests in the branching boughs +of the coral grove, whose roots laid hold of the foundations of the +deep. Between these islets and the shore, extended shelving ledges, +with shallows above, just sufficient to float a canoe. One of these +islets was wooded and wined; an arbor in the sea. And here, Media +permitting, I decided to dwell. + +Not long was Media in complying; nor long, ere my retreat was in +readiness. Laced together, the twisting boughs were closely thatched. +And thatched were the sides also, with deep crimson pandannus leaves; +whose long, forked spears, lifted by the breeze, caused the whole place +to blaze, as with flames. Canes, laid on palm trunks, formed the floor. +How elastic! In vogue all over Odo, among the chiefs, it imparted such +a buoyancy to the person, that to this special cause may be imputed in +good part the famous fine spirits of the nobles. + +Hypochondriac! essay the elastic flooring! It shall so pleasantly and +gently jolt thee, as to shake up, and pack off the stagnant humors +mantling thy pool-like soul. + +Such was my dwelling. But I make no mention of sundry little +appurtenances of tropical housekeeping: calabashes, cocoanut shells, +and rolls of fine tappa; till with Yillah seated at last in my arbor, I +looked round, and wanted for naught. + +But what of Jarl and Samoa? Why Jarl must needs be fanciful, as well as +myself. Like a bachelor in chambers, he settled down right opposite to +me, on the main land, in a little wigwam in the grove. + +But Samoa, following not his comrade’s example, still tarried in the +camp of the Hittites and Jebusites of Odo. Beguiling men of their +leisure by his marvelous stories: and maidens of their hearts by his +marvelous wiles. + +When I chose, I was completely undisturbed in my arbor; an ukase of +Media’s forbidding indiscriminate intrusion. But thrice in the day came +a garrulous old man with my viands. + +Thus sequestered, however, I could not entirely elude the pryings of +the people of the neighboring islands; who often passed by, slowly +paddling, and earnestly regarding my retreat. But gliding along at a +distance, and never essaying a landing, their occasional vicinity +troubled me but little. But now and then of an evening, when thick and +fleet the shadows were falling, dim glimpses of a canoe would be spied; +hovering about the place like a ghost. And once, in the stillness of +the night, hearing the near ripple of a prow, I sallied forth, but the +phantom quickly departed. + +That night, Yillah shuddered as she slept. “The whirl-pool,” she +murmured, “sweet mosses.” Next day she was lost in reveries, plucking +pensive hyacinths, or gazing intently into the lagoon. + + + + +CHAPTER LXIII. +Odo And Its Lord + + +Time now to enter upon some further description of the island and its +lord. + +And first for Media: a gallant gentleman and king. From a goodly stock +he came. In his endless pedigree, reckoning deities by decimals, +innumerable kings, and scores of great heroes, chiefs, and priests. Nor +in person, did he belie his origin. No far-descended dwarf was he, the +least of a receding race. He stood like a palm tree; about whose +acanthus capital droops not more gracefully the silken fringes, than +Media’s locks upon his noble brow. Strong was his arm to wield the +club, or hurl the javelin; and potent, I ween, round a maiden’s waist. + +Thus much here for Media. Now comes his isle. + +Our pleasant ramble found it a little round world by itself; full of +beauties as a garden; chequered by charming groves; watered by roving +brooks; and fringed all round by a border of palm trees, whose roots +drew nourishment from the water. But though abounding in other quarters +of the Archipelago, not a solitary bread-fruit grew in Odo. A +noteworthy circumstance, observable in these regions, where islands +close adjoining, so differ in their soil, that certain fruits growing +genially in one, are foreign to another. But Odo was famed for its +guavas, whose flavor was likened to the flavor of new-blown lips; and +for its grapes, whose juices prompted many a laugh and many a groan. + +Beside the city where Media dwelt, there were few other clusters of +habitations in Odo. The higher classes living, here and there, in +separate households; but not as eremites. Some buried themselves in the +cool, quivering bosoms of the groves. Others, fancying a marine +vicinity, dwelt hard by the beach in little cages of bamboo; whence of +mornings they sallied out with jocund cries, and went plunging into the +refreshing bath, whose frothy margin was the threshold of their +dwellings. Others still, like birds, built their nests among the sylvan +nooks of the elevated interior; whence all below, and hazy green, lay +steeped in languor the island’s throbbing heart. + +Thus dwelt the chiefs and merry men of mark. The common sort, including +serfs, and Helots, war-captives held in bondage, lived in secret +places, hard to find. Whence it came, that, to a stranger, the whole +isle looked care-free and beautiful. Deep among the ravines and the +rocks, these beings lived in noisome caves, lairs for beasts, not human +homes; or built them coops of rotten boughs—living trees were banned +them—whose mouldy hearts hatched vermin. Fearing infection of some +plague, born of this filth, the chiefs of Odo seldom passed that way +and looking round within their green retreats, and pouring out their +wine, and plucking from orchards of the best, marveled how these swine +could grovel in the mire, and wear such sallow cheeks. But they offered +no sweet homes; from that mire they never sought to drag them out; they +open threw no orchard; and intermitted not the mandates that condemned +their drudges to a life of deaths. Sad sight! to see those +round-shouldered Helots, stooping in their trenches: artificial, three +in number, and concentric: the isle well nigh surrounding. And herein, +fed by oozy loam, and kindly dew from heaven, and bitter sweat from +men, grew as in hot-beds the nutritious Taro. + +Toil is man’s allotment; toil of brain, or toil of hands, or a grief +that’s more than either, the grief and sin of idleness. But when man +toils and slays himself for masters who withhold the life he gives to +them—then, then, the soul screams out, and every sinew cracks. So with +these poor serfs. And few of them could choose but be the brutes they +seemed. + +Now needs it to be said, that Odo was no land of pleasure unalloyed, +and plenty without a pause?—Odo, in whose lurking-places infants turned +from breasts, whence flowed no nourishment.—Odo, in whose inmost +haunts, dark groves were brooding, passing which you heard most dismal +cries, and voices cursing Media. There, men were scourged; their crime, +a heresy; the heresy, that Media was no demigod. For this they +shrieked. Their fathers shrieked before; their fathers, who, tormented, +said, “Happy we to groan, that our children’s children may be glad.” +But their children’s children howled. Yet these, too, echoed previous +generations, and loudly swore, “The pit that’s dug for us may prove +another’s grave.” + +But let all pass. To look at, and to roam about of holidays, Odo seemed +a happy land. The palm-trees waved—though here and there you marked one +sear and palsy-smitten; the flowers bloomed—though dead ones moldered +in decay; the waves ran up the strand in glee—though, receding, they +sometimes left behind bones mixed with shells. + +But else than these, no sign of death was seen throughout the isle. Did +men in Odo live for aye? Was Ponce de Leon’s fountain there? For near +and far, you saw no ranks and files of graves, no generations harvested +in winrows. In Odo, no hard-hearted nabob slept beneath a gentle +epitaph; no requiescat-in-pace mocked a sinner damned; no memento-mori +admonished men to live while yet they might. Here Death hid his skull; +and hid it in the sea, the common sepulcher of Odo. Not dust to dust, +but dust to brine; not hearses but canoes. For all who died upon that +isle were carried out beyond the outer reef, and there were buried with +their sires’ sires. Hence came the thought, that of gusty nights, when +round the isles, and high toward heaven, flew the white reef’s rack and +foam, that then and there, kept chattering watch and ward, the myriads +that were ocean-tombed. + +But why these watery obsequies? + +Odo was but a little isle, and must the living make way for the dead, +and Life’s small colony be dislodged by Death’s grim hosts; as the +gaunt tribes of Tamerlane o’erspread the tented pastures of the Khan? + +And now, what follows, said these Islanders: “Why sow corruption in the +soil which yields us life? We would not pluck our grapes from over +graves. This earth’s an urn for flowers, not for ashes.” + +They said that Oro, the supreme, had made a cemetery of the sea. + +And what more glorious grave? Was Mausolus more sublimely urned? Or do +the minster-lamps that burn before the tomb of Charlemagne, show more +of pomp, than all the stars, that blaze above the shipwrecked mariner? + +But no more of the dead; men shrug their shoulders, and love not their +company; though full soon we shall all have them for fellows. + + + + +CHAPTER LXIV. +Yillah A Phantom + + +For a time we were happy in Odo: Yillah and I in our islet. Nor did the +pearl on her bosom glow more rosily than the roses in her cheeks; +though at intervals they waned and departed; and deadly pale was her +glance, when she murmured of the whirlpool and mosses. As pale my soul, +bethinking me of Aleema the priest. + +But day by day, did her spell weave round me its magic, and all the +hidden things of her being grew more lovely and strange. Did I commune +with a spirit? Often I thought that Paradise had overtaken me on earth, +and that Yillah was verily an angel, and hence the mysteries that +hallowed her. + +But how fleeting our joys. Storms follow bright dawnings.—Long memories +of short-lived scenes, sad thoughts of joyous hours—how common are ye +to all mankind. When happy, do we pause and say—“Lo, thy felicity, my +soul?” No: happiness seldom seems happiness, except when looked back +upon from woes. A flowery landscape, you must come out of, to behold. + +Sped the hours, the days, the one brief moment of our joys. Fairy bower +in the fair lagoon, scene of sylvan ease and heart’s repose,—Oh, +Yillah, Yillah! All the woods repeat the sound, the wild, wild woods of +my wild soul. Yillah! Yillah! cry the small strange voices in me, and +evermore, and far and deep, they echo on. + +Days passed. When one morning I found the arbor vacant. Gone! A dream. +I closed my eyes, and would have dreamed her back. In vain. Starting, I +called upon her name; but none replied. Fleeing from the islet, I +gained the neighboring shore, and searched among the woods; and my +comrades meeting, besought their aid. But idle all. No glimpse of +aught, save trees and flowers. Then Media was sought out; the event +made known; and quickly, bands were summoned to range the isle. + +Noon came; but no Yillah. When Media averred she was no longer in Odo. +Whither she was gone, or how, he knew not; nor could any imagine. + +At this juncture, there chanced to arrive certain messengers from +abroad; who, presuming that all was well with Taji, came with renewed +invitations to visit various pleasant places round about. Among these, +came Queen Hautia’s heralds, with their Iris flag, once more bringing +flowers. But they came and went unheeded. + +Setting out to return, these envoys were accompanied by numerous +followers of Media, dispatched to the neighboring islands, to seek out +the missing Yillah. But three days passed; and, one by one, they all +returned; and stood before me silently. + +For a time I raved. Then, falling into outer repose, lived for a space +in moods and reveries, with eyes that knew no closing, one glance +forever fixed. + +They strove to rouse me. Girls danced and sang; and tales of fairy +times were told; of monstrous imps, and youths enchanted; of groves and +gardens in the sea. Yet still I moved not, hearing all, yet noting +naught. Media cried, “For shame, oh Taji; thou, a god?” and placed a +spear in my nerveless hand. And Jarl loud called upon me to awake. +Samoa marveled. + +Still sped the days. And at length, my memory was restored. The +thoughts of things broke over me like returning billows on a beach long +bared. A rush, a foam of recollections!—Sweet Yillah gone, and I +bereaved. + +Another interval, and that mood was past. Misery became a memory. The +keen pang a deep vibration. The remembrance seemed the thing +remembered; though bowed with sadness. There are thoughts that lie and +glitter deep: tearful pearls beneath life’s sea, that surges still, and +rolls sunlit, whatever it may hide. Common woes, like fluids, mix all +round. Not so with that other grief. Some mourners load the air with +lamentations; but the loudest notes are struck from hollows. Their +tears flow fast: but the deep spring only wells. + +At last I turned to Media, saying I must hie from Odo, and rove +throughout all Mardi; for Yillah might yet be found. + +But hereafter, in words, little more of the maiden, till perchance her +fate be learned. + + + + +CHAPTER LXV. +Taji Makes Three Acquaintances + + +Down to this period, I had restrained Samoa from wandering to the +neighboring islands, though he had much desired it, in compliance with +the invitations continually received. But now I informed both him, and +his comrade, of the tour I purposed; desiring their company. + +Upon the announcement of my intention to depart, to my no small +surprise Media also proposed to accompany me: a proposition gladly +embraced. It seems, that for some reason, he had not as yet extended +his travels to the more distant islands. Hence the voyage in prospect +was particularly agreeable to him. Nor did he forbear any pains to +insure its prosperity; assuring me, furthermore, that its object must +eventually be crowned with success. “I myself am interested in this +pursuit,” said he; “and trust me, Yillah will be found.” + +For the tour of the lagoon, the docile Chamois was proposed; but Media +dissented; saying, that it befitted not the lord of Odo to voyage in +the equipage of his guest. Therefore, three canoes were selected from +his own royal fleet. + +One for ourselves, and a trio of companions whom he purposed +introducing to my notice; the rest were reserved for attendants. + +Thanks to Media’s taste and heedfulness, the strangers above mentioned +proved truly acceptable. + +The first was Mohi, or Braid-Beard, so called from the manner in which +he wore that appendage, exceedingly long and gray. He was a venerable +teller of stories and legends, one of the Keepers of the Chronicles of +the Kings of Mardi. + +The second was Babbalanja, a man of a mystical aspect, habited in a +voluminous robe. He was learned in Mardian lore; much given to +quotations from ancient and obsolete authorities: the Ponderings of Old +Bardianna: the Pandects of Alla-Malolla. + +Third and last, was Yoomy, or the Warbler. A youthful, long-haired, +blue-eyed minstrel; all fits and starts; at times, absent of mind, and +wan of cheek; but always very neat and pretty in his apparel; wearing +the most becoming of turbans, a Bird of Paradise feather its plume, and +sporting the gayest of sashes. Most given was Yoomy to amorous +melodies, and rondos, and roundelays, very witching to hear. But at +times disdaining the oaten reed, like a clarion he burst forth with +lusty lays of arms and battle; or, in mournful strains, sounded elegies +for departed bards and heroes. + +Thus much for Yoomy as a minstrel. In other respects, it would be hard +to depict him. He was so capricious a mortal; so swayed by contrary +moods; so lofty, so humble, so sad, so merry; so made up of a thousand +contradictions, that we must e’en let him depict himself as our story +progresses. And herein it is hoped he will succeed; since no one in +Mardi comprehended him. + +Now the trio, thus destined for companions on our voyage, had for some +time been anxious to take the tour of the Archipelago. In particular, +Babbalanja had often expressed the most ardent desire to visit every +one of the isles, in quest of some object, mysteriously hinted. He +murmured deep concern for my loss, the sincerest sympathy; and pressing +my hand more than once, said lowly, “Your pursuit is mine, noble Taji. +Where’er you search, I follow.” + +So, too, Yoomy addressed me; but with still more feeling. And something +like this, also, Braid-Beard repeated. + +But to my sorrow, I marked that both Mohi and Babbalanja, especially +the last, seemed not so buoyant of hope, concerning lost Yillah, as the +youthful Yoomy, and his high-spirited lord, King Media. + +As our voyage would embrace no small period of time, it behoved King +Media to appoint some trustworthy regent, to rule during his absence. +This regent was found in Almanni, a stem-eyed, resolute warrior, a +kinsman of the king. + +All things at last in readiness, and the ensuing morning appointed for +a start, Media, on the beach, at eventide, when both light and water +waned, drew a rude map of the lagoon, to compensate for the +obstructions in the way of a comprehensive glance at it from Odo. + +And thus was sketched the plan of our voyage; which islands first to +visit; and which to touch at, when we should be homeward bound. + + + + +CHAPTER LXVI. +With A Fair Wind, At Sunrise They Sail + + +True each to his word, up came the sun, and round to my isle came +Media. + +How glorious a morning! The new-born clouds all dappled with gold, and +streaked with violet; the sun in high spirits; and the pleasant air +cooled overnight by the blending circumambient fountains, forever +playing all round the reef; the lagoon within, the coral-rimmed basin, +into which they poured, subsiding, hereabouts, into green tranquillity. + +But what monsters of canoes! Would they devour an innocent voyager? +their great black prows curling aloft, and thrown back like trunks of +elephants; a dark, snaky length behind, like the sea-serpent’s train. + +The prow of the foremost terminated in a large, open, shark’s mouth, +garnished with ten rows of pearly human teeth, curiously inserted into +the sculptured wood. The gunwale was ornamented with rows of rich +spotted Leopard and Tiger-shells; here and there, varied by others, +flat and round, and spirally traced; gay serpents petrified in coils. +These were imbedded in a grooved margin, by means of a resinous +compound, exhaling such spices, that the canoes were odoriferous as the +Indian chests of the Maldives. + +The likeness of the foremost canoe to an elephant, was helped by a sort +of canopied Howdah in its stern, of heavy, russet-dyed tappa, tasselled +at the corners with long bunches of cocoanut fibres, stained red. These +swayed to and fro, like the fox-tails on a Tuscarora robe. + +But what is this, in the head of the canoe, just under the shark’s +mouth? A grinning little imp of an image; a ring in its nose; cowrie +shells jingling at its ears; with an abominable leer, like that of +Silenus reeling on his ass. It was taking its ease; cosily smoking a +pipe; its bowl, a duodecimo edition of the face of the smoker. This +image looked sternward; everlastingly mocking us. + +Of these canoes, it may be well to state, that although during our stay +in Odo, so many barges and shallops had touched there, nothing similar +to Media’s had been seen. But inquiring whence his sea- equipage came, +we were thereupon taught to reverence the same as antiquities and +heir-looms; claw-keeled, dragon-prowed crafts of a bygone generation; +at present, superseded in general use by the more swan-like canoes, +significant of the advanced stage of marine architecture in Mardi. No +sooner was this known, than what had seemed almost hideous in my eyes, +became merely grotesque. Nor could I help being greatly delighted with +the good old family pride of our host. + +The upper corners of our sails displayed the family crest of Media; +three upright boars’ tusks, in an heraldic field argent. A fierce +device: Whom rends he? + +All things in readiness, we glided away: the multitude waving adieu; +and our flotilla disposed in the following order. + +First went the royal Elephant, carrying Media, myself, Jarl, and Samoa; +Mohi the Teller of Legends, Babbalanja, and Yoomy, and six vivacious +paddlers; their broad paddle-blades carved with the royal boars’ tusks, +the same tattooed on their chests for a livery. + +And thus, as Media had promised, we voyaged in state. To crown all, +seated sideways in the high, open shark’s-mouth of our prow was a +little dwarf of a boy, one of Media’s pages, a red conch-shell, +bugle-wise suspended at his side. Among various other offices, it was +the duty of little Vee-Vee to announce the advent of his master, upon +drawing near to the islands in our route. Two short bars, projecting +from one side of the prow, furnished him the means of ascent to his +perch. + +As we gained the open lagoon with bellied sails, and paddles playing, a +sheaf of foam borne upright at our prow; Yoomy, standing where the +spicy spray flew over him, stretched forth his hand and cried—“The dawn +of day is passed, and Mardi lies all before us: all her isles, and all +her lakes; all her stores of good and evil. Storms may come, our barks +may drown. But blow before us, all ye winds; give us a lively blast, +good clarion; rally round us all our wits; and be this voyage full +gayly sailed, for Yillah will yet be found.” + + + + +CHAPTER LXVII. +Little King Peepi + + +Valapee, or the Isle of Yams, being within plain sight of Media’s +dominions, we were not very long in drawing nigh to its shores. + +Two long parallel elevations, rising some three arrow-flights into the +air, double-ridge the island’s entire length, lapping between, a +widening vale, so level withal, that at either extremity, the green of +its groves blends with the green of the lagoon; and the isle seems +divided by a strait. + +Within several paces of the beach, our canoes keeled the bottom, and +camel-like mutely hinted that we voyagers must dismount. + +Hereupon, the assembled islanders ran into the water, and with bent +shoulders obsequiously desired the honor of transporting us to land. +The beach gained, all present wearing robes instantly stripped them to +the waist; a naked chest being their salute to kings. Very convenient +for the common people, this; their half-clad forms presenting a +perpetual and profound salutation. + +Presently, Peepi, the ruler of Valapee drew near: a boy, hardly ten +years old, striding the neck of a burly mute, bearing a long spear +erect before him, to which was attached a canopy of five broad banana +leaves, new plucked. Thus shaded, little Peepi advanced, steadying +himself by the forelock of his bearer. + +Besides his bright red robe, the young prince wore nothing but the +symbol of Valapeean royalty; a string of small, close-fitting, concave +shells, coiled and ambushed in his profuse, curly hair; one end falling +over his ear, revealing a serpent’s head, curiously carved from a +nutmeg. + +Quite proverbial, the unembarrassed air of young slips of royalty. But +there was something so surprisingly precocious in this young Peepi, +that at first one hardly knew what to conclude. + +The first compliments over, the company were invited inland to a shady +retreat. + +As we pursued the path, walking between old Mohi the keeper of +chronicles and Samoa the Upoluan, Babbalanja besought the former to +enlighten a stranger concerning the history of this curious Peepi. +Whereupon the chronicler gave us the following account; for all of +which he alone is responsible. + +Peepi, it seems, had been proclaimed king before he was born; his sire +dying some few weeks previous to that event; and vacating his divan, +declared that he left a monarch behind. + +Marvels were told of Peepi. Along with the royal dignity, and +superadded to the soul possessed in his own proper person, the infant +monarch was supposed to have inherited the valiant spirits of some +twenty heroes, sages, simpletons, and demi-gods, previously lodged in +his sire. + +Most opulent in spiritual gifts was this lord of Valapee; the legatee, +moreover, of numerous anonymous souls, bequeathed to him by their late +loyal proprietors. By a slavish act of his convocation of chiefs, he +also possessed the reversion of all and singular the immortal spirits, +whose first grantees might die intestate in Valapee. Servile, yet +audacious senators! thus prospectively to administrate away the +inalienable rights of posterity. But while yet unborn, the people of +Valapee had been deprived of more than they now sought to wrest from +their descendants. And former Peepies, infant and adult, had received +homage more profound, than Peepi the Present. Witness the demeanor of +the chieftains of old, upon every new investiture of the royal serpent. +In a fever of loyalty, they were wont to present themselves before the +heir to the isle, to go through with the court ceremony of the Pupera; +a curious proceeding, so called: inverted endeavors to assume an erect +posture: the nasal organ the base. + +It was to the frequent practice of this ceremony, that most intelligent +observers imputed the flattened noses of the elderly chiefs of the +island; who, nevertheless, much gloried therein. + +It was these chiefs, also, who still observed the old-fashioned custom +of retiring from the presence of royalty with their heads between their +thighs; so that while advancing in the contrary direction, their faces +might be still deferentially turned toward their lord and master. A +fine view of him did they obtain. All objects look well through an +arch. + +But to return to Peepi, the inheritor of souls and subjects. It was an +article of faith with the people of Valapee, that Peepi not only +actually possessed the souls bequeathed to him; but that his own was +enriched by their peculiar qualities: The headlong valor of the late +Tongatona; the pusillanimous discretion of Blandoo; the cunning of +Voyo; the simplicity of Raymonda; the prodigality of Zonoree; the +thrift of Titonti. + +But had all these, and similar opposite qualities, simultaneously acted +as motives upon Peepi, certes, he would have been a most pitiable +mortal, in a ceaseless eddy of resolves, incapable of a solitary act. + +But blessed be the gods, it was otherwise. Though it fared little +better for his subjects as it was. His assorted souls were uppermost +and active in him, one by one. Today, valiant Tongatona ruled the isle, +meditating wars and invasions; tomorrow, thrice discreet Blandoo, who, +disbanding the levies, turned his attention to the terraces of yams. +And so on in rotation to the end. + +Whence, though capable of action, Peepi, by reason of these revolving +souls in him, was one of the most unreliable of beings. What the +open-handed Zonoree promised freely to-day, the parsimonious Titonti +withheld to-morrow; and forever Raymonda was annulling the doings of +Voyo; and Voyo the doings of Raymonda. + +What marvel then, that in Valapee all was legislative uproar and +confusion; advance and retreat; abrogations and revivals; foundations +without superstructures; nothing permanent but the island itself. + +Nor were there those in the neighboring countries, who failed to reap +profit from this everlasting transition state of the affairs of the +kingdom. All boons from Peepi were entreated when the prodigal Zonoree +was lord of the ascendant. And audacious claims were urged upon the +state when the pusillanimous Blandoo shrank from the thought of +resisting them. + +Thus subject to contrary impulses, over which he had not the faintest +control, Peepi was plainly denuded of all moral obligation to virtue. +He was no more a free agent, than the heart which beat in his bosom. +Wherefore, his complaisant parliament had passed a law, recognizing +that curious, but alarming fact; solemnly proclaiming, that King Peepi +was minus a conscience. Agreeable to truth. But when they went further, +and vowed by statute, that Peepi could do no wrong, they assuredly did +violence to the truth; besides, making a sad blunder in their logic. +For far from possessing an absolute aversion to evil, by his very +nature it was the hardest thing in the world for Peepi to do right. + +Taking all these things into consideration, then, no wonder that this +wholly irresponsible young prince should be a lad of considerable +assurance, and the easiest manners imaginable. + + + + +CHAPTER LXVIII. +How Teeth Were Regarded In Valapee + + +Coiling through the thickets, like the track of a serpent, wound along +the path we pursued. And ere long we came to a spacious grove, +embowering an oval arbor. Here, we reclined at our ease, and +refreshments were served. + +Little worthy of mention occurred, save this. Happening to catch a +glimpse of the white even teeth of Hohora one of our attendants, King +Peepi coolly begged of Media the favor, to have those same dentals +drawn on the spot, and presented to him. + +Now human teeth, extracted, are reckoned among the most valuable +ornaments in Mardi. So open wide thy strong box, Hohora, and show thy +treasures. What a gallant array! standing shoulder to shoulder, without +a hiatus between. A complete set of jewelry, indeed, thought Peepi. +But, it seems, not destined for him; Media leaving it to the present +proprietor, whether his dentals should change owners or not. + +And here, to prepare the way for certain things hereafter to be +narrated, something farther needs be said concerning the light in which +men’s molars are regarded in Mardi. + +Strung together, they are sported for necklaces, or hung in drops from +the ear; they are wrought into dice; in lieu of silken locks, are +exchanged for love tokens. + +As in all lands, men smite their breasts, and tear their hair, when +transported with grief; so, in some countries, teeth are stricken out +under the sway of similar emotions. To a very great extent, this was +once practiced in the Hawaiian Islands, ere idol and altar went down. +Still living in Oahu, are many old chiefs, who were present at the +famous obsequies of their royal old generalissimo, Tammahammaha, when +there is no telling how many pounds of ivory were cast upon his grave. + +Ah! had the regal white elephants of Siam been there, doubtless they +had offered up their long, hooked tusks, whereon they impale the +leopards, their foes; and the unicorn had surrendered that fixed +bayonet in his forehead; and the imperial Cachalot-whale, the long +chain of white towers in his jaw; yea, over that grim warrior’s grave, +the mooses, and elks, and stags, and fallow-deer had stacked their +antlers, as soldiers their arms on the field. + +Terrific shade of tattooed Tammahammaha! if, from a vile dragon’s +molars, rose mailed men, what heroes shall spring from the cannibal +canines once pertaining to warriors themselves!—Am I the witch of +Endor, that I conjure up this ghost? Or, King Saul, that I so quake at +the sight? For, lo! roundabout me Tammahammaha’s tattooing expands, +till all the sky seems a tiger’s skin. But now, the spotted phantom +sweeps by; as a man-of-war’s main-sail, cloud-like, blown far to +leeward in a gale. + +Banquo down, we return. + +In Valapee, prevails not the barbarous Hindoo custom of offering up +widows to the shades of their lords; for, bereaved, the widows there +marry again. Nor yet prevails the savage Hawaiian custom of offering up +teeth to the manes of the dead; for, at the decease of a friend, the +people rob not their own mouths to testify their woe. On the contrary, +they extract the teeth from the departed, distributing them among the +mourners for memorial legacies; as elsewhere, silver spoons are +bestowed. + +From the high value ascribed to dentals throughout the archipelago of +Mardi, and also from their convenient size, they are circulated as +money; strings of teeth being regarded by these people very much as +belts of wampum among the Winnebagoes of the North; or cowries, among +the Bengalese. So, that in Valapee the very beggars are born with a +snug investment in their mouths; too soon, however, to be appropriated +by their lords; leaving them toothless for the rest of their days, and +forcing them to diet on poee-pudding and banana blanc-mange. + +As a currency, teeth are far less clumsy than cocoanuts; which, among +certain remote barbarians, circulate for coin; one nut being +equivalent, perhaps, to a penny. The voyager who records the fact, +chuckles over it hugely; as evincing the simplicity of those heathens; +not knowing that he himself was the simpleton; since that currency of +theirs was purposely devised by the men, to check the extravagance of +their women; cocoanuts, for spending money, being such a burden to +carry. + +It only remains to be added, that the most solemn oath of a native of +Valapee is that sworn by his tooth. “By this tooth,” said Bondo to +Noojoomo, “by this tooth I swear to be avenged upon thee, oh Noojoomo!” + + + + +CHAPTER LXIX. +The Company Discourse, And Braid-Beard Rehearses A Legend + + +Finding in Valapee no trace of her whom we sought, and but little +pleased with the cringing demeanor of the people, and the wayward +follies of Peepi their lord, we early withdrew from the isle. + +As we glided away, King Media issued a sociable decree. He declared it +his royal pleasure, that throughout the voyage, all stiffness and state +etiquette should be suspended: nothing must occur to mar the freedom of +the party. To further this charming plan, he doffed his symbols of +royalty, put off his crown, laid aside his scepter, and assured us that +he would not wear them again, except when we landed; and not +invariably, then. + +“Are we not all now friends and companions?” he said. “So companions +and friends let us be. I unbend my bow; do ye likewise.” + +“But are we not to be dignified?” asked Babbalanja. + +“If dignity be free and natural, be as dignified as you please; but +away with rigidities.” + +“Away they go,” said Babbalanja; “and, my lord, now that you mind me of +it, I have often thought, that it is all folly and vanity for any man +to attempt a dignified carriage. Why, my lord,”—frankly crossing his +legs where he lay—“the king, who receives his ambassadors with a +majestic toss of the head, may have just recovered from the tooth- +ache. That thought should cant over the spine he bears so bravely.” + +“Have a care, sir! there is a king within hearing.” + +“Pardon, my lord; I was merely availing myself of the immunity bestowed +upon the company. Hereafter, permit a subject to rebel against your +sociable decrees. I will not be so frank any more.” + +“Well put, Babbalanja; come nearer; here, cross your legs by mine; you +have risen a cubit in my regard. Vee-Vee, bring us that gourd of wine; +so, pass it round with the cups. Now, Yoomy, a song!” + +And a song was sung. + +And thus did we sail; pleasantly reclining on the mats stretched out +beneath the canopied howdah. + +At length, we drew nigh to a rock, called Pella, or The Theft. A high, +green crag, toppling over its base, and flinging a cavernous shadow +upon the lagoon beneath, bubbling with the moisture that dropped. + +Passing under this cliff was like finding yourself, as some sea- +hunters unexpectedly have, beneath the open, upper jaw of a whale; +which, descending, infallibly entombs you. But familiar with the rock, +our paddlers only threw back their heads, to catch the cool, pleasant +tricklings from the mosses above. + +Wiping away several glittering beads from his beard, old Mohi turning +round where he sat, just outside the canopy, solemnly affirmed, that +the drinking of that water had cured many a man of ambition. + +“How so, old man?” demanded Media. + +“Because of its passing through the ashes of ten kings, of yore buried +in a sepulcher, hewn in the heart of the rock.” + +“Mighty kings, and famous, doubtless,” said Babbalanja, “whose bones +were thought worthy of so noble and enduring as urn. Pray, Mohi, their +names and terrible deeds.” + +“Alas! their sepulcher only remains.” + +“And, no doubt, like many others, they made that sepul for themselves. +They sleep sound, my word for it, old man. But I very much question, +if, were the rock rent, any ashes would be found. Mohi, I deny that +those kings ever had any bones to bury.” + +“Why, Babbalanja,” said Media, “since you intimate that they never had +ghosts to give up, you ignore them in toto; denying the very fact of +their being even defunct.” + +“Ten thousand pardons, my lord, no such discourtesy would I do the +anonymous memory of the illustrious dead. But whether they ever lived +or not, it is all the same with them now. Yet, grant that they lived; +then, if death be a deaf-and-dumb death, a triumphal procession over +their graves would concern them not. If a birth into brightness, then +Mardi must seem to them the most trivial of reminiscences. Or, perhaps, +theirs may be an utter lapse of memory concerning sublunary things; and +they themselves be not themselves, as the butterfly is not the larva.” + +Said Yoomy, “Then, Babbalanja, you account that a fit illustration of +the miraculous change to be wrought in man after death?” + +“No; for the analogy has an unsatisfactory end. From its chrysalis +state, the silkworm but becomes a moth, that very quickly expires. Its +longest existence is as a worm. All vanity, vanity, Yoomy, to seek in +nature for positive warranty to these aspirations of ours. Through all +her provinces, nature seems to promise immortality to life, but +destruction to beings. Or, as old Bardianna has it, if not against us, +nature is not for us.” + +Said Media, rising, “Babbalanja, you have indeed put aside the +courtier; talking of worms and caterpillars to me, a king and a demi- +god! To renown, for your theme: a more agreeable topic.” + +“Pardon, once again, my lord. And since you will, let us discourse of +that subject. First, I lay it down for an indubitable maxim, that in +itself all posthumous renown, which is the only renown, is valueless. +Be not offended, my lord. To the nobly ambitious, renown hereafter may +be something to anticipate. But analyzed, that feverish typhoid feeling +of theirs may be nothing more than a flickering fancy, that now, while +living, they are recognized as those who will be as famous in their +shrouds, as in their girdles.” + +Said Yoomy, “But those great and good deeds, Babbalanja, of which the +philosophers so often discourse: must it not be sweet to believe that +their memory will long survive us; and we ourselves in them?” + +“I speak now,” said Babbalanja, “of the ravening for fame which even +appeased, like thirst slaked in the desert, yields no felicity, but +only relief; and which discriminates not in aught that will satisfy its +cravings. But let me resume. Not an hour ago, Braid-Beard was telling +us that story of prince Ottimo, who inodorous while living, expressed +much delight at the prospect of being perfumed and embalmed, when dead. +But was not Ottimo the most eccentric of mortals? For few men issue +orders for their shrouds, to inspect their quality beforehand. Far more +anxious are they about the texture of the sheets in which their living +limbs lie. And, my lord, with some rare exceptions, does not all Mardi, +by its actions, declare, that it is far better to be notorious now, +than famous hereafter?” + +“A base sentiment, my lord,” said Yoomy. “Did not poor Bonja, the +unappreciated poet, console himself for the neglect of his +contemporaries, by inspiriting thoughts of the future?” + +“In plain words by bethinking him of the glorious harvest of bravos his +ghost would reap for him,” said Babbalanja; “but Banjo,—Bonjo,—Binjo,—I +never heard of him.” + +“Nor I,” said Mohi. + +“Nor I,” said Media. + +“Poor fellow!” cried Babbalanja; “I fear me his harvest is not yet +ripe.” + +“Alas!” cried Yoomy; “he died more than a century ago.” + +“But now that you speak of unappreciated poets, Yoomy,” said +Babbalanja, “Shall I give you a piece of my mind?” “Do,” said Mohi, +stroking his beard. + +“He, who on all hands passes for a cypher to-day, if at all remembered +hereafter, will be sure to pass for the same. For there is more +likelihood of being overrated while living, than of being underrated +when dead. And to insure your fame, you must die.” + +“A rather discouraging thought for your race. But answer: I assume that +King Media is but a mortal like you; now, how may I best perpetuate my +name?” + +Long pondered Babbalanja; then said, “Carve it, my lord, deep into a +ponderous stone, and sink it, face downward, into the sea; for the +unseen foundations of the deep are more enduring than the palpable tops +of the mountains.” + +Sailing past Pella, we gained a view of its farther side; and seated in +a lofty cleft, beheld a lonely fisherman; solitary as a seal on an +iceberg; his motionless line in the water. + +“What recks he of the ten kings,” said Babbalanja. + +“Mohi,” said Media, “methinks there is another tradition concerning +that rock: let us have it.” + +“In old times of genii and giants, there dwelt in barren lands, not +very remote from our outer reef, but since submerged, a band of evil- +minded, envious goblins, furlongs in stature, and with immeasurable +arms; who from time to time cast covetous glances upon our blooming +isles. Long they lusted; till at last, they waded through the sea, +strode over the reef, and seizing the nearest islet, rolled it over and +over, toward an adjoining outlet. + +“But the task was hard; and day-break surprised them in the midst of +their audacious thieving; while in the very act of giving the devoted +land another doughty surge and Somerset. Leaving it bottom upward and +midway poised, gardens under water, its foundations in air, they +precipitately fled; in their great haste, deserting a comrade, vainly +struggling to liberate his foot caught beneath the overturned land.” + +“This poor fellow now raised such an outcry, as to awaken the god Upi, +or the Archer, stretched out on a long cloud in the East; who forthwith +resolved to make an example of the unwilling lingerer. Snatching his +bow, he let fly an arrow. But overshooting its mark, it pierced through +and through, the lofty promontory of a neighboring island; making an +arch in it, which remaineth even unto this day. A second arrow, +however, accomplished its errand: the slain giant sinking prone to the +bottom.” + +“And now,” added Mohi, “glance over the gunwale, and you will see his +remains petrified into white ribs of coral.” + +“Ay, there they are,” said Yoomy, looking down into the water where +they gleamed. “A fanciful legend, Braid-beard.” + +“Very entertaining,” said Media. + +“Even so,” said Babbalanja. “But perhaps we lost time in listening to +it; for though we know it, we are none the wiser.” + +“Be not a cynic,” said Media. “No pastime is lost time.” + +Musing a moment, Babbalanja replied, “My lord, that maxim may be good +as it stands; but had you made six words of it, instead of six +syllables, you had uttered a better and a deeper.” + + + + +CHAPTER LXX. +The Minstrel Leads Off With A Paddle-Song; And A Message Is Received +From Abroad + + +From seaward now came a breeze so blithesome and fresh, that it made us +impatient of Babbalanja’s philosophy, and Mohi’s incredible legends. +One and all, we called upon the minstrel Yoomy to give us something in +unison with the spirited waves wide-foaming around us. + +“If my lord will permit, we will give Taji the Paddle-Chant of the +warriors of King Bello.” + +“By all means,” said Media. + +So the three canoes were brought side to side; their sails rolled up; +and paddles in hand, our paddlers seated themselves sideways on the +gunwales; Yoomy, as leader, occupying the place of the foremast, or +Bow-Paddler of the royal barge. + +Whereupon the six rows of paddle-blades being uplifted, and every eye +on the minstrel, this song was sung, with actions corresponding; the +canoes at last shooting through the water, with a violent roll. + + (All.) + Thrice waved on high, + Our paddles fly: +Thrice round the head, thrice dropt to feet: + And then well timed, + Of one stout mind, +All fall, and back the waters heap! + + (Bow-Paddler.) + Who lifts this chant? + Who sounds this vaunt? + + (All.) +The wild sea song, to the billows’ throng, + Rising, falling, + Hoarsely calling, +Now high, now low, as fast we go, +Fast on our flying foe! + + (Bow-Paddler.) + Who lifts this chant? + Who sounds this vaunt? + + (All.) +Dip, dip, in the brine our paddles dip, +Dip, dip, the fins of our swimming ship! + How the waters part, + As on we dart; + Our sharp prows fly, + And curl on high, +As the upright fin of the rushing shark, +Rushing fast and far on his flying mark! + Like him we prey; + Like him we slay; + Swim on the fog, + Our prow a blow! + + (Bow-Paddler.) + Who lifts this chant? + Who sounds this vaunt? + + (All.) +Heap back; heap back; the waters back! +Pile them high astern, in billows black; + Till we leave our wake, + In the slope we make; + And rush and ride, + On the torrent’s tide! + + +Here we were overtaken by a swift gliding canoe, which, bearing down +upon us before the wind, lowered its sail when close by: its occupants +signing our paddlers to desist. + +I started. + +The strangers were three hooded damsels the enigmatical Queen Hautia’s +heralds. + +Their pursuit surprised and perplexed me. Nor was there wanting a vague +feeling of alarm to heighten these emotions. But perhaps I was +mistaken, and this time they meant not me. + +Seated in the prow, the foremost waved her Iris flag. Cried Yoomy, +“Some message! Taji, that Iris points to you.” + +It was then, I first divined, that some meaning must have lurked in +those flowers they had twice brought me before. + +The second damsel now flung over to me Circe flowers; then, a faded +jonquil, buried in a tuft of wormwood leaves. + +The third sat in the shallop’s stern, and as it glided from us, thrice +waved oleanders. + +“What dumb show is this?” cried Media. “But it looks like poetry: +minstrel, you should know.” + +“Interpret then,” said I. + +“Shall I, then, be your Flora’s flute, and Hautia’s dragoman? Held +aloft, the Iris signified a message. These purple-woven Circe flowers +mean that some spell is weaving. That golden, pining jonquil, which you +hold, buried in those wormwood leaves, says plainly to you—Bitter love +in absence.” + +Said Media, “Well done, Taji, you have killed a queen.” “Yet no Queen +Hautia have these eyes beheld.” + +Said Babbalanja, “The thrice waved oleanders, Yoomy; what meant they?” + +“Beware—beware—beware.” + +“Then that, at least, seems kindly meant,” said Babbalanja; “Taji, +beware of Hautia.” + + + + +CHAPTER LXXI. +They Land Upon The Island Of Juam + + +Crossing the lagoon, our course now lay along the reef to Juam; a name +bestowed upon one of the largest islands hereabout; and also, +collectively, upon several wooded isles engulfing it, which together +were known as the dominions of one monarch. That monarch was Donjalolo. +Just turned of twenty-five, he was accounted not only the handsomest +man in his dominions, but throughout the lagoon. His comeliness, +however, was so feminine, that he was sometimes called “Fonoo,” or the +Girl. + +Our first view of Juam was imposing. A dark green pile of cliffs, +towering some one hundred toises; at top, presenting a range of steep, +gable-pointed projections; as if some Titanic hammer and chisel had +shaped the mass. + +Sailing nearer, we perceived an extraordinary rolling of the sea; which +bursting into the lagoon through an adjoining breach in the reef, +surged toward Juam in enormous billows. At last, dashing against the +wall of the cliff; they played there in unceasing fountains. But under +the brow of a beetling crag, the spray came and went unequally. There, +the blue billows seemed swallowed up, and lost. + +Right regally was Juam guarded. For, at this point, the rock was +pierced by a cave, into which the great waves chased each other like +lions; after a hollow, subterraneous roaring issuing forth with manes +disheveled. + +Cautiously evading the dangerous currents here ruffling the lagoon, we +rounded the wall of cliff; and shot upon a smooth expanse; on one side, +hemmed in by the long, verdent, northern shore of Juam; and across the +water, sentineled by its tributary islets. + +With sonorous Vee-Vee in the shark’s mouth, we swept toward the beach, +tumultuous with a throng. + +Our canoes were secured. And surrounded by eager glances, we passed the +lower ends of several populous valleys; and crossing a wide, open +meadow, gradually ascending, came to a range of light-green bluffs. +Here, we wended our way down a narrow defile, almost cleaving this +quarter of the island to its base. Black crags frowned overhead: among +them the shouts of the Islanders reverberated. Yet steeper grew the +defile, and more overhanging the crags till at last, the keystone of +the arch seemed dropped into its place. We found ourselves in a +subterranean tunnel, dimly lighted by a span of white day at the end. + +Emerging, what a scene was revealed! All round, embracing a circuit of +some three leagues, stood heights inaccessible, here and there, forming +buttresses, sheltering deep recesses between. The bosom of the place +was vivid with verdure. + +Shining aslant into this wild hollow, the afternoon sun lighted up its +eastern side with tints of gold. But opposite, brooded a somber shadow, +double-shading the secret places between the salient spurs of the +mountains. Thus cut in twain by masses of day and night, it seemed as +if some Last Judgment had been enacted in the glen. + +No sooner did we emerge from the defile, than we became sensible of a +dull, jarring sound; and Yoomy was almost tempted to turn and flee, +when informed that the sea-cavern, whose mouth we had passed, was +believed to penetrate deep into the opposite hills; and that the +surface of the amphitheater was depressed beneath that of the lagoon. +But all over the lowermost hillsides, and sloping into the glen, stood +grand old groves; still and stately, as if no insolent waves were +throbbing in the mountain’s heart. + +Such was Willamilla, the hereditary abode of the young monarch of Juam. + +Was Yillah immured in this strange retreat? But from those around us +naught could we learn. + +Our attention was now directed to the habitations of the glen; +comprised in two handsome villages; one to the west, the other to the +east; both stretching along the base of the cliffs. + +Said Media, “Had we arrived at Willamilla in the morning, we had found +Donjalolo and his court in the eastern village; but being afternoon, we +must travel farther, and seek him in his western retreat; for that is +now in the shade.” + +Wending our way, Media added, that aside from his elevated station as a +monarch, Donjalolo was famed for many uncommon traits; but more +especially for certain peculiar deprivations, under which he labored. + +Whereupon Braid-Beard unrolled his old chronicles; and regaled us with +the history, which will be found in the following chapter. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXII. +A Book From The Chronicles Of Mohi + + +Many ages ago, there reigned in Juam a king called Teei. This Teei’s +succession to the sovereignty was long disputed by his brother Marjora; +who at last rallying round him an army, after many vicissitudes, +defeated the unfortunate monarch in a stout fight of clubs on the +beach. + +In those days, Willamilla during a certain period of the year was a +place set apart for royal games and diversions; and was furnished with +suitable accommodations for king and court. From its peculiar position, +moreover, it was regarded as the last stronghold of the Juam monarchy: +in remote times having twice withstood the most desperate assaults from +without. And when Roonoonoo, a famous upstart, sought to subdue all the +isles in this part of the Archipelago, it was to Willamilla that the +banded kings had repaired to take counsel together; and while there +conferring, were surprised at the sudden onslaught of Roonoonoo in +person. But in the end, the rebel was captured, he and all his army, +and impaled on the tops of the hills. + +Now, defeated and fleeing for his life, Teei with his surviving +followers was driven across the plain toward the mountains. But to cut +him off from all escape to inland Willamilla, Marjora dispatched a +fleet band of warriors to occupy the entrance of the defile. +Nevertheless, Teei the pursued ran faster than his pursuers; first +gained the spot; and with his chiefs, fled swiftly down the gorge, +closely hunted by Marjora’s men. But arriving at the further end, they +in vain sought to defend it. And after much desperate fighting, the +main body of the foe corning up with great slaughter the fugitives were +driven into the glen. + +They ran to the opposite wall of cliff; where turning, they fought at +bay, blood for blood, and life for life, till at last, overwhelmed by +numbers, they were all put to the point of the spear. + +With fratricidal hate, singled out by the ferocious Marjora, Teei fell +by that brother’s hand. When stripping from the body the regal girdle, +the victor wound it round his own loins; thus proclaiming himself king +over Juam. + +Long torn by this intestine war, the island acquiesced in the new +sovereignty. But at length a sacred oracle declared, that since the +conqueror had slain his brother in deep Willamilla, so that Teei never +more issued from that refuge of death; therefore, the same fate should +be Marjora’s; for never, thenceforth, from that glen, should he go +forth; neither Marjora; nor any son of his girdled loins; nor his son’s +sons; nor the uttermost scion of his race. + +But except this denunciation, naught was denounced against the usurper; +who, mindful of the tenure by which he reigned, ruled over the island +for many moons; at his death bequeathing the girdle to his son. + +In those days, the wildest superstitions concerning the interference of +the gods in things temporal, prevailed to a much greater extent than at +present. Hence Marjora himself, called sometimes in the traditions of +the island, The-Heart-of-Black-Coral, even unscrupulous Marjora had +quailed before the oracle. “He bowed his head,” say the legends. Nor +was it then questioned, by his most devoted adherents, that had he +dared to act counter to that edict, he had dropped dead, the very +instant he went under the shadow of the defile. This persuasion also +guided the conduct of the son of Marjora, and that of his grandson. + +But there at last came to pass a change in the popular fancies +concerning this ancient anathema. The penalty denounced against the +posterity of the usurper should they issue from the glen, came to be +regarded as only applicable to an invested monarch, not to his +relatives, or heirs. + +A most favorable construction of the ban; for all those related to the +king, freely passed in and out of Willamilla. + +From the time of the usurpation, there had always been observed a +certain ceremony upon investing the heir to the sovereignty with the +girdle of Teei. Upon these occasions, the chief priests of the island +were present, acting an important part. For the space of as many days, +as there had reigned kings of Marjora’s dynasty, the inner mouth of the +defile remained sealed; the new monarch placing the last stone in the +gap. This symbolized his relinquishment forever of all purpose of +passing out of the glen. And without this observance, was no king +girdled in Juam. + +It was likewise an invariable custom, for the heir to receive the regal +investiture immediately upon the decease of his sire. No delay was +permitted. And instantly upon being girdled, he proceeded to take part +in the ceremony of closing the cave; his predecessor yet remaining +uninterred on the purple mat where he died. + +In the history of the island, three instances were recorded; wherein, +upon the vacation of the sovereignty, the immediate heir had +voluntarily renounced all claim to the succession, rather than +surrender the privilege of roving, to which he had been entitled, as a +prince of the blood. + +Said Rani, one of these young princes, in reply to the remonstrances of +his friends, “What! shall I be a king, only to be a slave? Teei’s +girdle would clasp my waist less tightly, than my soul would be banded +by the mountains of Willamilla. A subject, I am free. No slave in Juam +but its king; for all the tassels round his loins.” + +To guard against a similar resolution in the mind of his only son, the +wise sire of Donjalolo, ardently desirous of perpetuating his dignities +in a child so well beloved, had from his earliest infancy, restrained +the boy from passing out of the glen, to contract in the free air of +the Archipelago, tastes and predilections fatal to the inheritance of +the girdle. + +But as he grew in years, so impatient became young Donjalolo of the +king his father’s watchfulness over him, though hitherto a most dutiful +son, that at last he was prevailed upon by his youthful companions to +appoint a day, on which to go abroad, and visit Mardi. Hearing this +determination, the old king sought to vanquish it. But in vain. And +early on the morning of the day, that Donjalolo was to set out, he +swallowed poison, and died; in order to force his son into the instant +assumption of the honors thus suddenly inherited. + +The event, but not its dreadful circumstances, was communicated to the +prince; as with a gay party of young chiefs, he was about to enter the +mouth of the defile. + +“My sire dead!” cried Donjalolo. “So sudden, it seems a bolt from +Heaven.” And bursting into exclamations of grief, he wept upon the +bosom of Talara his friend. + +But starting from his side:—“My fate converges to a point. If I but +cross that shadow, my kingdom is lost. One lifting of my foot, and the +girdle goes to my proud uncle Darfi, who would so joy to be my master. +Haughty Dwarf! Oh Oro! would that I had ere this passed thee, fatal +cavern; and seen for myself, what outer Mardi is. Say ye true, +comrades, that Willamilla is less lovely than the valleys without? that +there is bright light in the eyes of the maidens of Mina? and wisdom in +the hearts of the old priests of Maramma; that it is pleasant to tread +the green earth where you will; and breathe the free ocean air? Would, +oh would, that I were but the least of yonder sun-clouds, that look +down alike on Willamilla and all places besides, that I might determine +aright. Yet why do I pause? did not Rani, and Atama, and Mardonna, my +ancestors, each see for himself, free Mardi; and did they not fly the +proffered girdle; choosing rather to be free to come and go, than bury +themselves forever in this fatal glen? Oh Mardi! Mardi! art thou then +so fair to see? Is liberty a thing so glorious? Yet can I be no king, +and behold thee! Too late, too late, to view thy charms and then +return. My sire! my sire! thou hast wrung my heart with this agony of +doubt. Tell me, comrades,—for ye have seen it,—is Mardi sweeter to +behold, than it is royal to reign over Juam? Silent, are ye? Knowing +what ye do, were ye me, would ye be kings? Tell me, Talara.—No king: no +king:—that were to obey, and not command. And none hath Donjalolo ere +obeyed but the king his father. A king, and my voice may be heard in +farthest Mardi, though I abide in narrow Willamilla. My sire! my sire! +Ye flying clouds, what look ye down upon? Tell me, what ye see abroad? +Methinks sweet spices breathe from out the cave.” + +“Hail, Donjalolo, King of Juam,” now sounded with acclamations from the +groves. + +Starting, the young prince beheld a multitude approaching: warriors +with spears, and maidens with flowers; and Kubla, a priest, lifting on +high the tasseled girdle of Teei, and waving it toward him. + +The young chiefs fell back. Kubla, advancing, came close to the prince, +and unclasping the badge of royalty, exclaimed, “Donjalolo, this +instant it is king or subject with thee: wilt thou be girdled monarch?” + +Gazing one moment up the dark defile, then staring vacantly, Donjalolo +turned and met the eager gaze of Darfi. Stripping off his mantle, the +next instant he was a king. + +Loud shouted the multitude, and exulted; but after mutely assisting at +the closing of the cavern, the new-girdled monarch retired sadly to his +dwelling, and was not seen again for many days. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXIII. +Something More Of The Prince + + +Previous to recording our stay in his dominions, it only remains to be +related of Donjalolo, that after assuming the girdle, a change came +over him. + +During the lifetime of his father, he had been famed for his temperance +and discretion. But when Mardi was forever shut out; and he remembered +the law of his isle, interdicting abdication to its kings; he gradually +fell into desperate courses, to drown the emotions at times distracting +him. + +His generous spirit thirsting after some energetic career, found itself +narrowed down within the little glen of Willamilla, where ardent +impulses seemed idle. But these are hard to die; and repulsed all +round, recoil upon themselves. + +So with Donjalolo; who, in many a riotous scene, wasted the powers +which might have compassed the noblest designs. + +Not many years had elapsed since the death of the king, his father. But +the still youthful prince was no longer the bright-eyed and elastic boy +who at the dawn of day had sallied out to behold the landscapes of the +neighboring isles. + +Not more effeminate Sardanapalus, than he. And, at intervals, he was +the victim of unaccountable vagaries; haunted by specters, and beckoned +to by the ghosts of his sires. + +At times, loathing his vicious pursuits, which brought him no solid +satisfaction, but ever filled him with final disgust, he would resolve +to amend his ways; solacing himself for his bitter captivity, by the +society of the wise and discreet. + +But brief the interval of repentance. Anew, he burst into excesses, a +hundred fold more insane than ever. + +Thus vacillating between virtue and vice; to neither constant, and +upbraided by both; his mind, like his person in the glen, was +continually passing and repassing between opposite extremes. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXIV. +Advancing Deeper Into The Vale, They Encounter Donjalolo + + +From the mouth of the cavern, a broad shaded way over-arched by +fraternal trees embracing in mid-air, conducted us to a cross-path, on +either hand leading to the opposite cliffs, shading the twin villages +before mentioned. + +Level as a meadow, was the bosom of the glen. Here, nodding with green +orchards of the Bread-fruit and the Palm; there, flashing with golden +plantations of the Banana. Emerging from these, we came out upon a +grassy mead, skirting a projection of the mountain. And soon we crossed +a bridge of boughs, spanning a trench, thickly planted with roots of +the Tara, like alligators, or Hollanders, reveling in the soft +alluvial. Strolling on, the wild beauty of the mountains excited our +attention. The topmost crags poured over with vines; which, undulating +in the air, seemed leafy cascades; their sources the upland groves. + +Midway up the precipice, along a shelf of rock, sprouted the +multitudinous roots of an apparently trunkless tree. Shooting from +under the shallow soil, they spread all over the rocks below, covering +them with an intricate net-work. While far aloft, great boughs—each a +copse—clambered to the very summit of the mountain; then bending over, +struck anew into the soil; forming along the verge an interminable +colonnade; all manner of antic architecture standing against the sky. + +According to Mohi, this tree was truly wonderful; its seed having been +dropped from the moon; where were plenty more similar forests, causing +the dark spots on its surface. + +Here and there, the cool fluid in the veins of the mountains gushed +forth in living springs; their waters received in green mossy tanks, +half buried in grasses. + +In one place, a considerable stream, bounding far out from a wooded +height, ere reaching the ground was dispersed in a wide misty shower, +falling so far from the base of the cliff; that walking close +underneath, you felt little moisture. Passing this fall of vapors, we +spied many Islanders taking a bath. + +But what is yonder swaying of the foliage? And what now issues forth, +like a habitation astir? Donjalolo drawing nigh to his guests. + +He came in a fair sedan; a bower, resting upon three long, parallel +poles, borne by thirty men, gayly attired; five at each pole-end. +Decked with dyed tappas, and looped with garlands of newly-plucked +flowers, from which, at every step, the fragrant petals were blown; +with a sumptuous, elastic motion the gay sedan came on; leaving behind +it a long, rosy wake of fluttering leaves and odors. + +Drawing near, it revealed a slender, enervate youth, of pallid beauty, +reclining upon a crimson mat, near the festooned arch of the bower. His +anointed head was resting against the bosom of a girl; another stirred +the air, with a fan of Pintado plumes. The pupils of his eyes were as +floating isles in the sea. In a soft low tone he murmured “Media!” + +The bearers paused; and Media advancing; the Island Kings bowed their +foreheads together. + +Through tubes ignited at the end, Donjaloln’s reclining attendants now +blew an aromatic incense around him. These were composed of the +stimulating leaves of the “Aina,” mixed with the long yellow blades of +a sweet-scented upland grass; forming a hollow stem. In general, the +agreeable fumes of the “Aina” were created by one’s own inhalations; +but Donjalolo deeming the solace too dearly purchased by any exertion +of the royal lungs, regaled himself through those of his attendants, +whose lips were as moss-rose buds after a shower. + +In silence the young prince now eyed us attentively; meanwhile gently +waving his hand, to obtain a better view through the wreaths of vapor. +He was about to address us, when chancing to catch a glimpse of Samoa, +he suddenly started; averted his glance; and wildly commanded the +warrior out of sight. Upon this, his attendants would have soothed him; +and Media desired the Upoluan to withdraw. + +While we were yet lost in wonder at this scene, Donjalolo, with eyes +closed, fell back into the arms of his damsels. Recovering, he fetched +a deep sigh, and gazed vacantly around. + +It seems, that he had fancied Samoa the noon-day specter of his +ancestor Marjora; the usurper having been deprived of an arm in the +battle which gained him the girdle. Poor prince: this was one of those +crazy conceits, so puzzling to his subjects. + +Media now hastened to assure Donjalolo, that Samoa, though no cherub to +behold, was good flesh and blood, nevertheless. And soon the king +unconcernedly gazed; his monomania having departed as a dream. + +But still suffering from the effects of an overnight feast, he +presently murmured forth a desire to be left to his women; adding that +his people would not fail to provide for the entertainment of his +guests. + +The curtains of the sedan were now drawn; and soon it disappeared in +the groves. Journeying on, ere long we arrived at the western side of +the glen; where one of the many little arbors scattered among the +trees, was assigned for our abode. Here, we reclined to an agreeable +repast. After which, we strolled forth to view the valley at large; +more especially the far-famed palaces of the prince. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXV. +Time And Temples + + +In the oriental Pilgrimage of the pious old Purchas, and in the fine +old folio Voyages of Hakluyt, Thevenot, Ramusio, and De Bry, we read of +many glorious old Asiatic temples, very long in erecting. And veracious +Gaudentia di Lucca hath a wondrous narration of the time consumed in +rearing that mighty three-hundred-and-seventy-five- pillared Temple of +the Year, somewhere beyond Libya; whereof, the columns did signify +days, and all round fronted upon concentric zones of palaces, cross-cut +by twelve grand avenues symbolizing the signs of the zodiac, all +radiating from the sun-dome in their midst. And in that wild eastern +tale of his, Marco Polo tells us, how the Great Mogul began him a +pleasure-palace on so imperial a scale, that his grandson had much ado +to complete it. + +But no matter for marveling all this: great towers take time to +construct. + +And so of all else. + +And that which long endures full-fledged, must have long lain in the +germ. And duration is not of the future, but of the past; and eternity +is eternal, because it has been, and though a strong new monument be +builded to-day, it only is lasting because its blocks are old as the +sun. It is not the Pyramids that are ancient, but the eternal granite +whereof they are made; which had been equally ancient though yet in the +quarry. For to make an eternity, we must build with eternities; whence, +the vanity of the cry for any thing alike durable and new; and the +folly of the reproach—Your granite hath come from the old-fashioned +hills. For we are not gods and creators; and the controversialists have +debated, whether indeed the All-Plastic Power itself can do more than +mold. In all the universe is but one original; and the very suns must +to their source for their fire; and we Prometheuses must to them for +ours; which, when had, only perpetual Vestal tending will keep alive. + +But let us back from fire to store. No fine firm fabric ever yet grew +like a gourd. Nero’s House of Gold was not raised in a day; nor the +Mexican House of the Sun; nor the Alhambra; nor the Escurial; nor +Titus’s Amphitheater; nor the Illinois Mounds; nor Diana’s great +columns at Ephesus; nor Pompey’s proud Pillar; nor the Parthenon; nor +the Altar of Belus; nor Stonehenge; nor Solomon’s Temple; nor Tadmor’s +towers; nor Susa’s bastions; nor Persepolis’ pediments. Round and +round, the Moorish turret at Seville was not wound heavenward in the +revolution of a day; and from its first founding, five hundred years +did circle, ere Strasbourg’s great spire lifted its five hundred feet +into the air. No: nor were the great grottos of Elephanta hewn out in +an hour; nor did the Troglodytes dig Kentucky’s Mammoth Cave in a sun; +nor that of Trophonius, nor Antiparos; nor the Giant’s Causeway. Nor +were the subterranean arched sewers of Etruria channeled in a trice; +nor the airy arched aqueducts of Nerva thrown over their values in the +ides of a month. Nor was Virginia’s Natural Bridge worn under in a +year; nor, in geology, were the eternal Grampians upheaved in an age. +And who shall count the cycles that revolved ere earth’s interior +sedimentary strata were crystalized into stone. Nor Peak of Piko, nor +Teneriffe, were chiseled into obelisks in a decade; nor had Mount Athos +been turned into Alexander’s statue so soon. And the bower of +Artaxerxes took a whole Persian summer to grow; and the Czar’s Ice +Palace a long Muscovite winter to congéal. No, no: nor was the Pyramid +of Cheops masoned in a month; though, once built, the sands left by the +deluge might not have submerged such a pile. Nor were the broad boughs +of Charles’ Oak grown in a spring; though they outlived the royal +dynasties of Tudor and Stuart. Nor were the parts of the great Iliad +put together in haste; though old Homer’s temple shall lift up its +dome, when St. Peter’s is a legend. Even man himself lives months ere +his Maker deems him fit to be born; and ere his proud shaft gains its +full stature, twenty-one long Julian years must elapse. And his whole +mortal life brings not his immortal soul to maturity; nor will all +eternity perfect him. Yea, with uttermost reverence, as to human +understanding, increase of dominion seems increase of power; and day by +day new planets are being added to elder-born Saturn, even as six +thousand years ago our own Earth made one more in this system; so, in +incident, not in essence, may the Infinite himself be not less than +more infinite now, than when old Aldebaran rolled forth from his hand. +And if time was, when this round Earth, which to innumerable mortals +has seemed an empire never to be wholly explored; which, in its seas, +concealed all the Indies over four thousand five hundred years; if time +was, when this great quarry of Assyrias and Romes was not extant; then, +time may have been, when the whole material universe lived its Dark +Ages; yea, when the Ineffable Silence, proceeding from its unimaginable +remoteness, espied it as an isle in the sea. And herein is no +derogation. For the Immeasurable’s altitude is not heightened by the +arches of Mahomet’s heavens; and were all space a vacuum, yet would it +be a fullness; for to Himself His own universe is He. + +Thus deeper and deeper into Time’s endless tunnel, does the winged +soul, like a night-hawk, wend her wild way; and finds eternities before +and behind; and her last limit is her everlasting beginning. + +But sent over the broad flooded sphere, even Noah’s dove came back, and +perched on his hand. So comes back my spirit to me, and folds up her +wings. + +Thus, then, though Time be the mightiest of Alarics, yet is he the +mightiest mason of all. And a tutor, and a counselor, and a physician, +and a scribe, and a poet, and a sage, and a king. + +Yea, and a gardener, as ere long will be shown. + +But first must we return to the glen. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXVI. +A Pleasant Place For A Lounge + + +Whether the hard condition of their kingly state, very naturally +demanding some luxurious requital, prevailed upon the monarchs of Juam +to house themselves so delightfully as they did; whether buried alive +in their glen, they sought to center therein a secret world of +enjoyment; however it may have been, throughout the Archipelago this +saying was a proverb—“You are lodged like the king in Willamilla.” +Hereby was expressed the utmost sumptuousness of a palace. + +A well warranted saying; for of all the bright places, where my soul +loves to linger, the haunts of Donjalolo are most delicious. + +In the eastern quarter of the glen was the House of the Morning. This +fanciful palace was raised upon a natural mound, many rods square, +almost completely filling up a deep recess between deep-green and +projecting cliffs, overlooking many abodes distributed in the shadows +of the groves beyond. + +Now, if it indeed be, that from the time employed in its construction, +any just notion may be formed of the stateliness of an edifice, it must +needs be determined, that this retreat of Donjalolo could not be +otherwise than imposing. + +Full five hundred moons was the palace in completing; for by some +architectural arborist, its quadrangular foundations had been laid in +seed-cocoanuts, requiring that period to sprout up into pillars. In +front, these were horizontally connected, by elaborately carved beams, +of a scarlet hue, inserted into the vital wood; which, swelling out, +and over lapping, firmly secured them. The beams supported the rafters, +inclining from the rear; while over the aromatic grasses covering the +roof, waved the tufted tops of the Palms, green capitals to their dusky +shafts. + +Through and through this vibrating verdure, bright birds flitted and +sang; the scented and variegated thatch seemed a hanging-garden; and +between it and the Palm tops, was leaf-hung an arbor in the air. + +Without these columns, stood a second and third colonnade, forming the +most beautiful bowers; advancing through which, you fancied that the +palace beyond must be chambered in a fountain, or frozen in a crystal. +Three sparkling rivulets flowing from the heights were led across its +summit, through great trunks half buried in the thatch; and emptying +into a sculptured channel, running along the eaves, poured over in one +wide sheet, plaited and transparent. Received into a basin beneath, +they were thence conducted down the vale. + +The sides of the palace were hedged by Diomi bushes bearing a flower, +from its perfume, called Lenora, or Sweet Breath; and within these +odorous hedges, were heavy piles of mats, richly dyed and embroidered. + +Here lounging of a glowing noon, the plaited cascade playing, the +verdure waving, and the birds melodious, it was hard to say, whether +you were an inmate of a garden in the glen, or a grotto in the sea. + +But enough for the nonce, of the House of the Morning. Cross we the +hollow, to the House of the Afternoon. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXVII. +The House Of The Afternoon + + +For the most part, the House of the Afternoon was but a wing built +against a mansion wrought by the hand of Nature herself; a grotto +running into the side of the mountain. From high over the mouth of this +grotto, sloped a long arbor, supported by great blocks of stone, rudely +chiseled into the likeness of idols, each bearing a carved lizard on +its chest: a sergeant’s guard of the gods condescendingly doing duty as +posts. + +From the grotto thus vestibuled, issued hilariously forth the most +considerable stream of the glen; which, seemingly overjoyed to find +daylight in Willamilla, sprang into the arbor with a cheery, white +bound. But its youthful enthusiasm was soon repressed; its waters being +caught in a large stone basin, scooped out of the natural rock; whence, +staid and decorous, they traversed sundry moats; at last meandering +away, to join floods with the streams trained to do service at the +other end of the vale. + +Truant streams: the livelong day wending their loitering path to the +subterraneous outlet, flowing into which, they disappeared. But no +wonder they loitered; passing such ravishing landscapes. Thus with +life: man bounds out of night; runs and babbles in the sun; then +returns to his darkness again; though, peradventure, once more to +emerge. + +But the grotto was not a mere outlet to the stream. Flowing through a +dark flume in the rock, on both sides it left a dry, elevated shelf, to +which you ascend from the arbor by three artificially-wrought steps, +sideways disposed, to avoid the spray of the rejoicing cataract. +Mounting these, and pursuing the edge of the flume, the grotto +gradually expands and heightens; your way lighted by rays in the inner +distance. At last you come to a lofty subterraneous dome, lit from +above by a cleft in the mountain; while full before you, in the +opposite wall, from a low, black arch, midway up, and inaccessible, the +stream, with a hollow ring and a dash, falls in a long, snowy column +into a bottomless pool, whence, after many an eddy and whirl, it +entered the flume, and away with a rush. Half hidden from view by an +overhanging brow of the rock, the white fall looked like the sheeted +ghost of the grotto. + +Yet gallantly bedecked was the cave, as any old armorial hall hung +round with banners and arras. Streaming from the cleft, vines swung in +the air; or crawled along the rocks, wherever a tendril could be fixed. +High up, their leaves were green; but lower down, they were shriveled; +and dyed of many colors; and tattered and torn with much rustling; as +old banners again; sore raveled with much triumphing. + +In the middle of this hall in the hill was incarcerated the stone image +of one Demi, the tutelar deity of Willamina. All green and oozy like a +stone under water, poor Demi looked as if sore harassed with sciatics +and lumbagos. + +But he was cheered from aloft, by the promise of receiving a garland +all blooming on his crown; the Dryads sporting in the woodlands above, +forever peeping down the cleft, and essaying to drop him a coronal. + +Now, the still, panting glen of Willamilla, nested so close by the +mountains, and a goodly green mark for the archer in the sun, would +have been almost untenable were it not for the grotto. Hereby, it +breathed the blessed breezes of Omi; a mountain promontory buttressing +the island to the east, receiving the cool stream of the upland Trades; +much pleasanter than the currents beneath. + +At all times, even in the brooding noon-day, a gush of cool air came +hand-in-hand with the cool waters, that burst with a shout into the +palace of Donjalolo. And as, after first refreshing the king, as in +loyalty bound, the stream flowed at large through the glen, and bathed +its verdure; so, the blessed breezes of Omi, not only made pleasant the +House of the Afternoon; but finding ample outlet in its wide, open +front, blew forth upon the bosom of all Willamilla. + +“Come let us take the air of Omi,” was a very common saying in the +glen. And the speaker would hie with his comrade toward the grotto; and +flinging himself on the turf, pass his hand through his locks, and +recline; making a joy and a business of breathing; for truly the +breezes of Omi were as air-wine to the lungs. + +Yet was not this breeze over-cool; though at times the zephyrs grew +boisterous. Especially at the season of high sea, when the strong +Trades drawn down the cleft in the mountain, rushed forth from the +grotto with wonderful force. Crossing it then, you had much ado to keep +your robe on your back. + +Thus much for the House of the Afternoon. Whither—after spending the +shady morning under the eastern cliffs of the glen—daily, at a certain +hour, Donjalolo in his palanquin was borne; there, finding new shades; +and there tarrying till evening; when again he was transported whence +he came: thereby anticipating the revolution of the sun. Thus dodging +day’s luminary through life, the prince hied to and fro in his +dominions; on his smooth, spotless brow Sol’s rays never shining. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXVIII. +Babbalanja Solus + + +Of the House of the Afternoon something yet remains to be said. + +It was chiefly distinguished by its pavement, where, according to the +strange customs of the isle, were inlaid the reputed skeletons of +Donjalolo’s sires; each surrounded by a mosaic of corals,—red, white, +and black, intermixed with vitreous stones fallen from the skies in a +meteoric shower. These delineated the tattooing of the departed. Near +by, were imbedded their arms: mace, bow, and spear, in similar +marquetry; and over each skull was the likeness of a scepter. + +First and conspicuous lay the half-decayed remains of Marjora, the +father of these Coral Kings; by his side, the storied, sickle-shaped +weapon, wherewith he slew his brother Teei. + +“Line of kings and row of scepters,” said Babbalanja as he gazed. +“Donjalolo, come forth and ponder on thy sires. Here they lie, from +dread Marjora down to him who fathered thee. Here are their bones, +their spears, and their javelins; their scepters, and the very fashion +of their tattooing: all that can be got together of what they were. +Tell me, oh king, what are thy thoughts? Dotest thou on these thy +sires? Art thou more truly royal, that they were kings? Or more a man, +that they were men? Is it a fable, or a verity about Marjora and the +murdered Teei? But here is the mighty conqueror,—ask him. Speak to him: +son to sire: king to king. Prick him; beg; buffet; entreat; spurn; +split the globe, he will not budge. Walk over and over thy whole +ancestral line, and they will not start. They are not here. Ay, the +dead are not to be found, even in their graves. Nor have they simply +departed; for they willed not to go; they died not by choice; +whithersoever they have gone, thither have they been dragged; and if so +be, they are extinct, their nihilities went not more against their +grain, than their forced quitting of Mardi. Either way, something has +become of them that they sought not. Truly, had stout-hearted Marjora +sworn to live here in Willamilla for ay, and kept the vow, that would +have been royalty indeed; but here he lies. Marjora! rise! Juam +revolteth! Lo, I stamp upon thy scepter; base menials tread upon thee +where thou hest! Up, king, up! What? no reply? Are not these bones +thine? Oh, how the living triumph over the dead! Marjora! answer. Art +thou? or art thou not? I see thee not; I hear thee not; I feel thee +not; eyes, ears, hands, are worthless to test thy being; and if thou +art, thou art something beyond all human thought to compass. We must +have other faculties to know thee by. Why, thou art not even a +sightless sound; not the echo of an echo; here are thy bones. +Donjalolo, methinks I see thee fallen upon by assassins:—which of thy +fathers riseth to the rescue? I see thee dying:—which of them telleth +thee what cheer beyond the grave? But they have gone to the land +unknown. Meet phrase. Where is it? Not one of Oro’s priests telleth a +straight story concerning it; ’twill be hard finding their paradises. +Touching the life of Alma, in Mohi’s chronicles, ’tis related, that a +man was once raised from the tomb. But rubbed he not his eyes, and +stared he not most vacantly? Not one revelation did he make. Ye gods! +to have been a bystander there! + +“At best, ’tis but a hope. But will a longing bring the thing desired? +Doth dread avert its object? An instinct is no preservative. The fire I +shrink from, may consume me.—But dead, and yet alive; alive, yet +dead;—thus say the sages of Maramma. But die we then living? Yet if our +dead fathers somewhere and somehow live, why not our unborn sons? For +backward or forward, eternity is the same; already have we been the +nothing we dread to be. Icy thought! But bring it home,—it will not +stay. What ho, hot heart of mine: to beat thus lustily awhile, to feel +in the red rushing blood, and then be ashes,—can this be so? But peace, +peace, thou liar in me, telling me I am immortal—shall I not be as +these bones? To come to this! But the balsam-dropping palms, whose +boles run milk, whose plumes wave boastful in the air, they perish in +their prime, and bow their blasted trunks. Nothing abideth; the river +of yesterday floweth not to-day; the sun’s rising is a setting; living +is dying; the very mountains melt; and all revolve:—systems and +asteroids; the sun wheels through the zodiac, and the zodiac is a +revolution. Ah gods! in all this universal stir, am I to prove one +stable thing? + +“Grim chiefs in skeletons, avaunt! Ye are but dust; belike the dust of +beggars; for on this bed, paupers may lie down with kings, and filch +their skulls. This, great Marjora’s arm? No, some old paralytic’s. Ye, +kings? ye, men? Where are your vouchers? I do reject your brother-hood, +ye libelous remains. But no, no; despise them not, oh Babbalanja! Thy +own skeleton, thou thyself dost carry with thee, through this mortal +life; and aye would view it, but for kind nature’s screen; thou art +death alive; and e’en to what’s before thee wilt thou come. Ay, thy +children’s children will walk over thee: thou, voiceless as a calm.” + +And over the Coral Kings, Babbalanja paced in profound meditation. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXIX. +The Center Of Many Circumferences + + +Like Donjalolo himself, we hie to and fro; for back now must we pace to +the House of the Morning. + +In its rear, there diverged three separate arbors, leading to less +public apartments. + +Traversing the central arbor, and fancying it will soon lead you to +open ground, you suddenly come upon the most private retreat of the +prince: a square structure; plain as a pyramid; and without, as +inscrutable. Down to the very ground, its walls are thatched; but on +the farther side a passage-way opens, which you enter. But not yet are +you within. Scarce a yard distant, stands an inner thatched wall, blank +as the first. Passing along the intervening corridor, lighted by narrow +apertures, you reach the opposite side, and a second opening is +revealed. This entering, another corridor; lighted as the first, but +more dim, and a third blank wall. And thus, three times three, you worm +round and round, the twilight lessening as you proceed; until at last, +you enter the citadel itself: the innermost arbor of a nest; whereof, +each has its roof, distinct from the rest. + +The heart of the place is but small; illuminated by a range of open +sky-lights, downward contracting. + +Innumerable as the leaves of an endless folio, multitudinous mats cover +the floor; whereon reclining by night, like Pharaoh on the top of his +patrimonial pile, the inmate looks heavenward, and heavenward only; +gazing at the torchlight processions in the skies, when, in state, the +suns march to be crowned. + +And here, in this impenetrable retreat, centrally slumbered the +universe-rounded, zodiac-belted, horizon-zoned, sea-girt, reef- sashed, +mountain-locked, arbor-nested, royalty-girdled, arm-clasped, +self-hugged, indivisible Donjalolo, absolute monarch of Juam:—the +husk-inhusked meat in a nut; the innermost spark in a ruby; the +juice-nested seed in a goldenrinded orange; the red royal stone in an +effeminate peach; the insphered sphere of spheres. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXX. +Donjalolo In The Bosom Of His Family + + +To pretend to relate the manner in which Juam’s ruler passed his +captive days, without making suitable mention of his harem, would be to +paint one’s full-length likeness and omit the face. For it was his +harem that did much to stamp the character of Donjalolo. + +And had he possessed but a single spouse, most discourteous, surely, to +have overlooked the princess; much more, then, as it is; and by +how-much the more, a plurality exceeds a unit. + +Exclusive of the female attendants, by day waiting upon the person of +the king, he had wives thirty in number, corresponding in name to the +nights of the moon. For, in Juam, time is not reckoned by days, but by +nights; each night of the lunar month having its own designation; +which, relatively only, is extended to the day. + +In uniform succession, the thirty wives ruled queen of the king’s +heart. An arrangement most wise and judicious; precluding much of that +jealousy and confusion prevalent in ill-regulated seraglios. For as +thirty spouses must be either more desirable, or less desirable than +one; so is a harem thirty times more difficult to manage than an +establishment with one solitary mistress. But Donjalolo’s wives were so +nicely drilled, that for the most part, things went on very smoothly. +Nor were his brows much furrowed with wrinkles referable to domestic +cares and tribulations. Although, as in due time will be seen, from +these he was not altogether exempt. + +Now, according to Braid-Beard, who, among other abstruse political +researches, had accurately informed himself concerning the internal +administration of Donjalolo’s harem, the following was the method +pursued therein. + +On the Aquella, or First Night of the month, the queen of that name +assumes her diadem, and reigns. So too with Azzolino the Second, and +Velluvi the Third Night of the Moon; and so on, even unto the utter +eclipse thereof; through Calends, Nones, and Ides. + +For convenience, the king is furnished with a card, whereon are copied +the various ciphers upon the arms of his queens; and parallel thereto, +the hieroglyphics significant of the corresponding Nights of the month. +Glancing over this, Donjalolo predicts the true time of the rising and +setting of all his stars. + +This Moon of wives was lodged in two spacious seraglios, which few +mortals beheld. For, so deeply were they buried in a grove; so +overpowered with verdure; so overrun with vines; and so hazy with the +incense of flowers; that they were almost invisible, unless closely +approached. Certain it was, that it demanded no small enterprise, +diligence, and sagacity, to explore the mysterious wood in search of +them. Though a strange, sweet, humming sound, as of the clustering and +swarming of warm bees among roses, at last hinted the royal honey at +hand. High in air, toward the summit of the cliff, overlooking this +side of the glen, a narrow ledge of rocks might have been seen, from +which, rumor whispered, was to be caught an angular peep at the tip of +the apex of the roof of the nearest seraglio. But this wild report had +never been established. Nor, indeed, was it susceptible of a test. For +was not that rock inaccessible as the eyrie of young eagles? But to +guard against the possibility of any visual profanation, Donjalolo had +authorized an edict, forever tabooing that rock to foot of man or +pinion of fowl. Birds and bipeds both trembled and obeyed; taking a +wide circuit to avoid the spot. + +Access to the seraglios was had by corresponding arbors leading from +the palace. The seraglio to the right was denominated “Ravi” (Before), +that to the left “Zono” (After). The meaning of which was, that upon +the termination of her reign the queen wended her way to the Zono; +there tarrying with her predecessors till the Ravi was emptied; when +the entire Moon of wives, swallow-like, migrated back whence they came; +and the procession was gone over again. + +In due order, the queens reposed upon mats inwoven with their +respective ciphers. In the Ravi, the mat of the queen-apparent, or next +in succession, was spread by the portal. In the Zono, the newly- +widowed queen reposed furthest from it. + +But alas for all method where thirty wives are concerned. +Notwithstanding these excellent arrangements, the mature result of ages +of progressive improvement in the economy of the royal seraglios in +Willamilla, it must needs be related, that at times the order of +precedence became confused, and was very hard to restore. + +At intervals, some one of the wives was weeded out, to the no small +delight of the remainder; but to their equal vexation her place would +soon after be supplied by some beautiful stranger; who assuming the +denomination of the vacated Night of the Moon, thenceforth commenced +her monthly revolutions in the king’s infallible calendar. + +In constant attendance, was a band of old men; woe-begone, thin of leg, +and puny of frame; whose grateful task it was, to tarry in the garden +of Donjalolo’s delights, without ever touching the roses. Along with +innumerable other duties, they were perpetually kept coming and going +upon ten thousand errands; for they had it in strict charge to obey the +slightest behests of the damsels; and with all imaginable expedition to +run, fly, swim, or dissolve into impalpable air, at the shortest +possible notice. + +So laborious their avocations, that none could discharge them for more +than a twelvemonth, at the end of that period giving up the ghost out +of pure exhaustion of the locomotive apparatus. It was this constant +drain upon the stock of masculine old age in the glen, that so +bethinned its small population of gray-beards and hoary-heads. And any +old man hitherto exempted, who happened to receive a summons to repair +to the palace, and there wait the pleasure of the king: this +unfortunate, at once suspecting his doom, put his arbor in order; oiled +and suppled his joints; took a long farewell of his friends; selected +his burial-place; and going resigned to his fate, in due time expired +like the rest. + +Had any one of them cast about for some alleviating circumstance, he +might possibly have derived some little consolation from the thought, +that though a slave to the whims of thirty princesses, he was +nevertheless one of their guardians, and as such, he might ingeniously +have concluded, their superior. But small consolation this. For the +damsels were as blithe as larks, more playful than kittens; never +looking sad and sentimental, projecting clandestine escapes. But +supplied with the thirtieth part of all that Aspasia could desire; +glorying in being the spouses of a king; nor in the remotest degree +anxious about eventual dowers; they were care-free, content, and +rejoicing, as the rays of the morning. + +Poor old men, then; it would be hard to distill out of your fate, one +drop of the balm of consolation. For, commissioned to watch over those +who forever kept you on the trot, affording you no time to hunt up +peccadilloes; was not this circumstance an aggravation of hard times? a +sharpening and edge-giving to the steel in your souls? + +But much yet remains unsaid. + +To dwell no more upon the eternal wear-and-tear incident to these +attenuated old warders, they were intensely hated by the damsels. +Inasmuch, as it was archly opined, for what ulterior purposes they were +retained. + +Nightly couching, on guard, round the seraglio, like fangless old +bronze dragons round a fountain enchanted, the old men ever and anon +cried out mightily, by reason of sore pinches and scratches received in +the dark: And tri-trebly-tri-triply girt about as he was, Donjalolo +himself started from his slumbers, raced round and round through his +ten thousand corridors; at last bursting all dizzy among his +twenty-nine queens, to see what under the seventh-heavens was the +matter. When, lo and behold! there lay the innocents all sound asleep; +the dragons moaning over their mysterious bruises. + +Ah me! his harem, like all large families, was the delight and the +torment of the days and nights of Donjalolo. + +And in one special matter was he either eminently miserable, or +otherwise: for all his multiplicity of wives, he had never an heir. Not +his, the proud paternal glance of the Grand Turk Solyman, looking round +upon a hundred sons, all bone of his bone, and squinting with his +squint. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXXI. +Wherein Babbalanja Relates The Adventure Of One Karkeke In The Land Of +Shades + + +At our morning repast on the second day of our stay in the hollow, our +party indulged in much lively discourse. + +“Samoa,” said I, “those isles of yours, of whose beauty you so often +make vauntful mention, can those isles, good Samoa, furnish a valley in +all respects equal to Willamilla?” + +Disdainful answer was made, that Willamilla might be endurable enough +for a sojourn, but as a permanent abode, any glen of his own natal isle +was unspeakably superior. + +“In the great valley of Savaii,” cried Samoa, “for every leaf grown +here in Willamilla, grows a stately tree; and for every tree here +waving, in Savaii flourishes a goodly warrior.” + +Immeasurable was the disgust of the Upoluan for the enervated subjects +of Donjalolo; and for Donjalolo himself; though it was shrewdly +divined, that his annoying reception at the hands of the royalty of +Juam, had something to do with his disdain. + +To Jarl, no similar question was put; for he was sadly deficient in a +taste for the picturesque. But he cursorily observed, that in his +blue-water opinion, Willamilla was next to uninhabitable, all view of +the sea being intercepted. + +And here it may be well to relate a comical blunder on the part of +honest Jarl; concerning which, Samoa, the savage, often afterward +twitted him; as indicating a rusticity, and want of polish in his +breeding. It rather originated, however, in his not heeding the +conventionalities of the strange people among whom he was thrown. + +The anecdote is not an epic; but here it is. + +Reclining in our arbor, we breakfasted upon a marble slab; so +frost-white, and flowingly traced with blue veins, that it seemed a +little lake sheeted over with ice: Diana’s virgin bosom congéaled. + +Before each guest was a richly carved bowl and gourd, fruit and wine +freighted also the empty hemisphere of a small nut, the purpose of +which was a problem. Now, King Jarl scorned to admit the slightest +degree of under-breeding in the matter of polite feeding. So nothing +was a problem to him. At once reminded of the morsel of Arvaroot in his +mouth, a substitute for another sort of sedative then unattainable, he +was instantly illuminated concerning the purpose of the nut; and very +complacently introduced each to the other; in the innocence of his +ignorance making no doubt that he had acquitted himself with +discretion; the little hemisphere plainly being intended as a place of +temporary deposit for the Arva of the guests. + +The company were astounded: Samoa more than all. King Jarl, meanwhile, +looking at all present with the utmost serenity. At length, one of the +horrified attendants, using two sticks for a forceps, disappeared with +the obnoxious nut, Upon which, the meal proceeded. + +This attendant was not seen again for many days; which gave rise to the +supposition, that journeying to the sea-side, he had embarked for some +distant strand; there, to bury out of sight the abomination with which +he was freighted. + +Upon this, his egregious misadventure, calculated to do discredit to +our party, and bring Media himself into contempt, Babbalanja had no +scruples in taking Jarl roundly to task. He assured him, that it argued +but little brains to evince a desire to be thought familiar with all +things; that however desirable as incidental attainments, +conventionalities, in themselves, were the very least of arbitrary +trifles; the knowledge of them, innate with no man. “Moreover Jarl,” he +added, “in essence, conventionalities are but mimickings, at which +monkeys succeed best. Hence, when you find yourself at a loss in these +matters, wait patiently, and mark what the other monkeys do: and then +follow suit. And by so doing, you will gain a vast reputation as an +accomplished ape. Above all things, follow not the silly example of the +young spark Karkeke, of whom Mohi was telling me. Dying, and entering +the other world with a mincing gait, and there finding certain customs +quite strange and new; such as friendly shades passing through each +other by way of a salutation;—Karkeke, nevertheless, resolved to show +no sign of embarrassment. Accosted by a phantom, with wings folded +pensively, plumes interlocked across its chest, he off head; and stood +obsequiously before it. Staring at him for an instant, the spirit cut +him dead; murmuring to itself, ‘Ah, some terrestrial bumpkin, I fancy,’ +and passed on with its celestial nose in the highly rarified air. But +silly Karkeke undertaking to replace his head, found that it would no +more stay on; but forever tumbled off; even in the act of nodding a +salute; which calamity kept putting him out of countenance. And thus +through all eternity is he punished for his folly, in having pretended +to be wise, wherein he was ignorant. Head under arm, he wanders about, +the scorn and ridicule of the other world.” + +Our repast concluded, messengers arrived from the prince, courteously +inviting our presence at the House of the Morning. Thither we went; +journeying in sedans, sent across the hollow, for that purpose, by +Donjalolo. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXXII. +How Donjalolo, Sent Agents To The Surrounding Isles; With The Result + + +Ere recounting what was beheld on entering the House of the Morning, +some previous information is needful. Though so many of Donjalolo’s +days were consumed by sloth and luxury, there came to him certain +intervals of thoughtfulness, when all his curiosity concerning the +things of outer Mardi revived with augmented intensity. In these moods, +he would send abroad deputations, inviting to Willamilla the kings of +the neighboring islands; together with the most celebrated priests, +bards, story-tellers, magicians, and wise men; that he might hear them +converse of those things, which he could not behold for himself. + +But at last, he bethought him, that the various narrations he had +heard, could not have been otherwise than unavoidably faulty; by reason +that they had been principally obtained from the inhabitants of the +countries described; who, very naturally, must have been inclined to +partiality or uncandidness in their statements. Wherefore he had very +lately dispatched to the isles special agents of his own; honest of +heart, keen of eye, and shrewd of understanding; to seek out every +thing that promised to illuminate him concerning the places they +visited, and also to collect various specimens of interesting objects; +so that at last he might avail himself of the researches of others, and +see with their eyes. + +But though two observers were sent to every one of the neighboring +lands; yet each was to act independently; make his own inquiries; form +his own conclusions; and return with his own specimens; wholly +regardless of the proceedings of the other. + +It so came to pass, that on the very day of our arrival in the glen, +these pilgrims returned from their travels. And Donjalolo had set apart +the following morning to giving them a grand public reception. And it +was to this, that our party had been invited, as related in the chapter +preceding. + +In the great Palm-hall of the House of the Morning, we were assigned +distinguished mats, to the right of the prince; his chiefs, attendants, +and subjects assembled in the open colonnades without. + +When all was in readiness, in marched the company of savans and +travelers; and humbly standing in a semi-circle before the king, their +numerous hampers were deposited at their feet. + +Donjalolo was now in high spirits, thinking of the rich store of +reliable information about to be furnished. + +“Zuma,” said he, addressing the foremost of the company, “you and +Varnopi were directed to explore the island of Rafona. Proceed now, and +relate all you know of that place. Your narration heard, we will list +to Varnopi.” + +With a profound inclination the traveler obeyed. + +But soon Donjalolo interrupted him. “What say you, Zuma, about the +secret cavern, and the treasures therein? A very different account, +this, from all I have heard hitherto; but perhaps yours is the true +version. Go on.” + +But very soon, poor Zuma was again interrupted by exclamations of +surprise. Nay, even to the very end of his mountings. + +But when he had done, Donjalolo observed, that if from any cause Zuma +was in error or obscure, Varnopi would not fail to set him right. + +So Varnopi was called upon. + +But not long had Varnopi proceeded, when Donjalolo changed color. + +“What!” he exclaimed, “will ye contradict each other before our very +face. Oh Oro! how hard is truth to be come at by proxy! Fifty accounts +have I had of Rafona; none of which wholly agreed; and here, these two +varlets, sent expressly to behold and report, these two lying knaves, +speak crookedly both. How is it? Are the lenses in their eyes +diverse-hued, that objects seem different to both; for undeniable is +it, that the things they thus clashingly speak of are to be known for +the same; though represented with unlike colors and qualities. But dumb +things can not lie nor err. Unpack thy hampers, Zuma. Here, bring them +close: now: what is this?” + +“That,” tremblingly replied Zuma, “is a specimen of the famous reef- +bar on the west side of the island of Rafona; your highness perceives +its deep red dyes.” + +Said Donjalolo, “Varnopi, hast thou a piece of this coral, also?” + +“I have, your highness,” said Varnopi; “here it is.” + +Taking it from his hand, Donjalolo gazed at its bleached, white hue; +then dashing it to the pavement, “Oh mighty Oro! Truth dwells in her +fountains; where every one must drink for himself. For me, vain all +hope of ever knowing Mardi! Away! Better know nothing, than be +deceived. Break up!” + +And Donjalolo rose, and retired. + +All present now broke out in a storm of vociferation; some siding with +Zuma; others with Varnopi; each of whom, in turn, was declared the man +to be relied upon. + +Marking all this, Babbalanja, who had been silently looking on, leaning +against one of the palm pillars, quietly observed to Media:— “My lord, +I have seen this same reef at Rafona. In various places, it is of +various hues. As for Zuma and Varnopi, both are wrong, and both are +right.” + + + + +CHAPTER LXXXIII. +They Visit The Tributary Islets + + +In Willamilla, no Yillah being found, on the third day we took leave of +Donjalolo; who lavished upon us many caresses and, somewhat reluctantly +on Media’s part, we quitted the vale. + +One by one, we now visited the outer villages of Juam; and crossing the +waters, wandered several days among its tributary isles. There we saw +the viceroys of him who reigned in the hollow: chieftains of whom +Donjalolo was proud; so honest, humble, and faithful; so bent upon +ameliorating the condition of those under their rule. For, be it said, +Donjalolo was a charitable prince; in his serious intervals, ever +seeking the welfare of his subjects, though after an imperial view of +his own. But alas, in that sunny donjon among the mountains, where he +dwelt, how could Donjalolo be sure, that the things he decreed were +executed in regions forever remote from his view. Ah! very bland, very +innocent, very pious, the faces his viceroys presented during their +monthly visits to Willamilla. But as cruel their visage, when, returned +to their islets, they abandoned themselves to all the license of +tyrants; like Verres reveling down the rights of the Sicilians. + +Like Carmelites, they came to Donjalolo, barefooted; but in their +homes, their proud latchets were tied by their slaves. Before their +king-belted prince, they stood rope-girdled like self-abased monks of +St. Francis; but with those ropes, before their palaces, they hung +Innocence and Truth. + +As still seeking Yillah, and still disappointed, we roved through the +lands which these chieftains ruled, Babbalanja exclaimed—“Let us +depart; idle our search, in isles that have viceroys for kings.” + +At early dawn, about embarking for a distant land, there came to us +certain messengers of Donjalolo, saying that their lord the king, +repenting of so soon parting company with Media and Taji, besought them +to return with all haste; for that very morning, in Willamilla, a regal +banquet was preparing; to which many neighboring kings had been +invited, most of whom had already arrived. + +Declaring that there was no alternative but compliance, Media acceded; +and with the king’s messengers we returned to the glen. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXXIV. +Taji Sits Down To Dinner With Five-And-Twenty Kings, And A Royal Time +They Have + + +It was afternoon when we emerged from the defile. And informed that our +host was receiving his guests in the House of the Afternoon, thither we +directed our steps. + +Soft in our face, blew the blessed breezes of Omi, stirring the leaves +overhead; while, here and there, through the trees, showed the +idol-bearers of the royal retreat, hand in hand, linked with festoons +of flowers. Still beyond, on a level, sparkled the nodding crowns of +the kings, like the constellation Corona-Borealis, the horizon just +gained. + +Close by his noon-tide friend, the cascade at the mouth of the grotto, +reposed on his crimson mat, Donjalolo:—arrayed in a vestment of the +finest white tappa of Mardi, figured all over with bright yellow +lizards, so curiously stained in the gauze, that he seemed overrun, as +with golden mice. + +Marjora’s girdle girdled his loins, tasseled with the congregated teeth +of his sires. A jeweled turban-tiara, milk-white, surmounted his brow, +over which waved a copse of Pintado plumes. + +But what sways in his hand? A scepter, similar to those likenesses of +scepters, imbedded among the corals at his feet. A polished thigh- +bone; by Braid-Beard declared once Teei’s the Murdered. For to +emphasize his intention utterly to rule, Marjora himself had selected +this emblem of dominion over mankind. + +But even this last despite done to dead Teei had once been transcended. +In the usurper’s time, prevailed the belief, that the saliva of kings +must never touch ground; and Mohi’s Chronicles made mention, that +during the life time of Marjora, Teei’s skull had been devoted to the +basest of purposes: Marjora’s, the hate no turf could bury. + +Yet, traditions like these ever seem dubious. There be many who deny +the hump, moral and physical, of Gloster Richard. + +Still advancing unperceived, in social hilarity we descried their +Highnesses, chatting together like the most plebeian of mortals; full +as merry as the monks of old. But marking our approach, all changed. A +pair of potentates, who had been playfully trifling, hurriedly adjusted +their diadems, threw themselves into attitudes, looking stately as +statues. Phidias turned not out his Jupiter so soon. + +In various-dyed robes the five-and-twenty kings were arrayed; and +various their features, as the rows of lips, eyes and ears in John +Caspar Lavater’s physiognomical charts. Nevertheless, to a king, all +their noses were aquiline. + +There were long fox-tail beards of silver gray, and enameled chins, +like those of girls; bald pates and Merovingian locks; smooth brows and +wrinkles: forms erect and stooping; an eye that squinted; one king was +deaf; by his side, another that was halt; and not far off, a dotard. +They were old and young, tall and short, handsome and ugly, fat and +lean, cunning and simple. + +With animated courtesy our host received us; assigning a neighboring +bower for Babbalanja and the rest; and among so many right-royal, +demi-divine guests, how could the demi-gods Media and Taji be otherwise +than at home? + +The unwonted sprightliness of Donjalolo surprised us. But he was in one +of those relapses of desperate gayety in-variably following his +failures in efforts to amend his life. And the bootless issue of his +late mission to outer Mardi had thrown him into a mood for revelry. Nor +had he lately shunned a wild wine, called Morando. + +A slave now appearing with a bowl of this beverage, it circulated +freely. + +Not to gainsay the truth, we fancied the Morando much. A nutty, pungent +flavor it had; like some kinds of arrack distilled in the Philippine +isles. And a marvelous effect did it have, in dissolving the +crystalization of the brain; leaving nothing but precious little drops +of good humor, beading round the bowl of the cranium. + +Meanwhile, garlanded boys, climbing the limbs of the idol-pillars, and +stirruping their feet in their most holy mouths, suspended hangings of +crimson tappa all round the hall; so that sweeping the pavement they +rustled in the breeze from the grot. + +Presently, stalwart slaves advanced; bearing a mighty basin of a +porphyry hue, deep-hollowed out of a tree. Outside, were innumerable +grotesque conceits; conspicuous among which, for a border, was an +endless string of the royal lizards circumnavigating the basin in +inverted chase of their tails. + +Peculiar to the groves of Willamilla, the yellow lizard formed part of +the arms of Juam. And when Donjalolo’s messenger went abroad, they +carried its effigy, as the emblem of their royal master; themselves +being known, as the Gentlemen of the Golden Lizard. + +The porphyry-hued basin planted full in our midst, the attendants +forthwith filled the same with the living waters from the cascade; a +proceeding, for which some of the company were at a loss to account, +unless his highness, our host, with all the coolness of royalty, +purposed cooling himself still further, by taking a bath in presence of +his guests. A conjecture, most premature; for directly, the basin being +filled to within a few inches of the lizards, the attendants fell to +launching therein divers goodly sized trenchers, all laden with choice +viands:—wild boar meat; humps of grampuses; embrowned bread-fruit, +roasted in odoriferous fires of sandal wood, but suffered to cool; gold +fish, dressed with the fragrant juices of berries; citron sauce; rolls +of the baked paste of yams; juicy bananas, steeped in a saccharine oil; +marmalade of plantains; jellies of guava; confections of the treacle of +palm sap; and many other dainties; besides numerous stained calabashes +of Morando, and other beverages, fixed in carved floats to make them +buoyant. + +The guests assigned seats, by the woven handles attached to his purple +mat, the prince, our host, was now gently moved by his servitors to the +head of the porphyry-hued basin. Where, flanked by lofty crowned-heads, +white-tiaraed, and radiant with royalty, he sat; like snow-turbaned +Mont Blanc, at sunrise presiding over the head waters of the Rhone; to +right and left, looming the gilded summits of the Simplon, the Gothard, +the Jungfrau, the Great St. Bernard, and the Grand Glockner. + +Yet turbid from the launching of its freight, Lake Como tossed to and +fro its navies of good cheer, the shadows of the king-peaks wildly +flitting thereupon. + +But no frigid wine and fruit cooler, Lake Como; as at first it did +seem; but a tropical dining table, its surface a slab of light blue St. +Pons marble in a state of fluidity. + +Now, many a crown was doffed; scepters laid aside; girdles slackened; +and among those verdant viands the bearded kings like goats did browse; +or tusking their wild boar’s meat, like mastiffs ate. + +And like unto some well-fought fight, beginning calmly, but pressing +forward to a fiery rush, this well-fought feast did now wax warm. + +A few royal epicures, however, there were: epicures intent upon +concoctions, admixtures, and masterly compoundings; who comported +themselves with all due deliberation and dignity; hurrying themselves +into no reckless deglutition of the dainties. Ah! admirable conceit, +Lake Como: superseding attendants. For, from hand to hand the trenchers +sailed; no sooner gaining one port, than dispatched over sea to +another. + +Well suited they were for the occasion; sailing high out of water, to +resist the convivial swell at times ruffling the sociable sea; and +sharp at both ends, still better adapting them to easy navigation. + +But soon, the Morando, in triumphant decanters, went round, reeling +like barks before a breeze. But their voyages were brief; and ere long, +in certain havens, the accumulation of empty vessels threatened to +bridge the lake with pontoons. In those directions, Trade winds were +setting. But full soon, cut out were all unladen and unprofitable +gourds; and replaced by jolly-bellied calabashes, for a time sailing +deep, yawing heavily to the push. + +At last, the whole flotilla of trenchers—wrecks and all—were sent +swimming to the further end of Lake Como; and thence removed, gave +place to ruddy hillocks of fruit, and floating islands of flowers. +Chief among the former, a quince-like, golden sphere, that filled the +air with such fragrance, you thought you were tasting its flavor. + +Nor did the wine cease flowing. That day the Juam grape did bleed; that +day the tendril ringlets of the vines, did all uncurl and grape by +grape, in sheer dismay, the sun ripe clusters dropped. Grape-glad were +five-and-twenty kings: five-and-twenty kings were merry. + +Morando’s vintage had no end; nor other liquids, in the royal cellar +stored, somewhere secret in the grot. Oh! where’s the endless Niger’s +source? Search ye here, or search ye there; on, on, through ravine, +vega, vale—no head waters will ye find. But why need gain the hidden +spring, when its lavish stream flows by? At three-fold mouths that +Delta-grot discharged; rivers golden, white, and red. + +But who may sing for aye? Down I come, and light upon the old and prosy +plain. + +Among other decanters set afloat, was a pompous, lordly-looking +demijohn, but old and reverend withal, that sailed about, consequential +as an autocrat going to be crowned, or a treasure- freighted argosie +bound home before the wind. It looked solemn, however, though it +reeled; peradventure, far gone with its own potent contents. + +Oh! russet shores of Rhine and Rhone! oh, mellow memories of ripe old +vintages! oh, cobwebs in the Pyramids! oh, dust on Pharaoh’s tomb!—all, +all recur, as I bethink me of that glorious gourd, its contents cogent +as Tokay, itself as old as Mohi’s legends; more venerable to look at +than his beard. Whence came it? Buried in vases, so saith the label, +with the heart of old Marjora, now dead one hundred thousand moons. +Exhumed at last, it looked no wine, but was shrunk into a subtile +syrup. + +This special calabash was distinguished by numerous trappings, +caparisoned like the sacred bay steed led before the Great Khan of +Tartary. A most curious and betasseled network encased it; and the +royal lizard was jealously twisted about its neck, like a hand on a +throat containing some invaluable secret. + +All Hail, Marzilla! King’s Own Royal Particular! A vinous Percy! Dating +back to the Conquest! Distilled of yore from purple berries growing in +the purple valley of Ardair! Thrice hail. + +But the imperial Marzilla was not for all; gods only could partake; the +Kings and demigods of the isles; excluding left-handed descendants of +sad rakes of immortals, in old times breaking heads and hearts in +Mardi, bequeathing bars-sinister to many mortals, who now in vain might +urge a claim to a cup-full of right regal Marzilla. + +The Royal Particular was pressed upon me, by the now jovial Donjalolo. +With his own sceptered hand charging my flagon to the brim, he declared +his despotic pleasure, that I should quaff it off to the last lingering +globule. No hard calamity, truly; for the drinking of this wine was as +the singing of a mighty ode, or frenzied lyric to the soul. + +“Drink, Taji,” cried Donjalolo, “drink deep. In this wine a king’s +heart is dissolved. Drink long; in this wine lurk the seeds of the life +everlasting. Drink deep; drink long: thou drinkest wisdom and valor at +every draught. Drink forever, oh Taji, for thou drinkest that which +will enable thee to stand up and speak out before mighty Oro himself.” + +“Borabolla,” he added, turning round upon a domed old king at his left, +“Was it not the god Xipho, who begged of my great-great- grandsire a +draught of this same wine, saying he was about to beget a hero?” + +“Even so. And thy glorious Marzilla produced thrice valiant Ononna, who +slew the giants of the reef.” + +“Ha, ha, hear’st that, oh Taji?” And Donjalolo drained another cup. + +Amazing! the flexibility of the royal elbow, and the rigidity of the +royal spine! More especially as we had been impressed with a notion of +their debility. But, sometimes these seemingly enervated young blades +approve themselves steadier of limb, than veteran revelers of very long +standing. + +“Discharge the basin, and refill it with wine,” cried Donjalolo. “Break +all empty gourds! Drink, kings, and dash your cups at every draught.” + +So saying, he started from his purple mat; and with one foot planted +unknowingly upon the skull of Marjora; while all the skeletons grinned +at him from the pavement; Donjalolo, holding on high his blood-red +goblet, burst forth with the following invocation:— + +Ha, ha, gods and kings; fill high, one and all; +Drink, drink! shout and drink! mad respond to the call! +Fill fast, and fill frill; ’gainst the goblet ne’er sin; +Quaff there, at high tide, to the uttermost rim:— + Flood-tide, and soul-tide to the brim! + +Who with wine in him fears? who thinks of his cares? +Who sighs to be wise, when wine in him flares? +Water sinks down below, in currents full slow; +But wine mounts on high with its genial glow:— + Welling up, till the brain overflow! + +As the spheres, with a roll, some fiery of soul, +Others golden, with music, revolve round the pole; + +So let our cups, radiant with many hued wines, +Round and round in groups circle, our Zodiac’s Signs:— + Round reeling, and ringing their chimes! + +Then drink, gods and kings; wine merriment brings; +It bounds through the veins; there, jubilant sings. +Let it ebb, then, and flow; wine never grows dim; +Drain down that bright tide at the foam beaded rim:— + Fill up, every cup, to the brim! + + +Caught by all present, the chorus resounded again and again. The beaded +wine danced on many a beard; the cataract lifted higher its voice; the +grotto sent back a shout; the ghosts of the Coral Monarchs seemed +starting from their insulted bones. But ha, ha, ha, roared forth the +five-and-twenty kings—alive, not dead—holding both hands to their +girdles, and baying out their laughter from abysses; like Nimrod’s +hounds over some fallen elk. + +Mad and crazy revelers, how ye drank and roared! but kings no more: +vestures loosed; and scepters rolling on the ground. + +Glorious agrarian, thou wine! bringing all hearts on a level, and at +last all legs to the earth; even those of kings, who, to do them +justice, have been much maligned for imputed qualities not theirs. For +whoso has touched flagons with monarchs, bear they their back bones +never so stiffly on the throne, well know the rascals, to be at bottom +royal good fellows; capable of a vinous frankness exceeding that of +base-born men. Was not Alexander a boon companion? And daft Cambyses? +and what of old Rowley, as good a judge of wine and other matters, as +ever sipped claret or kisses. + +If ever Taji joins a club, be it a Beef-Steak Club of Kings! + +Donjalolo emptied yet another cup. + +The mirth now blew a gale; like a ship’s shrouds in a Typhoon, every +tendon vibrated; the breezes of Omi came forth with a rush; the +hangings shook; the goblets danced fandangos; and Donjalolo, clapping +his hands, called before him his dancing women. + +Forth came from the grotto a reed-like burst of song, making all start, +and look that way to behold such enchanting strains. Sounds heralding +sights! Swimming in the air, emerged the nymphs, lustrous arms +interlocked like Indian jugglers’ glittering snakes. Round the cascade +they thronged; then paused in its spray. Of a sudden, seemed to spring +from its midst, a young form of foam, that danced into the soul like a +thought. At last, sideways floating off, it subsided into the grotto, a +wave. Evening drawing on apace, the crimson draperies were lifted, and +festooned to the arms of the idol-pillars, admitting the rosy light of +the even. + +Yielding to the re-action of the banquet, the kings now reclined; and +two mute damsels entered: one with a gourd of scented waters; the other +with napkins. Bending over Donjalolo’s steaming head, the first let +fall a shower of aromatic drops, slowly aborbed by her companion. Thus, +in turn, all were served; nothing heard but deep breathing. + +In a marble vase they now kindled some incense: a handful of spices. + +Shortly after, came three of the king’s beautiful smokers; who, +lighting their tubes at this odorous fire, blew over the company the +sedative fumes of the Aina. + +Steeped in languor, I strove against it long; essayed to struggle out +of the enchanted mist. But a syren hand seemed ever upon me, pressing +me back. + +Half-revealed, as in a dream, and the last sight that I saw, was +Donjalolo:—eyes closed, face pale, locks moist, borne slowly to his +sedan, to cross the hollow, and wake in the seclusion of his harem. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXXV. +After Dinner + + +As in dreams I behold thee again, Willamila! as in dreams, once again I +stroll through thy cool shady groves, oh fairest of the vallies of +Mardi! the thought of that mad merry feasting steals over my soul till +I faint. + +Prostrate here and there over the bones of Donjalolo’s sires, the royal +bacchanals lay slumbering till noon. + +“Which are the deadest?” said Babbalanja, peeping in, “the live kings, +or the dead ones?” + +But the former were drooping flowers sought to be revived by watering. +At intervals the sedulous attendants went to and fro, besprinkling +their heads with the scented contents of their vases. + +At length, one by one, the five-and-twenty kings lifted their ambrosial +curls; and shaking the dew therefrom, like eagles opened their right +royal eyes, and dilated their aquiline nostrils, full upon the golden +rays of the sun. + +But why absented himself, Donjalolo? Had he cavalierly left them to +survive the banquet by themselves? But this apparent incivility was +soon explained by heralds, announcing to their prone majesties, that +through the over solicitude of his slaves, their lord the king had been +borne to his harem, without being a party to the act. But to make +amends, in his sedan, Donjalolo was even now drawing nigh. Not, +however, again to make merry; but socially to sleep in company with his +guests; for, together they had all got high, and together they must all +lie low. + +So at it they went: each king to his bones, and slumbered like heroes +till evening; when, availing themselves of the cool moonlight +approaching, the royal guests bade adieu to their host; and summoning +their followers, quitted the glen. + +Early next day, having determined to depart for our canoes, we +proceeded to the House of the Morning, to take leave of Donjalolo. + +An amazing change, one night of solitude had wrought! Pale and languid, +we found him reclining: one hand on his throbbing temples. + +Near an overturned vessel of wine, the royal girdle lay tossed at his +feet. He had waved off his frightened attendants, who crouched out of +sight. + +We advanced. + +“Do ye too leave me? Ready enough are ye to partake of my banquetings, +which, to such as ye, are but mad incidents in one round of more +tranquil diversions. But heed me not, Media;—I am mad. Oh, ye gods! am +I forever a captive?—Ay, free king of Odo, when you list, condescend to +visit the poor slave in Willamilla. I account them but charity, your +visits; would fain allure ye by sumptuous fare. Go, leave me; go, and +be rovers again throughout blooming Mardi. For, me, I am here for +aye.—Bring me wine, slaves! quick! that I may pledge my guests fitly. +Alas, Media, at the bottom of this cup are no sparkles as at top. Oh, +treacherous, treacherous friend! full of smiles and daggers. Yet for +such as me, oh wine, thou art e’en a prop, though it pierce the side; +for man must lean. Thou wine art the friend of the friendless, though a +foe to all. King Media, let us drink. More cups!—And now, farewell.” + +Falling back, he averted his face; and silently we quitted the palace. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXXVI. +Of Those Scamps The Plujii + + +The beach gained, we embarked. + +In good time our party recovered from the seriousness into which we had +been thrown; and a rather long passage being now before us, we whiled +away the hours as best we might. + +Among many entertaining, narrations, old Braid-Beard, crossing his +calves, and peaking his beard, regaled us with some account of certain +invisible spirits, ycleped the Plujii, arrant little knaves as ever +gulped moonshine. + +They were spoken of as inhabiting the island of Quelquo, in a remote +corner of the lagoon; the innocent people of which island were sadly +fretted and put out by their diabolical proceedings. Not to be wondered +at; since, dwelling as they did in the air, and completely +inaccessible, these spirits were peculiarly provocative of ire. + +Detestable Plujii! With malice aforethought, they brought about high +winds that destroyed the banana plantations, and tumbled over the heads +of its occupants many a bamboo dwelling. They cracked the calabashes; +soured the “poee;” induced the colic; begat the spleen; and almost rent +people in twain with stitches in the side. In short, from whatever +evil, the cause of which the Islanders could not directly impute to +their gods, or in their own opinion was not referable to themselves,—of +that very thing must the invisible Plujii be guilty. With horrible +dreams, and blood-thirsty gnats, they invaded the most innocent +slumbers. + +All things they bedeviled. A man with a wry neck ascribed it to the +Plujii; he with a bad memory railed against the Plujii; and the boy, +bruising his finger, also cursed those abominable spirits. + +Nor, to some minds, at least, was there wanting strong presumptive +evidence, that at times, with invisible fingers, the above mentioned +Plujii did leave direct and tangible traces of their presence; pinching +and pounding the unfortunate Islanders; pulling their hair; plucking +their ears, and tweaking their beards and their noses. And thus +perpetually vexing, incensing, tormenting, and exasperating their +helpless victims, the atrocious Plujii reveled in their malicious +dominion over the souls and bodies of the people of Quelquo. + +What it was, that induced them to enact such a part, Oro only knew; and +never but once, it seems, did old Mohi endeavor to find out. + +Once upon a time, visiting Quelquo, he chanced to encounter an old +woman almost doubled together, both hands upon her abdomen; in that +manner running about distracted. + +“My good woman,” said he, “what under the firmament is the matter?” + +“The Plujii! the Plujii!” affectionately caressing the field of their +operations. + +“But why do they torment you?” he soothingly inquired. “How should I +know? and what good would it do me if I did?” + +And on she ran. + +At this part of his narration, Mohi was interrupted by Media; who, much +to the surprise of all present, observed, that, unbeknown to him +(Braid-Beard), he happened to have been on that very island, at that +very time, and saw that identical old lady in the very midst of those +abdominal tribulations. + +“That she was really in great distress,” he went on to say, “was +plainly to be seen; but that in that particular instance, your Plujii +had any hand in tormenting her, I had some boisterous doubts. For, +hearing that an hour or two previous she had been partaking of some +twenty unripe bananas, I rather fancied that that circumstance might +have had something to do with her sufferings. But however it was, all +the herb-leeches on the island would not have altered her own opinions +on the subject.” + +“No,” said Braid-Beard; “a post-mortem examination would not have +satisfied her ghost.” + +“Curious to relate,” he continued, “the people of that island never +abuse the Plujii, notwithstanding all they suffer at their hands, +unless under direct provocation; and a settled matter of faith is it, +that at such times all bitter words and hasty objurgations are entirely +overlooked, nay, pardoned on the spot, by the unseen genii against whom +they are directed.” + +“Magnanimous Plujii!” cried Media. “But, Babbalanja, do you, who run a +tilt at all things, suffer this silly conceit to be uttered with +impunity in your presence? Why so silent?” + +“I have been thinking, my lord,” said Babbalanja, “that though the +people of that island may at times err, in imputing their calamities to +the Plujii, that, nevertheless, upon the whole, they indulge in a +reasonable belief. For, Plujii or no Plujii, it is undeniable, that in +ten thousand ways, as if by a malicious agency, we mortals are woefully +put out and tormented; and that, too, by things in themselves so +exceedingly trivial, that it would seem almost impiety to ascribe them +to the august gods. No; there must exist some greatly inferior spirits; +so insignificant, comparatively, as to be overlooked by the supernal +powers; and through them it must be, that we are thus grievously +annoyed. At any rate; such a theory would supply a hiatus in my system +of meta-physics.” + +“Well, peace to the Plujii,” said Media; “they trouble not me.” + + + + +CHAPTER LXXXVII. +Nora-Bamma + + +Still onward gliding, the lagoon a calm. + +Hours pass; and full before us, round and green, a Moslem turban by us +floats—Nora-Bamma, Isle of Nods. + +Noon-tide rolls its flood. Vibrates the air, and trembles. And by +illusion optical, thin-draped in azure haze, drift here and there the +brilliant lands: swans, peacock-plumaged, sailing through the sky. Down +to earth hath heaven come; hard telling sun-clouds from the isles. + +And high in air nods Nora-Bamma. Nid-nods its tufted summit like three +ostrich plumes; its beetling crags, bent poppies, shadows, willowy +shores, all nod; its streams are murmuring down the hills; its wavelets +hush the shore. + +Who dwells in Nora-Bamma? Dreamers, hypochondriacs, somnambulists; who, +from the cark and care of outer Mardi fleeing, in the poppy’s jaded +odors, seek oblivion for the past, and ecstasies to come. + +Open-eyed, they sleep and dream; on their roof-trees, grapes unheeded +drop. In Nora-Bamma, whispers are as shouts; and at a zephyr’s breath, +from the woodlands shake the leaves, as of humming-birds, a flight. + +All this spake Braid-Beard, of the isle. How that none ere touched its +strand, without rendering instant tribute of a nap; how that those who +thither voyaged, in golden quest of golden gourds, fast dropped asleep, +ere one was plucked; waking not till night; how that you must needs rub +hard your eyes, would you wander through the isle; and how that silent +specters would be met, haunting twilight groves, and dreamy meads; +hither gliding, thither fading, end or purpose none. + +True or false, so much for Mohi’s Nora Bamma. + +But as we floated on, it looked the place described. We yawned, and +yawned, as crews of vessels may; as in warm Indian seas, their +winnowing sails all swoon, when by them glides some opium argosie. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXXVIII. +In A Calm, Hautia’s Heralds Approach + + +“How still!” cried Babbalanja. “This calm is like unto Oro’s +everlasting serenity, and like unto man’s last despair.” + +But now the silence was broken by a strange, distant, intermitted +melody in the water. + +Gazing over the side, we saw naught but a far-darting ray in its +depths. + +Then Yoomy, before buried in a reverie, burst forth with a verse, +sudden as a jet from a Geyser. + +Like the fish of the bright and twittering fin, + Bright fish! diving deep as high soars the lark, +So, far, far, far, doth the maiden swim, + Wild song, wild light, in still ocean’s dark. + + +“What maiden, minstrel?” cried Media. + +“None of these,” answered Yoomy, pointing out a shallop gliding near. + +“The damsels three:—Taji, they pursue you yet.” That still canoe drew +nigh, the Iris in its prow. + +Gliding slowly by, one damsel flung a Venus-car, the leaves yet fresh. + +Said Yoomy—“Fly to love.” + +The second maiden flung a pallid blossom, buried in hemlock leaves. + +Said Yoomy, starting—“I have wrought a death.” + +Then came showering Venus-cars, and glorious moss-roses numberless, and +odorous handfuls of Verbena. + +Said Yoomy—“Yet fly, oh fly to me: all rosy joys and sweets are mine.” + +Then the damsels floated on. + +“Was ever queen more enigmatical?” cried Media—“Love,—death,—joy,—fly +to me? But what says Taji?” + +“That I turn not back for Hautia; whoe’er she be, that wild witch I +contemn.” + +“Then spread our pinions wide! a breeze! up sails! ply paddles all! +Come, Flora’s flute, float forth a song.” + +To pieces picking the thorny roses culled from Hautia’s gifts, and +holding up their blighted cores, thus plumed and turbaned Yoomy sang, +leaning against the mast:— + +Oh! royal is the rose, + But barbed with many a dart; +Beware, beware the rose, + ’Tis cankered at the heart. + + Sweet, sweet the sunny down, +Oh! lily, lily, lily down! + Sweet, sweet, Verbena’s bloom! +Oh! pleasant, gentle, musky bloom! + +Dread, dread the sunny down; + Lo! lily-hooded asp; +Blooms, blooms no more Verbena; + White-withered in your clasp. + + + + +CHAPTER LXXXIX. +Braid-Beard Rehearses The Origin Of The Isle Of Rogues + + +Judge not things by their names. This, the maxim illustrated respecting +the isle toward which we were sailing. + +Ohonoo was its designation, in other words the Land of Rogues. So what +but a nest of villains and pirates could one fancy it to be: a +downright Tortuga, swarming with “Brethren of the coast,”—such as +Montbars, L’Ollonais, Bartolomeo, Peter of Dieppe, and desperadoes of +that kidney. But not so. The men of Ohonoo were as honest as any in +Mardi. They had a suspicious appellative for their island, true; but +not thus seemed it to them. For, upon nothing did they so much plume +themselves as upon this very name. Why? Its origin went back to old +times; and being venerable they gloried therein; though they disclaimed +its present applicability to any of their race; showing, that words are +but algebraic signs, conveying no meaning except what you please. And +to be called one thing, is oftentimes to be another. + +But how came the Ohonoose by their name? + +Listen, and Braid-Beard, our Herodotus, will tell. + +Long and long ago, there were banished to Ohonoo all the bucaniers, +flibustiers, thieves, and malefactors of the neighboring islands; who, +becoming at last quite a numerous community, resolved to make a stand +for their dignity, and number one among the nations of Mardi. And even +as before they had been weeded out of the surrounding countries; so +now, they went to weeding out themselves; banishing all objectionable +persons to still another island. + +These events happened at a period so remote, that at present it was +uncertain whether those twice banished, were thrust into their second +exile by reason of their superlative knavery, or because of their +comparative honesty. If the latter, then must the residue have been a +precious enough set of scoundrels. + +However it was, the commonwealth of knaves now mustered together their +gray-beards, and wise-pates, and knowing-ones, of which last there was +a plenty, chose a king to rule over them, and went to political +housekeeping for themselves. + +And in the fullness of time, this people became numerous and mighty. +And the more numerous and mighty they waxed, by so much the more did +they take pride and glory in their origin, frequently reverting to it +with manifold boastings. The proud device of their monarch was a hand +with the forefinger crooked, emblematic of the peculatory propensities +of his ancestors. + +And all this, at greater length, said Mohi. + +“It would seem, then, my lord,” said Babbalanja, reclining, “as if +these men of Ohonoo had canonized the derelictions of their +progenitors, though the same traits are deemed scandalous among +themselves. But it is time that makes the difference. The knave of a +thousand years ago seems a fine old fellow full of spirit and fun, +little malice in his soul; whereas, the knave of to-day seems a sour- +visaged wight, with nothing to redeem him. Many great scoundrels of our +Chronicler’s chronicles are heroes to us:—witness, Marjora the usurper. +Ay, time truly works wonders. It sublimates wine; it sublimates fame; +nay, is the creator thereof; it enriches and darkens our spears of the +Palm; enriches and enlightens the mind; it ripens cherries and young +lips; festoons old ruins, and ivies old heads; imparts a relish to old +yams, and a pungency to the Ponderings of old Bardianna; of fables +distills truths; and finally, smooths, levels, glosses, softens, melts, +and meliorates all things. Why, my lord, round Mardi itself is all the +better for its antiquity, and the more to be revered; to the +cozy-minded, more comfortable to dwell in. Ah! if ever it lay in embryo +like a green seed in the pod, what a damp, shapeless thing it must have +been, and how unpleasant from the traces of its recent creation. The +first man, quoth old Bardianna, must have felt like one going into a +new habitation, where the bamboos are green. Is there not a legend in +Maramma, that his family were long troubled with influenzas and +catarrhs?” + +“Oh Time, Time, Time!” cried Yoomy—“it is Time, old midsummer Time, +that has made the old world what it is. Time hoared the old mountains, +and balded their old summits, and spread the old prairies, and built +the old forests, and molded the old vales. It is Time that has worn +glorious old channels for the glorious old rivers, and rounded the old +lakes, and deepened the old sea! It is Time—” + +“Ay, full time to cease,” cried Media. “What have you to do with +cogitations not in verse, minstrel? Leave prose to Babbalanja, who is +prosy enough.” + +“Even so,” said Babbalanja, “Yoomy, you have overstepped your province. +My lord Media well knows, that your business is to make the metal in +you jingle in tags, not ring in the ingot.” + + + + +CHAPTER XC. +Rare Sport At Ohonoo + + +Approached from the northward, Ohonoo, midway cloven down to the sea, +one half a level plain; the other, three mountain terraces—Ohonoo looks +like the first steps of a gigantic way to the sun. And such, if +Braid-Beard spoke truth, it had formerly been. + +“Ere Mardi was made,” said that true old chronicler, “Vivo, one of the +genii, built a ladder of mountains whereby to go up and go down. And of +this ladder, the island of Ohonoo was the base. But wandering here and +there, incognito in a vapor, so much wickedness did Vivo spy out, that +in high dudgeon he hurried up his ladder, knocking the mountains from +under him as he went. These here and there fell into the lagoon, +forming many isles, now green and luxuriant; which, with those +sprouting from seeds dropped by a bird from the moon, comprise all the +groups in the reef.” + +Surely, oh, surely, if I live till Mardi be forgotten by Mardi, I shall +not forget the sight that greeted us, as we drew nigh the shores of +this same island of Ohonoo; for was not all Ohonoo bathing in the surf +of the sea? + +But let the picture be painted. + +Where eastward the ocean rolls surging against the outer reef of Mardi, +there, facing a flood-gate in the barrier, stands cloven Ohonoo; her +plains sloping outward to the sea, her mountains a bulwark behind. As +at Juam, where the wild billows from seaward roll in upon its cliffs; +much more at Ohonoo, in billowy battalions charge they hotly into the +lagoon, and fall on the isle like an army from the deep. But charge +they never so boldly, and charge they forever, old Ohonoo gallantly +throws them back till all before her is one scud and rack. So charged +the bright billows of cuirassiers at Waterloo: so hurled them off the +long line of living walls, whose base was as the sea-beach, +wreck-strown, in a gale. + +Without the break in the reef wide banks of coral shelve off, creating +the bar, where the waves muster for the onset, thundering in +water-bolts, that shake the whole reef, till its very spray trembles. +And then is it, that the swimmers of Ohonoo most delight to gambol in +the surf. + +For this sport, a surf-board is indispensable: some five feet in +length; the width of a man’s body; convex on both sides; highly +polished; and rounded at the ends. It is held in high estimation; +invariably oiled after use; and hung up conspicuously in the dwelling +of the owner. + +Ranged on the beach, the bathers, by hundreds dash in; and diving under +the swells, make straight for the outer sea, pausing not till the +comparatively smooth expanse beyond has been gained. Here, throwing +themselves upon their boards, tranquilly they wait for a billow that +suits. Snatching them up, it hurries them landward, volume and speed +both increasing, till it races along a watery wall, like the smooth, +awful verge of Niagara. Hanging over this scroll, looking down from it +as from a precipice, the bathers halloo; every limb in motion to +preserve their place on the very crest of the wave. Should they fall +behind, the squadrons that follow would whelm them; dismounted, and +thrown forward, as certainly would they be run over by the steed they +ride. ’Tis like charging at the head of cavalry: you must on. + +An expert swimmer shifts his position on his plank; now half striding +it; and anon, like a rider in the ring, poising himself upright in the +scud, coming on like a man in the air. + +At last all is lost in scud and vapor, as the overgrown billow bursts +like a bomb. Adroitly emerging, the swimmers thread their way out; and +like seals at the Orkneys, stand dripping upon the shore. + +Landing in smooth water, some distance from the scene, we strolled +forward; and meeting a group resting, inquired for Uhia, their king. He +was pointed out in the foam. But presently drawing nigh, he embraced +Media, bidding all welcome. + +The bathing over, and evening at hand, Uhia and his subjects repaired +to their canoes; and we to ours. + +Landing at another quarter of the island, we journeyed up a valley +called Monlova, and were soon housed in a very pleasant retreat of our +host. + +Soon supper was spread. But though the viands were rare, and the red +wine went round and round like a foaming bay horse in the ring; yet we +marked, that despite the stimulus of his day’s good sport, and the +stimulus of his brave good cheer, Uhia our host was moody and still. + +Said Babbalanja “My lord, he fills wine cups for others to quaff.” + +But whispered King Media, “Though Uhia be sad, be we merry, merry men.” + +And merry some were, and merrily went to their mats. + + + + +CHAPTER XCI. +Of King Uhia And His Subjects + + +As beseemed him, Uhia was royally lodged. Ample his roof. Beneath it a +hundred attendants nightly laying their heads. But long since, he had +disbanded his damsels. + +Springing from syren embrace—“They shall sap and mine me no more” he +cried “my destiny commands me. I will don my manhood. By Keevi! no more +will I clasp a waist.” + +“From that time forth,” said Braid-Beard, “young Uhia spread like the +tufted top of the Palm; his thigh grew brawny as the limb of the +Banian; his arm waxed strong as the back bone of the shark; yea, his +voice grew sonorous as a conch.” + +“And now he bent his whole soul to the accomplishment of the destiny +believed to be his. Nothing less than bodily to remove Ohonoo to the +center of the lagoon, in fulfillment of an old prophecy running +thus—When a certain island shall stir from its foundations and stand in +the middle of the still water, then shall the ruler of that island be +ruler of all Mardi.” + +The task was hard, but how glorious the reward! So at it he went, and +all Ohonoo helped him. Not by hands, but by calling in the magicians. +Thus far, nevertheless, in vain. But Uhia had hopes. + +Now, informed of all this, said Babbalanja to Media, “My lord, if the +continual looking-forward to something greater, be better than an +acquiescence in things present; then, wild as it is, this belief of +Uhia’s he should hug to his heart, as erewhile his wives. But my lord, +this faith it is, that robs his days of peace; his nights of sweet +unconsciousness. For holding himself foreordained to the dominion of +the entire Archipelago, he upbraids the gods for laggards, and curses +himself as deprived of his rights; nay, as having had wrested from him, +what he never possessed. Discontent dwarfs his horizon till he spans it +with his hand. ‘Most miserable of demi-gods,’ he cries, ‘here am I +cooped up in this insignificant islet, only one hundred leagues by +fifty, when scores of broad empires own me not for their lord.’ Yet +Uhia himself is envied. ‘Ah!’ cries Karrolono, one of his chieftains, +master of a snug little glen, ‘Here am I cabined in this paltry cell +among the mountains, when that great King Uhia is lord of the whole +island, and every cubic mile of matter therein.’ But this same +Karrolono is envied. ‘Hard, oh beggarly lot is mine,’ cries Donno, one +of his retainers. ‘Here am I fixed and screwed down to this paltry +plantation, when my lord Karrolono owns the whole glen, ten long +parasangs from cliff to sea.’ But Donno too is envied. ‘Alas, cursed +fate!’ cries his servitor Flavona. ‘Here am I made to trudge, sweat, +and labor all day, when Donno my master does nothing but command.’ But +others envy Flavona; and those who envy him are envied in turn; even +down to poor bed- ridden Manta, who dying of want, groans forth, +‘Abandoned wretch that I am! here I miserably perish, while so many +beggars gad about and live!’ But surely; none envy Manta! Yes; great +Uhia himself. ‘Ah!’ cries the king. ‘Here am I vexed and tormented by +ambition; no peace night nor day; my temples chafed sore by this cursed +crown that I wear; while that ignoble wight Manta, gives up the ghost +with none to molest him.’” + +In vain we wandered up and down in this isle, and peered into its +innermost recesses: no Yillah was there. + + + + +CHAPTER XCII. +The God Keevi And The Precipice Of Mondo + + +One object of interest in Ohonoo was the original image of Keevi the +god of Thieves; hence, from time immemorial, the tutelar deity of the +isle. + +His shrine was a natural niche in a cliff, walling in the valley of +Monlova And here stood Keevi, with his five eyes, ten hands, and three +pair of legs, equipped at all points for the vocation over which he +presided. Of mighty girth, his arms terminated in hands, every finger a +limb, spreading in multiplied digits: palms twice five, and fifty +fingers. + +According to the legend, Keevi fell from a golden cloud, burying +himself to the thighs in the earth, tearing up the soil all round. +Three meditative mortals, strolling by at the time, had a narrow +escape. + +A wonderful recital; but none of us voyagers durst flout it. Did they +not show us the identical spot where the idol fell? We descended into +the hollow, now verdant. Questionless, Keevi himself would have vouched +for the truth of the miracle, had he not been unfortunately dumb. But +by far the most cogent, and pointed argument advanced in support of +this story, is a spear which the priests of Keevi brought forth, for +Babbalanja to view. + +“Let me look at it closer,” said Babbalanja. + +And turning it over and over and curiously inspecting it, “Wonderful +spear,” he cried. “Doubtless, my reverends, this self-same spear must +have persuaded many recusants!” + +“Nay, the most stubborn,” they answered. + +“And all afterward quoted as additional authority for the truth of the +legend?” + +“Assuredly.” + +From the sea to the shrine of this god, the fine valley of Monlova +ascends with a gentle gradation, hardly perceptible; but upon turning +round toward the water, one is surprised to find himself high elevated +above its surface. Pass on, and the same silent ascent deceives you; +and the valley contracts; and on both sides the cliffs advance; till at +last you come to a narrow space, shouldered by buttresses of rock. +Beyond, through this cleft, all is blue sky. If the Trades blow high, +and you came unawares upon the spot, you would think Keevi himself +pushing you forward with all his hands; so powerful is the current of +air rushing through this elevated defile. But expostulate not with the +tornado that blows you along; sail on; but soft; look down; the land +breaks off in one sheer descent of a thousand feet, right down to the +wide plain below. So sudden and profound this precipice, that you seem +to look off from one world to another. In a dreamy, sunny day, the +spangled plain beneath assumes an uncertain fleeting aspect. Had you a +deep-sea-lead you would almost be tempted to sound the ocean-haze at +your feet. + +This, mortal! is the precipice of Mondo. + +From this brink, spear in hand, sprang fifty rebel warriors, driven +back into the vale by a superior force. Finding no spot to stand at +bay, with a fierce shout they took the fatal leap. + +Said Mohi, “Their souls ascended, ere their bodies touched.” + +This tragical event took place many generations gone by, and now a +dizzy, devious way conducts one, firm of foot, from the verge to the +plain. But none ever ascended. So perilous, indeed, is the descent +itself, that the islanders venture not the feat, without invoking +supernatural aid. Flanking the precipice beneath beetling rocks, stand +the guardian deities of Mondo; and on altars before them, are placed +the propitiatory offerings of the traveler. + +To the right of the brink of the precipice, and far over it, projects a +narrow ledge. The test of legitimacy in the Ohonoo monarchs is to stand +hereon, arms folded, and javelins darting by. + +And there in his youth Uhia stood. + +“How felt you, cousin?” asked Media. + +“Like the King of Ohonoo,” he replied. “As I shall again feel; when +King of all Mardi.” + + + + +CHAPTER XCIII. +Babbalanja Steps In Between Mohi And Yoomy; And Yoomy Relates A Legend + + +Embarking from Ohonoo, we at length found ourselves gliding by the +pleasant shores of Tupia, an islet which according to Braid-Beard had +for ages remained uninhabited by man. Much curiosity being expressed to +know more of the isle, Mohi was about to turn over his chronicles, +when, with modesty, the minstrel Yoomy interposed; saying, that if my +Lord Media permitted, he himself would relate the legend. From its +nature, deeming the same pertaining to his province as poet; though, as +yet, it had not been versified. But he added, that true pearl shells +rang musically, though not strung upon a cord. + +Upon this presumptuous interference, Mohi looked highly offended; and +nervously twitching his beard, uttered something invidious about +frippery young poetasters being too full of silly imaginings to tell a +plain tale. + +Said Yoomy, in reply, adjusting his turban, “Old Mohi, let us not +clash. I honor your calling; but, with submission, your chronicles are +more wild than my cantos. I deal in pure conceits of my own; which have +a shapeliness and a unity, however unsubstantial; but you, Braid-Beard, +deal in mangled realities. In all your chapters, you yourself grope in +the dark. Much truth is not in thee, historian. Besides, Mohi: my songs +perpetuate many things which you sage scribes entirely overlook. Have +you not oftentimes come to me, and my ever dewy ballads for +information, in which you and your musty old chronicles were +deficient?” + +“In much that is precious, Mohi, we poets are the true historians; we +embalm; you corrode.” + +To this Mohi, with some ire, was about to make answer, when, flinging +over his shoulder a new fold of his mantle, Babbalanja spoke thus: +“Peace, rivals. As Bardianna has it, like all who dispute upon +pretensions of their own, you are each nearest the right, when you +speak of the other; and furthest therefrom, when you speak of +yourselves.” + +Said Mohi and Yoomy in a breath, “Who sought your opinion, philosopher? +you filcher from old Bardianna, and monger of maxims!” + +“You, who have so long marked the vices of Mardi, that you flatter +yourself you have none of your own,” added Braid-Beard. + +“You, who only seem wise, because of the contrasting follies of others, +and not of any great wisdom in yourself,” continued the minstrel, with +unwonted asperity.” + +“Now here,” said Babballanja, “am I charged upon by a bearded old ram, +and a lamb. One butting with his carious and brittle old frontlet; the +other pushing with its silly head before its horns are sprouted. But +this comes of being impartial. Had I espoused the cause of Yoomy versus +Mohi, or that of Mohi versus Yoomy, I had been sure to have had at +least one voice in my favor. The impartialist insulteth all sides, +saith old Bardianna; but smite with but one hand, and the other shall +be kissed.—Oh incomparable Bardianna!” + +“Will no one lay that troubled old ghost,” exclaimed Media, devoutly. +“Proceed with thy legend, Yoomy; and see to it, that it be brief; for I +mistrust me, these legends do but test the patience of the hearers. But +draw a long breath, and begin.” + +“A long bow,” muttered Mohi. + +And Yoomy began. + +“It is now about ten hundred thousand moons—” + +“Great Oro! How long since, say you?” cried Mohi, making Gothic arches +of his brows. + +Looking at him disdainfully, but vouchsafing no reply, Yoomy began over +again. + +“It is now above ten hundred thousand moons, since there died the last +of a marvelous race, once inhabiting the very shores by which we are +sailing. They were a very diminutive people, only a few inches high—” + +“Stop, minstrel,” cried Mohi; “how many pennyweights did they weigh?” + +Continued Yoomy, unheedingly, “They were covered all over with a soft, +silky down, like that on the rind of the Avee; and there grew upon +their heads a green, lance-leaved vine, of a most delicate texture. For +convenience, the manikins reduced their tendrils, sporting, nothing but +coronals. Whereas, priding themselves upon the redundancy of their +tresses, the little maidens assiduously watered them with the early dew +of the morning; so that all wreathed and festooned with verdure, they +moved about in arbors, trailing after them trains.” + +“I can hear no more,” exclaimed Mohi, stopping his ears. + +Continued Yoomy, “The damsels lured to their bowers, certain red- +plumaged insect-birds, and taught them to nestle therein, and warble; +which, with the pleasant vibrating of the leaves, when the little +maidens moved, produced a strange blending of sweet, singing sounds. +The little maidens embraced not with their arms, but with their viny +locks; whose tendrils instinctively twined about their lovers, till +both were lost in the bower.” + +“And what then?” asked Mohi, who, notwithstanding the fingers in his +ears, somehow contrived to listen; “What then?” + +Vouchsafing no reply, Yoomy went on. + +“At a certain age, but while yet the maidens were very young, their +vines bore blossoms. Ah! fatal symptoms. For soon as they burst, the +maidens died in their arbors; and were buried in the valleys; and their +vines spread forth; and the flowers bloomed; but the maidens themselves +were no more. And now disdaining the earth, the vines shot upward: +climbing to the topmost boughs of the trees; and flowering in the +sunshine forever and aye.” + +Yoomy here paused for a space; but presently continued: + +“The little eyes of the people of Tupia were very strange to behold: +full of stars, that shone from within, like the Pleiades, deep- bosomed +in blue. And like the stars, they were intolerant of sunlight; and +slumbering through the day, the people of Tupia only went abroad by +night. But it was chiefly when the moon was at full, that they were +mostly in spirits. + +“Then the little manikins would dive down into the sea, and rove about +in the coral groves, making love to the mermaids. Or, racing round, +make a mad merry night of it with the sea-urchins:—plucking the +reverend mullets by the beard; serenading the turtles in their cells; +worrying the sea-nettles; or tormenting with their antics the touchy +torpedos. Sometimes they went prying about with the starfish, that have +an eye at the end of each ray; and often with coral files in their +hands stole upon slumbering swordfish, slyly blunting their weapons. In +short, these stout little manikins were passionately fond of the sea, +and swore by wave and billow, that sooner or later they would embark +thereon in nautilus shells, and spend the rest of their roving days +thousands of inches from Tupia. Too true, they were shameless little +rakes. Oft would they return to their sweethearts, sporting musky +girdles of sea-kelp, tasseled with green little pouches of grass, +brimful of seed-pearls; and jingling their coin in the ears of the +damsels, throw out inuendoes about the beautiful and bountiful +mermaids: how wealthy and amorous they were, and how they delighted in +the company of the brave gallants of Tupia. Ah! at such heartless +bravadoes, how mourned the poor little nymphs. Deep into their arbors +they went; and their little hearts burst like rose-buds, and filled the +whole air with an odorous grief. But when their lovers were gentle and +true, no happier maidens haunted the lilies than they. By some mystical +process they wrought minute balls of light: touchy, mercurial globules, +very hard to handle; and with these, at pitch and toss, they played in +the groves. Or mischievously inclined, they toiled all night long at +braiding the moon-beams together, and entangling the plaited end to a +bough; so that at night, the poor planet had much ado to set.” + +Here Yoomy once more was mute. + +“Pause you to invent as you go on?” said old Mohi, elevating his chin, +till his beard was horizontal. + +Yoomy resumed. + +“Little or nothing more, my masters, is extant of the legend; only it +must be mentioned, that these little people were very tasteful in their +personal adornings; the manikins wearing girdles of fragrant leaves, +and necklaces of aromatic seeds; and the little damsels, not content +with their vines, and their verdure, sporting pearls in their ears; +bracelets of wee little porpoise teeth; and oftentimes dancing with +their mates in the moonlit glades, coquettishly fanned themselves with +the transparent wings of the flying fish.” + +“Now, I appeal to you, royal Media; to you, noble Taji; to you, +Babbalanja;” said the chronicler, with an impressive gesture, “whether +this seems a credible history: Yoomy has invented.” + +“But perhaps he has entertained, old Mohi,” said Babbalanja. + +“He has not spoken the truth,” persisted the chronicler. + +“Mohi,” said Babbalanja, “truth is in things, and not in words: truth +is voiceless; so at least saith old Bardianna. And I, Babbalanja, +assert, that what are vulgarly called fictions are as much realities as +the gross mattock of Dididi, the digger of trenches; for things visible +are but conceits of the eye: things imaginative, conceits of the fancy. +If duped by one, we are equally duped by the other.” + +“Clear as this water,” said Yoomy. + +“Opaque as this paddle,” said Mohi, “But, come now, thou oracle, if all +things are deceptive, tell us what is truth?” + +“The old interrogatory; did they not ask it when the world began? But +ask it no more. As old Bardianna hath it, that question is more final +than any answer.” + + + + +CHAPTER XCIV. +Of That Jolly Old Lord, Borabolla; And That Jolly Island Of His, +Mondoldo; And Of The Fish-Ponds, And The Hereafters Of Fish + + +Drawing near Mondoldo, our next place of destination, we were greeted +by six fine canoes, gayly tricked out with streamers, and all alive +with the gestures of their occupants. King Borabolla and court were +hastening to welcome our approach; Media, unbeknown to all, having +notified him at the Banquet of the Five-and-Twenty Kings, of our +intention to visit his dominions. + +Soon, side by side, these canoes floated with ours; each barge of Odo +courteously flanked by those of Mondoldo. + +Not long were we in identifying Borabolla: the portly, pleasant old +monarch, seated cross-legged upon a dais, projecting over the bow of +the largest canoe of the six, close-grappling to the side of the Sea +Elephant. + +Was he not a goodly round sight to behold? Round all over; round of eye +and of head; and like the jolly round Earth, roundest and biggest about +the Equator. A girdle of red was his Equinoctial Line, giving a +compactness to his plumpness. + +This old Borabolla permitted naught to come between his head and the +sun; not even gray hairs. Bald as a gourd, right down on his brazen +skull, the rays of the luminary converged. + +He was all hilarity; full of allusions to the feast at Willamilla, +where he had done royal execution. Rare old Borabolla! thou wert made +for dining out; thy ample mouth an inlet for good cheer, and a +sally-port for good humor. + +Bustling about on his dais, he now gave orders for the occupants of our +canoes to be summarily emptied into his own; saying, that in that +manner only did he allow guests to touch the beach of Mondoldo. + +So, with no little trouble—for the waves were grown somewhat riotous—we +proceeded to comply; bethinking ourselves all the while, how annoying +is sometimes an over-strained act of hospitality. + +We were now but little less than a mile from the shore. But what of +that? There was plenty of time, thought Borabolla, for a hasty lunch, +and the getting of a subsequent appetite ere we effected a landing. So +viands were produced; to which the guests were invited to pay heedful +attention; or take the consequences, and famish till the long voyage in +prospect was ended. + +Soon the water shoaled (approaching land is like nearing truth in +metaphysics), and ere we yet touched the beach, Borabolla declared, +that we were already landed. Which paradoxical assertion implied, that +the hospitality of Mondoldo was such, that in all directions it +radiated far out upon the lagoon, embracing a great circle; so that no +canoe could sail by the island, without its occupants being so long its +guests. + +In most hospitable vicinity to the water, was a fine large structure, +inclosed by a stockade; both rather dilapidated; as if the cost of +entertaining its guests, prevented outlays for repairing the place. But +it was one of Borabolla’s maxims, that generally your tumble-down old +homesteads yield the most entertainment; their very dilapidation +betokening their having seen good service in hospitality; whereas, +spruce-looking, finical portals, have a phiz full of meaning; for +niggards are oftentimes neat. + +Now, after what has been said, who so silly as to fancy, that because +Borabolla’s mansion was inclosed by a stockade, that the same was +intended as a defense against guests? By no means. In the palisade was +a mighty breach, not an entrance-way, wide enough to admit six Daniel +Lamberts abreast. + +“Look,” cried Borabolla, as landing we stepped toward the place. “Look +Media! look all. These gates, you here see, lashed back with osiers, +have been so lashed during my life-time; and just where they stand, +shall they rot; ay, they shall perish wide open.” + +“But why have them at all?” inquired Media. + +“Ah! there you have old Borabolla,” cried the other. + +“No,” said Babbalanja, “a fence whose gate is ever kept open, seems +unnecessary, I grant; nevertheless, it gives a notable hint, otherwise +not so aptly conveyed; for is not the open gate the sign of the open +heart?” + +“Right, right,” cried Borabolla; “so enter both, cousin Media;” and +with one hand smiting his chest, with the other he waved us on. + +But if the stockade seemed all open gate, the structure within seemed +only a roof; for nothing but a slender pillar here and there, supported +it. + +“This is my mode of building,” said Borabolla; “I will have no outside +to my palaces. Walls are superfluous. And to a high-minded guest, the +entering a narrow doorway is like passing under a yoke; every time he +goes in, or comes out, it reminds him, that he is being entertained at +the cost of another. So storm in all round.” + +Within, was one wide field-bed; where reclining, we looked up to +endless rows of brown calabashes, and trenchers suspended along the +rafters; promissory of ample cheer as regiments of old hams in a +baronial refectory. + +They were replenished with both meat and drink; the trenchers readily +accessible by means of cords; but the gourds containing arrack, +suspended neck downward, were within easy reach where they swung. + +Seeing all these indications of hard roystering; like a cautious young +bridegroom at his own marriage merry-making, Taji stood on his guard. +And when Borabolla urged him to empty a gourd or two, by way of making +room in him for the incidental repast about to be served, Taji civilly +declined; not wishing to cumber the floor, before the cloth was laid. + +Jarl, however, yielding to importunity, and unmindful of the unities of +time and place, went freely about, from gourd to gourd, concocting in +him a punch. At which, Samoa expressed much surprise, that he should be +so unobservant as not to know, that in Mardi, guests might be pressed +to demean themselves, without its being expected that so they would do. +A true toss-pot himself, he bode his time. + +The second lunch over, Borabolla placed both hands to the ground, and +giving the sigh of the fat man, after three vigorous efforts, succeeded +in gaining his pins; which pins of his, were but small for his body; +insomuch that they hugely staggered about, under the fine old load they +carried. + +The specific object of his thus striving after an erect posture, was to +put himself in motion, and conduct us to his fish-ponds, famous +throughout the Archipelago as the hobby of the king of Mondoldo. +Furthermore, as the great repast of the day, yet to take place, was to +be a grand piscatory one, our host was all anxiety, that we should have +a glimpse of our fish, while yet alive and hearty. + +We were alarmed at perceiving, that certain servitors were preparing to +accompany us with trenchers of edibles. It begat the notion, that our +trip to the fish-ponds was to prove a long journey. But they were not +three hundred yards distant; though Borabolla being a veteran traveler, +never stirred from his abode without his battalion of butlers. + +The ponds were four in number, close bordering the water, embracing +about an acre each, and situated in a low fen, draining several +valleys. The excavated soil was thrown up in dykes, made tight by being +beaten all over, while in a soft state, with the heavy, flat ends of +Palm stalks. Lying side by side, by three connecting trenches, these +ponds could be made to communicate at pleasure; while two additional +canals afforded means of letting in upon them the salt waters of the +lagoon on one hand, or those of an inland stream on the other. And by a +third canal with four branches, together or separately, they could be +partially drained. Thus, the waters could be mixed to suit any gills; +and the young fish taken from the sea, passed through a stated process +of freshening; so that by the time they graduated, the salt was well +out of them, like the brains out of some diplomaed collegians. + +Fresh-water fish are only to be obtained in Mondoldo by the artificial +process above mentioned; as the streams and brooks abound not in trout +or other Waltonian prey. + +Taken all floundering from the sea, Borabolla’s fish, passing through +their regular training for the table, and daily tended by their +keepers, in course of time became quite tame and communicative. To +prove which, calling his Head Ranger, the king bade him administer the +customary supply of edibles. + +Accordingly, mouthfuls were thrown into the ponds. Whereupon, the fish +darted in a shoal toward the margin; some leaping out of the water in +their eagerness. Crouching on the bank, the Ranger now called several +by name, patted their scales, carrying on some heathenish nursery-talk, +like St. Anthony, in ancient Coptic, instilling virtuous principles +into his finny flock on the sea shore. + +But alas, for the hair-shirted old dominie’s backsliding disciples. +For, of all nature’s animated kingdoms, fish are the most unchristian, +inhospitable, heartless, and cold-blooded of creatures. At least, so +seem they to strangers; though at bottom, somehow, they must be all +right. And truly it is not to be wondered at, that the very reverend +Anthony strove after the conversion of fish. For, whoso shall +Christianize, and by so doing, humanize the sharks, will do a greater +good, by the saving of human life in all time to come, than though he +made catechumens of the head-hunting Dyaks of Borneo, or the +blood-bibbing Battas of Sumatra. And are these Dyaks and Battas one +whit better than tiger-sharks? Nay, are they so good? Were a Batta your +intimate friend, you would often mistake an orang-outang for him; and +have orang-outangs immortal souls? True, the Battas believe in a +hereafter; but of what sort? Full of Blue-Beards and bloody bones. So, +also, the sharks; who hold that Paradise is one vast Pacific, ploughed +by navies of mortals, whom an endless gale forever drops into their +maws. + +Not wholly a surmise. For, does it not appear a little unreasonable to +imagine, that there is any creature, fish, flesh, or fowl, so little in +love with life, as not to cherish hopes of a future state? Why does man +believe in it? One reason, reckoned cogent, is, that he desires it. Who +shall say, then, that the leviathan this day harpooned on the coast of +Japan, goes not straight to his ancestor, who rolled all Jonah, as a +sweet morsel, under his tongue? + +Though herein, some sailors are slow believers, or at best hold +themselves in a state of philosophical suspense. Say they—“That +catastrophe took place in the Mediterranean; and the only whales +frequenting the Mediterranean, are of a sort having not a swallow large +enough to pass a man entire; for those Mediterranean whales feed upon +small things, as horses upon oats.” But hence, the sailors draw a rash +inference. Are not the Straits of Gibralter wide enough to admit a +sperm-whale, even though none have sailed through, since Nineveh and +the gourd in its suburbs dried up? + +As for the possible hereafter of the whales; a creature eighty feet +long without stockings, and thirty feet round the waist before dinner, +is not inconsiderately to be consigned to annihilation. + + + + +CHAPTER XCV. +That Jolly Old Lord Borabolla Laughs On Both Sides Of His Face + + +“A very good palace, this, coz, for you and me,” said waddling old +Borabolla to Media, as, returned from our excursion, he slowly lowered +himself down to his mat, sighing like a grampus. + +By this, he again made known the vastness of his hospitality, which led +him for the nonce to parcel out his kingdom with his guests. + +But apart from these extravagant expressions of good feeling, Borabolla +was the prince of good fellows. His great tun of a person was +indispensable to the housing of his bullock-heart; under which, any +lean wight would have sunk. But alas! unlike Media and Taji, Borabolla, +though a crowned king, was accounted no demi-god; his obesity excluding +him from that honor. Indeed, in some quarters of Mardi, certain pagans +maintain, that no fat man can be even immortal. A dogma! truly, which +should be thrown to the dogs. For fat men are the salt and savor of the +earth; full of good humor, high spirits, fun, and all manner of +jollity. Their breath clears the atmosphere: their exhalations air the +world. Of men, they are the good measures; brimmed, heaped, pressed +down, piled up, and running over. They are as ships from Teneriffe; +swimming deep, full of old wine, and twenty steps down into their +holds. Soft and susceptible, all round they are easy of entreaty. +Wherefore, for all their rotundity, they are too often circumnavigated +by hatchet-faced knaves. Ah! a fat uncle, with a fat paunch, and a fat +purse, is a joy and a delight to all nephews; to philosophers, a +subject of endless speculation, as to how many droves of oxen and Lake +Eries of wine might have run through his great mill during the full +term of his mortal career. Fat men not immortal! This very instant, old +Lambert is rubbing his jolly abdomen in Paradise. + +Now, to the fact of his not being rated a demi-god, was perhaps +ascribable the circumstance, that Borabolla comported himself with less +dignity, than was the wont of their Mardian majesties. And truth to +say, to have seen him regaling himself with one of his favorite +cuttle-fish, its long snaky arms and feelers instinctively twining +round his head as he ate; few intelligent observers would have opined +that the individual before them was the sovereign lord of Mondoldo. + +But what of the banquet of fish? Shall we tell how the old king +ungirdled himself thereto; how as the feast waxed toward its close, +with one sad exception, he still remained sunny-sided all round; his +disc of a face joyous as the South Side of Madeira in the hilarious +season of grapes? Shall we tell how we all grew glad and frank; and how +the din of the dinner was heard far into night? + +We will. + +When Media ate slowly, Borabolla took him to task, bidding him dispatch +his viands more speedily. + +Whereupon said Media “But Borabolla, my round fellow, that would +abridge the pleasure.” + +“Not at all, my dear demi-god; do like me: eat fast and eat long.” + +In the middle of the feast, a huge skin of wine was brought in. The +portly peltry of a goat; its horns embattling its effigy head; its +mouth the nozzle; and its long beard flowed to its jet-black hoofs. +With many ceremonial salams, the attendants bore it along, placing it +at one end of the convivial mats, full in front of Borabolla; where +seated upon its haunches it made one of the party. + +Brimming a ram’s horn, the mellowest of bugles, Borabolla bowed to his +silent guest, and thus spoke—“In this wine, which yet smells of the +grape, I pledge you my reverend old toper, my lord Capricornus; you +alone have enough; and here’s full skins to the rest!” + +“How jolly he is,” whispered Media to Babbalanja. + +“Ay, his lungs laugh loud; but is laughing, rejoicing?” + +“Help! help!” cried Borabolla “lay me down! lay me down! good gods, +what a twinge!” + +The goblet fell from his hand; the purple flew from his wine to his +face; and Borabolla fell back into the arms of his servitors. “That +gout! that gout!” he groaned. “Lord! lord! no more cursed wine will I +drink!” + +Then at ten paces distant, a clumsy attendant let fall a trencher—“Take +it off my foot, you knave!” + +Afar off another entered gallanting a calabash—“Look out for my toe, +you hound!” + +During all this, the attendants tenderly nursed him. And in good time, +with its thousand fangs, the gout-fiend departed for a while. + +Reprieved, the old king brightened up; by degrees becoming jolly as +ever. + +“Come! let us be merry again,” he cried, “what shall we eat? and what +shall we drink? that infernal gout is gone; come, what will your +worships have?” + +So at it once more we went. + +But of our feast, little more remains to be related than this;—that out +of it, grew a wondrous kindness between Borabolla and Jarl. Strange to +tell, from the first our fat host had regarded my Viking with a most +friendly eye. Still stranger to add, this feeling was returned. But +though they thus fancied each other, they were very unlike; Borabolla +and Jarl. Nevertheless, thus is it ever. And as the convex fits not +into the convex, but into the concave; so do men fit into their +opposites; and so fitted Borabolla’s arched paunch into Jarl’s, +hollowed out to receive it. + +But how now? Borabolla was jolly and loud: Jarl demure and silent; +Borabolla a king: Jarl only a Viking;—how came they together? Very +plain, to repeat:—because they were heterogeneous; and hence the +affinity. But as the affinity between those chemical opposites chlorine +and hydrogen, is promoted by caloric; so the affinity between Borabolla +and Jarl was promoted by the warmth of the wine that they drank at this +feast. For of all blessed fluids, the juice of the grape is the +greatest foe to cohesion. True, it tightens the girdle; but then it +loosens the tongue, and opens the heart. + +In sum, Borabolla loved Jarl; and Jarl, pleased with this sociable +monarch, for all his garrulity, esteemed him the most sensible old +gentleman and king he had as yet seen in Mardi. For this reason, +perhaps; that his talkativeness favored that silence in listeners, +which was my Viking’s delight in himself. + +Repeatedly during the banquet, our host besought Taji to allow his +henchman to remain on the island, after the rest of our party should +depart; and he faithfully promised to surrender Jarl, whenever we +should return to claim him. + +But though I harbored no distrust of Borabolla’s friendly intentions, I +could not so readily consent to his request; for with Jarl for my one +only companion, had I not both famished and feasted? was he not my only +link to things past? + +Things past!—Ah Yillah! for all its mirth, and though we hunted wide, +we found thee not in Mondoldo. + + + + +CHAPTER XCVI. +Samoa A Surgeon + + +The second day of our stay in Mondoldo was signalized by a noteworthy +exhibition of the surgical skill of Samoa; who had often boasted, that +though well versed in the science of breaking men’s heads, he was +equally an adept in mending their crockery. + +Overnight, Borabolla had directed his corps of sea-divers to repair +early on the morrow, to a noted section of the great Mardian reef, for +the purpose of procuring for our regalement some of the fine +Hawk’s-bill turtle, whose secret retreats were among the cells and +galleries of that submerged wall of coral, from whose foamy coping no +plummet dropped ever yet touched bottom. + +These turtles were only to be obtained by diving far down under the +surface; and then swimming along horizontally, and peering into the +coral honeycomb; snatching at a flipper when seen, as at a pinion in a +range of billing dove-cotes. + +As the king’s divers were thus employed, one of them, Karhownoo by +name, perceived a Devil-shark, so called, swimming wistfully toward him +from out his summer grotto in the reef. No way petrified by the sight, +and pursuing the usual method adopted by these divers in such +emergencies, Karhownoo, splashing the water, instantly swam toward the +stranger. But the shark, undaunted, advanced: a thing so unusual, and +fearful, that, in an agony of fright, the diver shot up for the +surface. Heedless, he looked not up as he went; and when within a few +inches of the open air, dashed his head against a projection of the +reef. He would have sank into the live tomb beneath, were it not that +three of his companions, standing on the brink, perceived his peril, +and dragged him into safety. + +Seeing the poor fellow was insensible, they endeavored, ineffectually, +to revive him; and at last, placing him in their canoe, made all haste +for the shore. Here a crowd soon gathered, and the diver was borne to a +habitation, close adjoining Borabolla’s; whence, hearing of the +disaster, we sallied out to render assistance. + +Upon entering the hut, the benevolent old king commanded it to be +cleared; and then proceeded to examine the sufferer. + +The skull proved to be very badly fractured; in one place, splintered. + +“Let me mend it,” said Samoa, with ardor. + +And being told of his experience in such matters, Borabolla surrendered +the patient. + +With a gourd of water, and a tappa cloth, the one-armed Upoluan +carefully washed the wound; and then calling for a sharp splinter of +bamboo, and a thin, semi-transparent cup of cocoa-nut shell, he went +about the operation: nothing less than the “Tomoti” (head-mending), in +other words the trepan. + +The patient still continuing insensible, the fragments were disengaged +by help of a bamboo scalpel; when a piece of the drinking +cup—previously dipped in the milk of a cocoanut—was nicely fitted into +the vacancy, the skin as nicely adjusted over it, and the operation was +complete. + +And now, while all present were crying out in admiration of Samoa’s +artistic skill, and Samoa himself stood complacently regarding his +workmanship, Babbalanja suggested, that it might be well to ascertain +whether the patient survived. When, upon sounding his heart, the diver +was found to be dead. + +The bystanders loudly lamented; but declared the surgeon a man of +marvelous science. + +Returning to Borabolla’s, much conversation ensued, concerning the sad +scene we had witnessed, which presently branched into a learned +discussion upon matters of surgery at large. + +At length, Samoa regaled the company with a story; for the truth of +which no one but him can vouch, for no one but him was by, at the time; +though there is testimony to show that it involves nothing at variance +with the customs of certain barbarous tribes. + +Read on. + + + + +CHAPTER XCVII. +Faith And Knowledge + + +A thing incredible is about to be related; but a thing may be +incredible and still be true; sometimes it is incredible because it is +true. And many infidels but disbelieve the least incredible things; and +many bigots reject the most obvious. But let us hold fast to all we +have; and stop all leaks in our faith; lest an opening, but of a hand’s +breadth, should sink our seventy-fours. The wide Atlantic can rush in +at one port-hole; and if we surrender a plank, we surrender the fleet. +Panoplied in all the armor of St. Paul, morion, hauberk, and greaves, +let us fight the Turks inch by inch, and yield them naught but our +corpse. + +But let us not turn round upon friends, confounding them with foes. For +dissenters only assent to more than we. Though Milton was a heretic to +the creed of Athanasius, his faith exceeded that of Athanasius himself; +and the faith of Athanasius that of Thomas, the disciple, who with his +own eyes beheld the mark of the nails. Whence it comes that though we +be all Christians now, the best of us had perhaps been otherwise in the +days of Thomas. + +The higher the intelligence, the more faith, and the less credulity: +Gabriel rejects more than we, but out-believes us all. The greatest +marvels are first truths; and first truths the last unto which we +attain. Things nearest are furthest off. Though your ear be next-door +to your brain, it is forever removed from your sight. Man has a more +comprehensive view of the moon, than the man in the moon himself. We +know the moon is round; he only infers it. It is because we ourselves +are in ourselves, that we know ourselves not. And it is only of our +easy faith, that we are not infidels throughout; and only of our lack +of faith, that we believe what we do. + +In some universe-old truths, all mankind are disbelievers. Do you +believe that you lived three thousand years ago? That you were at the +taking of Tyre, were overwhelmed in Gomorrah? No. But for me, I was at +the subsiding of the Deluge, and helped swab the ground, and build the +first house. With the Israelites, I fainted in the wilderness; was in +court, when Solomon outdid all the judges before him. I, it was, who +suppressed the lost work of Manetho, on the Egyptian theology, as +containing mysteries not to be revealed to posterity, and things at war +with the canonical scriptures; I, who originated the conspiracy against +that purple murderer, Domitian; I, who in the senate moved, that great +and good Aurelian be emperor. I instigated the abdication of +Diocletian, and Charles the Fifth; I touched Isabella’s heart, that she +hearkened to Columbus. I am he, that from the king’s minions hid the +Charter in the old oak at Hartford; I harbored Goffe and Whalley: I am +the leader of the Mohawk masks, who in the Old Commonwealth’s harbor, +overboard threw the East India Company’s Souchong; I am the Vailed +Persian Prophet; I, the man in the iron mask; I, Junius. + + + + +CHAPTER XCVIII. +The Tale Of A Traveler + + +It was Samoa, who told the incredible tale; and he told it as a +traveler. But stay-at-homes say travelers lie. Yet a voyage to Ethiopia +would cure them of that; for few skeptics are travelers; fewer +travelers liars, though the proverb respecting them lies. It is false, +as some say, that Bruce was cousin-german to Baron Munchausen; but +true, as Bruce said, that the Abysinnians cut live steaks from their +cattle. It was, in good part, his villainous transcribers, who made +monstrosities of Mandeville’s travels. And though all liars go to +Gehenna; yet, assuming that Mandeville died before Dante; still, though +Dante took the census of Hell, we find not Sir John, under the likeness +of a roasted neat’s tongue, in that infernalest of infernos, The +Inferno. + +But let not the truth be postponed. To the stand, Samoa, and through +your interpreter, speak. + +Once upon a time, during his endless sea-rovings, the Upoluan was +called upon to cobble the head of a friend, grievously hurt in a +desperate fight of slings. + +Upon examination, that part of the brain proving as much injured as the +cranium itself, a young pig was obtained; and preliminaries being over, +part of its live brain was placed in the cavity, the trepan +accomplished with cocoanut shell, and the scalp drawn over and secured. + +This man died not, but lived. But from being a warrior of great sense +and spirit, he became a perverse-minded and piggish fellow, showing +many of the characteristics of his swinish grafting. He survived the +operation more than a year; at the end of that period, however, going +mad, and dying in his delirium. + +Stoutly backed by the narrator, this anecdote was credited by some +present. But Babbalanja held out to the last. + +“Yet, if this story be true,” said he, “and since it is well settled, +that our brains are somehow the organs of sense; then, I see not why +human reason could not be put into a pig, by letting into its cranium +the contents of a man’s. I have long thought, that men, pigs, and +plants, are but curious physiological experiments; and that science +would at last enable philosophers to produce new species of beings, by +somehow mixing, and concocting the essential ingredients of various +creatures; and so forming new combinations. My friend Atahalpa, the +astrologer and alchymist, has long had a jar, in which he has been +endeavoring to hatch a fairy, the ingredients being compounded +according to a receipt of his own.” + +But little they heeded Babbalanja. It was the traveler’s tale that most +arrested attention. + +Tough the thews, and tough the tales of Samoa. + + + + +CHAPTER XCIX. +“Marnee Ora, Ora Marnee” + + +During the afternoon of the day of the diver’s decease, preparations +were making for paying the last rites to his remains, and carrying them +by torch-light to their sepulcher, the sea; for, as in Odo, so was the +custom here. + +Meanwhile, all over the isle, to and fro went heralds, dismally +arrayed, beating shark-skin drums; and, at intervals, crying—“A man is +dead; let no fires be kindled; have mercy, oh Oro!—Let no canoes put to +sea till the burial. This night, oh Oro!—Let no food be cooked.” + +And ever and anon, passed and repassed these, others in brave attire; +with castanets of pearl shells, making gay music; and these sang— + +Be merry, oh men of Mondoldo, + A maiden this night is to wed: +Be merry, oh damsels of Mardi,— + Flowers, flowers for the bridal bed. + + +Informed that the preliminary rites were about being rendered, we +repaired to the arbor, whither the body had been removed. + +Arrayed in white, it was laid out on a mat; its arms mutely crossed, +between its lips an asphodel; at the feet, a withered hawthorn bough. + +The relatives were wailing, and cutting themselves with shells, so that +blood flowed, and spotted their vesture. + +Upon remonstrating with the most abandoned of these mourners, the wife +of the diver, she exclaimed, “Yes; great is the pain, but greater my +affliction.” + +Another, the deaf sire of the dead, went staggering about, and groping; +saying, that he was now quite blind; for some months previous he had +lost one eye in the death of his eldest son and now the other was gone. + +“I am childless,” he cried; “henceforth call me Roi Mori,” that is, +Twice-Blind. + +While the relatives were thus violently lamenting, the rest of the +company occasionally scratched themselves with their shells; but very +slightly, and mostly on the soles of their feet; from long exposure, +quite callous. This was interrupted, however, when the real mourners +averted their eyes; though at no time was there any deviation in the +length of their faces. + +But on all sides, lamentations afresh broke forth, upon the appearance +of a person who had been called in to assist in solemnizing the +obsequies, and also to console the afflicted. + +In rotundity, he was another Borabolla. He puffed and panted. + +As he approached the corpse, a sobbing silence ensued; when holding the +hand of the dead, between his, the stranger thus spoke:— + +“Mourn not, oh friends of Karhownoo, that this your brother lives not. +His wounded head pains him no more; he would not feel it, did a javelin +pierce him. Yea; Karhownoo is exempt from all the ills and evils of +this miserable Mardi!” + +Hereupon, the Twice-Blind, who being deaf, heard not what was said, +tore his gray hair, and cried, “Alas! alas! my boy; thou wert the +merriest man in Mardi, and now thy pranks are over!” + +But the other proceeded—“Mourn not, I say, oh friends of Karhownoo; the +dead whom ye deplore is happier than the living; is not his spirit in +the aerial isles?” + +“True! true!” responded the raving wife, mingling her blood with her +tears, “my own poor hapless Karhownoo is thrice happy in Paradise!” And +anew she wailed, and lacerated her cheeks. + +“Rave not, I say.” + +But she only raved the more. + +And now the good stranger departed; saying, he must hie to a wedding, +waiting his presence in an arbor adjoining. + +Understanding that the removal of the body would not take place till +midnight, we thought to behold the mode of marrying in Mondoldo. + +Drawing near the place, we were greeted by merry voices, and much +singing, which greatly increased when the good stranger was perceived. + +Gayly arrayed in fine robes, with plumes on their heads, the bride and +groom stood in the middle of a joyous throng, in readiness for the +nuptial bond to be tied. + +Standing before them, the stranger was given a cord, so bedecked with +flowers, as to disguise its stout fibers; and taking: the bride’s +hands, he bound them together to a ritual chant; about her neck, in +festoons, disposing the flowery ends of the cord. Then turning to the +groom, he was given another, also beflowered; but attached thereto was +a great stone, very much carved, and stained; indeed, so every way +disguised, that a person not knowing what it was, and lifting it, would +be greatly amazed at its weight. This cord being attached to the waist +of the groom, he leaned over toward the bride, by reason of the burden +of the drop. + +All present now united in a chant, and danced about the happy pair, who +meanwhile looked ill at ease; the one being so bound by the hands, and +the other solely weighed down by his stone. + +A pause ensuing, the good stranger, turning them back to back, thus +spoke:— + +“By thy flowery gyves, oh bride, I make thee a wife; and by thy +burdensome stone, oh groom, I make thee a husband. Live and be happy, +both; for the wise and good Oro hath placed us in Mardi to be glad. +Doth not all nature rejoice in her green groves and her flowers? and +woo and wed not the fowls of the air, trilling their bliss in their +bowers? Live then, and be happy, oh bride and groom; for Oro is +offended with the unhappy, since he meant them to be gay.” + +And the ceremony ended with a joyful feast. + +But not all nuptials in Mardi were like these. Others were wedded with +different rites; without the stone and flowery gyves. These were they +who plighted their troth with tears not smiles, and made responses in +the heart. + +Returning from the house of the merry to the house of the mournful, we +lingered till midnight to witness the issuing forth of the body. + +By torch light, numerous canoes, with paddlers standing by, were drawn +up on the beach, to accommodate those who purposed following the poor +diver to his home. + +The remains embarked, some confusion ensued concerning the occupancy of +the rest of the shallops. At last the procession glided off, our party +included. Two by two, forming a long line of torches trailing round the +isle, the canoes all headed toward the opening in the reef. + +For a time, a decorous silence was preserved; but presently, some +whispering was heard; perhaps melancholy discoursing touching the close +of the diver’s career. But we were shocked to discover, that poor +Karhownoo was not much in their thoughts; they were conversing about +the next bread-fruit harvest, and the recent arrival of King Media and +party at Mondoldo. From far in advance, however, were heard the +lamentations of the true mourners, the relatives of the diver. + +Passing the reef, and sailing a little distance therefrom, the canoes +were disposed in a circle; the one bearing the corpse in the center. +Certain ceremonies over, the body was committed to the waves; the white +foam lighting up the last, long plunge of the diver, to see sights more +strange than ever he saw in the brooding cells of the Turtle Reef. + +And now, while in the still midnight, all present were gazing down into +the ocean, watching the white wake of the corpse, ever and anon +illuminated by sparkles, an unknown voice was heard, and all started +and vacantly stared, as this wild song was sung:— + +We drop our dead in the sea, + The bottomless, bottomless sea; +Each bubble a hollow sigh, + As it sinks forever and aye. + +We drop our dead in the sea,— + The dead reek not of aught; +We drop our dead in the sea,— + The sea ne’er gives it a thought. + +Sink, sink, oh corpse, still sink, + Far down in the bottomless sea, +Where the unknown forms do prowl, + Down, down in the bottomless sea. + +’Tis night above, and night all round, + And night will it be with thee; +As thou sinkest, and sinkest for aye, + Deeper down in the bottomless sea. + + +The mysterious voice died away; no sign of the corpse was now seen; and +mute with amaze, the company long listed to the low moan of the billows +and the sad sough of the breeze. + +At last, without speaking, the obsequies were concluded by sliding into +the ocean a carved tablet of Palmetto, to mark the place of the burial. +But a wave-crest received it, and fast it floated away. + +Returning to the isle, long silence prevailed. But at length, as if the +scene in which they had just taken part, afresh reminded them of the +mournful event which had called them together, the company again +recurred to it; some present, sadly and incidentally alluding to +Borabolla’s banquet of turtle, thereby postponed. + + + + +CHAPTER C. +The Pursuer Himself Is Pursued + + +Next morning, when much to the chagrin of Borabolla we were preparing +to quit his isle, came tidings to the palace, of a wonderful event, +occurring in one of the “Motoos,” or little islets of the great reef; +which “Motoo” was included in the dominions of the king. + +The men who brought these tidings were highly excited; and no sooner +did they make known what they knew, than all Mondoldo was in a tumult +of marveling. + +Their story was this. + +Going at day break to the Motoo to fish, they perceived a strange proa +beached on its seaward shore; and presently were hailed by voices; and +saw among the palm trees, three specter-like men, who were not of +Mardi. + +The first amazement of the fishermen over, in reply to their eager +questions, the strangers related, that they were the survivors of a +company of men, natives of some unknown island to the northeast; whence +they had embarked for another country, distant three days’ sail to the +southward of theirs. But falling in with a terrible adventure, in which +their sire had been slain, they altered their course to pursue the +fugitive who murdered him; one and all vowing, never more to see home, +until their father’s fate was avenged. The murderer’s proa outsailing +theirs, soon ran out of sight; yet after him they blindly steered by +day and by night: steering by the blood- red star in Bootes. Soon, a +violent gale overtook them; driving them to and fro; leaving them they +knew not where. But still struggling against strange currents, at times +counteracting their sailing, they drifted on their way; nigh to +famishing for water; and no shore in sight. In long calms, in vain they +held up their dry gourds to heaven, and cried “send us a breeze, sweet +gods!” The calm still brooded; and ere it was gone, all but three +gasped; and dead from thirst, were plunged into the sea. The breeze +which followed the calm, soon brought them in sight of a low, +uninhabited isle; where tarrying many days, they laid in good store of +cocoanuts and water, and again embarked. + +The next land they saw was Mardi; and they landed on the Motoo, still +intent on revenge. + +This recital filled Taji with horror. + +Who could these avengers be, but the sons of him I had slain. I had +thought them far hence, and myself forgotten; and now, like adders, +they started up in my path, as I hunted for Yillah. + +But I dissembled my thoughts. + +Without waiting to hear more, Borabolla, all curiosity to behold the +strangers, instantly dispatched to the Motoo one of his fleetest +canoes, with orders to return with the voyagers. + +Ere long they came in sight; and perceiving that strange pros in tow of +the king’s, Samoa cried out: “Lo! Taji, the canoe that was going to +Tedaidee!” + +Too true; the same double-keeled craft, now sorely broken, the fatal +dais in wild disarray: the canoe, the canoe of Aleema! And with it came +the spearmen three, who, when the Chamois was fleeing from their bow, +had poised their javelins. But so wan their aspect now, their faces +looked like skulls. + +Then came over me the wild dream of Yillah; and, for a space, like a +madman, I raved. It seemed as if the mysterious damsel must still be +there; the rescue yet to be achieved. In my delirium I rushed upon the +skeletons, as they landed—“Hide not the maiden!” But interposing, Media +led me aside; when my transports abated. + +Now, instantly, the strangers knew who I was; and, brandishing their +javelins, they rushed upon me, as I had on them, with a yell. But +deeming us all mad, the crowd held us apart; when, writhing in the arms +that restrained them, the pale specters foamed out their curses again +and again: “Oh murderer! white curses upon thee! Bleached be thy soul +with our hate! Living, our brethren cursed thee; and dying, dry-lipped, +they cursed thee again. They died not through famishing for water, but +for revenge upon thee! Thy blood, their thirst would have slaked!” + +I lay fainting against the hard-throbbing heart of Samoa, while they +showered their yells through the air. Once more, in my thoughts, the +green corpse of the priest drifted by. + +Among the people of Mondoldo, a violent commotion now raged. They were +amazed at Taji’s recognition by the strangers, and at the deadly +ferocity they betrayed. + +Rallying upon this, and perceiving that by divulging all they knew, +these sons of Aleema might stir up the Islanders against me, I resolved +to anticipate their story; and, turning to Borabolla, said— “In these +strangers, oh, king! you behold the survivors of a band we encountered +on our voyage. From them I rescued a maiden, called Yillah, whom they +were carrying captive. Little more of their history do I know.” + +“Their maledictions?” exclaimed Borabolla. + +“Are they not delirious with suffering?” I cried. “They know not what +they say.” + +So, moved by all this, he commanded them to be guarded, and conducted +within his palisade; and having supplied them with cheer, entered into +earnest discourse. Yet all the while, the pale strangers on me fixed +their eyes; deep, dry, crater-like hollows, lurid with flames, +reflected from the fear-frozen glacier, my soul. + +But though their hatred appalled, spite of that spell, again the sweet +dream of Yillah stole over me, with all the mysterious things by her +narrated, but left unexplained. And now, before me were those who might +reveal the lost maiden’s whole history, previous to the fatal affray. + +Thus impelled, I besought them to disclose what they knew. + +But, “Where now is your Yillah?” they cried. “Is the murderer wedded +and merry? Bring forth the maiden!” + +Yet, though they tore out my heart’s core, I told them not of my loss. + +Then, anxious, to learn the history of Yillah, all present commanded +them to divulge it; and breathlessly I heard what follows. + +“Of Yillah, we know only this:—that many moons ago, a mighty canoe, +full of beings, white, like this murderer Taji, touched at our island +of Amma. Received with wonder, they were worshiped as gods; were +feasted all over the land. Their chief was a tower to behold; and with +him, was a being, whose cheeks were of the color of the red coral; her +eye, tender as the blue of the sky. Every day our people brought her +offerings of fruit and flowers; which last she would not retain for +herself; but hung them round the neck of her child, Yillah; then only +an infant in her mother’s arms; a bud, nestling close to a flower, +full-blown. All went well between our people and the gods, till at last +they slew three of our countrymen, charged with stealing from their +great canoe. Our warriors retired to the hills, brooding over revenge. +Three days went by; when by night, descending to the plain, in silence +they embarked; gained the great vessel, and slaughtered every soul but +Yillah. The bud was torn from the flower; and, by our father Aleema, +was carried to the Valley of Ardair; there set apart as a sacred +offering for Apo, our deity. Many moons passed; and there arose a +tumult, hostile to our sire’s longer holding custody of Yillah; when, +foreseeing that the holy glen would ere long be burst open, he embarked +the maiden in yonder canoe, to accelerate her sacrifice at the great +shrine of Apo, in Tedaidee.—The rest thou knowest, murderer!” + +“Yillah! Yillah!” now hunted again that sound through my soul. “Oh, +Yillah! too late, too late have I learned what thou art!” + +Apprised of the disappearance of their former captive, the meager +strangers exulted; declaring that Apo had taken her to himself. For me, +ere long, my blood they would quaff from my skull. + +But though I shrunk from their horrible threats, I dissembled anew; and +turning, again swore that they raved. + +“Ay!” they retorted, “we rave and raven for you; and your white heart +will we have!” + +Perceiving the violence of their rage, and persuaded from what I said, +that much suffering at sea must have maddened them; Borabolla thought +fit to confine them for the present; so that they could not molest me. + + + + +CHAPTER CI. +The Iris + + +That evening, in the groves, came to me three gliding forms:—Hautia’s +heralds: the Iris mixed with nettles. Said Yoomy, “A cruel message!” + +With the right hand, the second syren presented glossy, green wax- +myrtle berries, those that burn like tapers; the third, a lily of the +valley, crushed in its own broad leaf. + +This done, they earnestly eyed Yoomy; who, after much pondering, +said—“I speak for Hautia; who by these berries says, I will enlighten +you.” + +“Oh, give me then that light! say, where is Yillah?” and I rushed upon +the heralds. + +But eluding me, they looked reproachfully at Yoomy; and seemed +offended. + +“Then, I am wrong,” said Yoomy. “It is thus:—Taji, you have been +enlightened, but the lily you seek is crushed.” + +Then fell my heart, and the phantoms nodded; flinging upon me +bilberries, like rose pearls, which bruised against my skin, left +stains. + +Waving oleanders, they retreated. + +“Harm! treachery! beware!” cried Yoomy. + +Then they glided through the wood: one showering dead leaves along the +path I trod, the others gayly waving bunches of spring-crocuses, +yellow, white, and purple; and thus they vanished. + +Said Yoomy, “Sad your path, but merry Hautia’s.” + +“Then merry may she be, whoe’er she is; and though woe be mine, I turn +not from that to Hautia; nor ever will I woo her, though she woo me +till I die;—though Yillah never bless my eyes.” + + + + +CHAPTER CII. +They Depart From Mondoldo + + +Night passed; and next morning we made preparations for leaving +Mondoldo that day. + +But fearing anew, lest after our departure, the men of Amma might stir +up against me the people of the isle, I determined to yield to the +earnest solicitations of Borabolla, and leave Jarl behind, for a +remembrance of Taji; if necessary, to vindicate his name. Apprised +hereof, my follower was loth to acquiesce. His guiltless spirit feared +not the strangers: less selfish considerations prevailed. He was +willing to remain on the island for a time, but not without me. Yet, +setting forth my reasons; and assuring him, that our tour would not be +long in completing, when we would not fail to return, previous to +sailing for Odo, he at last, but reluctantly, assented. + +At Mondoldo, we also parted with Samoa. Whether it was, that he feared +the avengers, whom he may have thought would follow on my track; or +whether the islands of Mardi answered not in attractiveness to the +picture his fancy had painted; or whether the restraint put upon him by +the domineering presence of King Media, was too irksome withal; or +whether, indeed, he relished not those disquisitions with which +Babbalanja regaled us: however it may have been, certain it was, that +Samoa was impatient of the voyage. He besought permission to return to +Odo, there to await my return; and a canoe of Mondoldo being about to +proceed in that direction, permission was granted; and departing for +the other side of the island, from thence he embarked. + +Long after, dark tidings came, that at early dawn he had been found +dead in the canoe: three arrows in his side. + +Yoomy was at a loss to account for the departure of Samoa; who, while +ashore, had expressed much desire to roam. + +Media, however, declared that he must be returning to some inamorata. + +But Babbalanja averred, that the Upoluan was not the first man, who had +turned back, after beginning a voyage like our own. + +To this, after musing, Yoomy assented. Indeed, I had noticed, that +already the Warbler had abated those sanguine assurances of success, +with which he had departed from Odo. The futility of our search thus +far, seemed ominous to him, of the end. + +On the eve of embarking, we were accompanied to the beach by Borabolla; +who, with his own hand, suspended from the shark’s mouth of Media’s +canoe, three red-ripe bunches of plantains, a farewell gift to his +guests. + +Though he spoke not a word, Jarl was long in taking leave. His eyes +seemed to say, I will see you no more. + +At length we pushed from the strand; Borabolla waving his adieus with a +green leaf of banana; our comrade ruefully eyeing the receding canoes; +and the multitude loudly invoking for us a prosperous voyage. + +But to my horror, there suddenly dashed through the crowd, the three +specter sons of Aleema, escaped from their prison. With clenched hands, +they stood in the water, and cursed me anew. And with that curse in our +sails, we swept off. + + + + +CHAPTER CIII. +As They Sail + + +As the canoes now glided across the lagoon, I gave myself up to +reverie; and revolving over all that the men of Amma had rehearsed of +the history of Yillah, I one by one unriddled the mysteries, before so +baffling. Now, all was made plain: no secret remaining, but the +subsequent event of her disappearance. Yes, Hautia! enlightened I had +been but where was Yillah? + +Then I recalled that last interview with Hautia’s messengers, so full +of enigmas; and wondered, whether Yoomy had interpreted aright. Unseen, +and unsolicited; still pursuing me with omens, with taunts, and with +wooings, mysterious Hautia appalled me. Vaguely I began to fear her. +And the thought, that perhaps again and again, her heralds would haunt +me, filled me with a nameless dread, which I almost shrank from +acknowledging. Inwardly I prayed, that never more they might appear. + +While full of these thoughts, Media interrupted them by saying, that +the minstrel was about to begin one of his chants, a thing of his own +composing; and therefore, as he himself said, all critics must be +lenient; for Yoomy, at times, not always, was a timid youth, +distrustful of his own sweet genius for poesy. + +The words were about a curious hereafter, believed in by some people in +Mardi: a sort of nocturnal Paradise, where the sun and its heat are +excluded: one long, lunar day, with twinkling stars to keep company. + +THE SONG +Far off in the sea is Marlena, +A land of shades and streams, +A land of many delights. +Dark and bold, thy shores, +Marlena; But green, and timorous, thy soft knolls, +Crouching behind the woodlands. +All shady thy hills; all gleaming thy springs, +Like eyes in the earth looking at you. +How charming thy haunts Marlena!— +Oh, the waters that flow through Onimoo: +Oh, the leaves that rustle through Ponoo: +Oh, the roses that blossom in Tarma: +Come, and see the valley of Vina: +How sweet, how sweet, the Isles from Hind: +’Tis aye afternoon of the full, full moon, +And ever the season of fruit, +And ever the hour of flowers, +And never the time of rains and gales, +All in and about Marlena. +Soft sigh the boughs in the stilly air, +Soft lap the beach the billows there; +And in the woods or by the streams, +You needs must nod in the Land of Dreams. + + +“Yoomy,” said old Mohi with a yawn, “you composed that song, then, did +you?” + +“I did,” said Yoomy, placing his turban a little to one side. + +“Then, minstrel, you shall sing me to sleep every night, especially +with that song of Marlena; it is soporific as the airs of Nora-Bamma.” + +“Mean you, old man, that my lines, setting forth the luxurious repose +to be enjoyed hereafter, are composed with such skill, that the +description begets the reality; or would you ironically suggest, that +the song is a sleepy thing itself?” + +“An important discrimination,” said Media; “which mean you, Mohi?” + +“Now, are you not a silly boy,” said Babbalanja, “when from the +ambiguity of his speech, you could so easily have derived something +flattering, thus to seek to extract unpleasantness from it? Be wise, +Yoomy; and hereafter, whenever a remark like that seems equivocal, be +sure to wrest commendation from it, though you torture it to the +quick.” + +“And most sure am I, that I would ever do so; but often I so incline to +a distrust of my powers, that I am far more keenly alive to censure, +than to praise; and always deem it the more sincere of the two; and no +praise so much elates me, as censure depresses.” + + + + +CHAPTER CIV. +Wherein Babbalanja Broaches A Diabolical Theory, And In His Own Person +Proves It + + +“A truce!” cried Media, “here comes a gallant before the wind.—Look, +Taji!” + +Turning, we descried a sharp-prowed canoe, dashing on, under the +pressure of an immense triangular sail, whose outer edges were +streaming with long, crimson pennons. Flying before it, were several +small craft, belonging to the poorer sort of Islanders. + +“Out of his way there, ye laggards,” cried Media, “or that mad prince, +Tribonnora, will ride over ye with a rush!” + +“And who is Tribonnora,” said Babbalanja, “that he thus bravely diverts +himself, running down innocent paddlers?” + +“A harum-scarum young chief,” replied Media, “heir to three islands; he +likes nothing better than the sport you now see see him at.” + +“He must be possessed by a devil,” said Mohi. + +Said Babbalanja, “Then he is only like all of us.” “What say you?” +cried Media. + +“I say, as old Bardianna in the Nine hundred and ninety ninth book of +his immortal Ponderings saith, that all men—” + +“As I live, my lord, he has swamped three canoes,” cried Mohi, pointing +off the beam. + +But just then a fiery fin-back whale, having broken into the paddock of +the lagoon, threw up a high fountain of foam, almost under Tribonnora’s +nose; who, quickly turning about his canoe, cur-like slunk off; his +steering-paddle between his legs. + +Comments over; “Babbalanja, you were going to quote,” said Media. +“Proceed.” + +“Thank you, my lord. Says old Bardianna, ‘All men are possessed by +devils; but as these devils are sent into men, and kept in them, for an +additional punishment; not garrisoning a fortress, but limboed in a +bridewell; so, it may be more just to say, that the devils themselves +are possessed by men, not men by them.’” + +“Faith!” cried Media, “though sometimes a bore, your old Bardianna is a +trump.” + +“I have long been of that mind, my lord. But let me go on. Says +Bardianna, ‘Devils are divers;—strong devils, and weak devils; knowing +devils, and silly devils; mad devils, and mild devils; devils, merely +devils; devils, themselves bedeviled; devils, doubly bedeviled.” + +“And in the devil’s name, what sort of a devil is yours?” cried Mohi. + +“Of him anon; interrupt me not, old man. Thus, then, my lord, as devils +are divers, divers are the devils in men. Whence, the wide difference +we see. But after all, the main difference is this:—that one man’s +devil is only more of a devil than another’s; and be bedeviled as much +as you will; yet, may you perform the most bedeviled of actions with +impunity, so long as you only bedevil yourself. For it is only when +your deviltry injures another, that the other devils conspire to +confine yours for a mad one. That is to say, if you be easily handled. +For there are many bedeviled Bedlamites in Mardi, doing an infinity of +mischief, who are too brawny in the arms to be tied.” + +“A very devilish doctrine that,” cried Mohi. “I don’t believe it.” + +“My lord,” said Babbalanja, “here’s collateral proof;—the sage lawgiver +Yamjamma, who flourished long before Bardianna, roundly asserts, that +all men who knowingly do evil are bedeviled; for good is happiness; +happiness the object of living; and evil is not good.” + +“If the sage Yamjamma said that,” said old Mohi, “the sage Yamjamma +might have bettered the saying; it’s not quite so plain as it might +be.” + +“Yamjamma disdained to be plain; he scorned to be fully comprehended by +mortals. Like all oracles, he dealt in dark sayings. But old Bardianna +was of another sort; he spoke right out, going straight to the point +like a javelin; especially when he laid it down for a universal maxim, +that minus exceptions, all men are bedeviled.” + +“Of course, then,” said Media, “you include yourself among the number.” + +“Most assuredly; and so did old Bardianna; who somewhere says, that +being thoroughly bedeviled himself, he was so much the better qualified +to discourse upon the deviltries of his neighbors. But in another place +he seems to contradict himself, by asserting, that he is not so +sensible of his own deviltry as of other people’s.” + +“Hold!” cried Media, “who have we here?” and he pointed ahead of our +prow to three men in the water, urging themselves along, each with a +paddle. + +We made haste to overtake them. + +“Who are you?” said Media, “where from, and where bound?” + +“From Variora,” they answered, “and bound to Mondoldo.” “And did that +devil Tribonnora swamp your canoe?” asked Media, offering to help them +into ours. + +“We had no such useless incumbrance to lose,” they replied, resting on +their backs, and panting with their exertions. “If we had had a canoe, +we would have had to paddle it along with us; whereas we have only our +bodies to paddle.” + +“You are a parcel of loons,” exclaimed Media. “But go your ways, if you +are satisfied with your locomotion, well and good.” + +“Now, it is an extreme case, I grant,” said Babbalanja, “but those poor +devils there, help to establish old Bardianna’s position. They belong +to that species of our bedeviled race, called simpletons; but their +devils harming none but themselves, are permitted to be at large with +the fish. Whereas, Tribonnora’s devil, who daily runs down canoes, +drowning their occupants, belongs to the species of out and out devils; +but being high in station, and strongly backed by kith and kin, +Tribonnora can not be mastered, and put in a strait jacket. For myself, +I think my devil is some where between these two extremes; at any rate, +he belongs to that class of devils who harm not other devils.” + +“I am not so sure of that,” retorted Media. “Methinks this doctrine of +yours, about all mankind being bedeviled, will work a deal of mischief; +seeing that by implication it absolves you mortals from moral +accountability. Further-more; as your doctrine is exceedingly evil, by +Yamjamma’s theory it follows, that you must be proportionably +bedeviled; and since it harms others, your devil is of the number of +those whom it is best to limbo; and since he is one of those that can +be limboed, limboed he shall be in you.” + +And so saying, he humorously commanded his attendants to lay hands upon +the bedeviled philosopher, and place a bandage upon his mouth, that he +might no more disseminate his devilish doctrine. + +Against this, Babbalanja demurred, protesting that he was no +orang-outang, to be so rudely handled. + +“Better and better,” said Media, “you but illustrate Bardianna’s +theory; that men are not sensible of their being bedeviled.” + +Thus tantalized, Babbalanja displayed few signs of philosophy. + +Whereupon, said Media, “Assuredly his devil is foaming; behold his +mouth!” And he commanded him to be bound hand and foot. + +At length, seeing all resistance ineffectual, Babbalanja submitted; but +not without many objurgations. + +Presently, however, they released him; when Media inquired, how he +relished the application of his theory; and whether he was still’ of +old Bardianna’s mind? + +To which, haughtily adjusting his robe, Babbalanja replied, “The strong +arm, my lord, is no argument, though it overcomes all logic.” + + END OF VOL. I. + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 13720 *** |